Danload 6000 Script Language Reference Manual: Daniel Measurement and Control Houston, Texas

DanLoad 6000
SCRIPT LANGUAGE
REFERENCE MANUAL
__________________________________________
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

HOUSTON, TEXAS
Part Number: 3-9000-678

Revision F
SEPTEMBER 1999
This page intentionally left blank.
Year 2000 Warranty
The Company represents and warrants that computer programs in any medium, software, firmware
and combinations thereof (“Deliverables”) manufactured by the Company and incorporated into
or supplied by the Company for use with goods manufactured by the Company will, under normal
use and care:
i) recognize and accept dates falling on or after 1 January 2000;
ii) recognize and accept the year 2000 and every succeeding fourth year as leap years;
iii) recognize and accept 29 February in the year 2000 and every succeeding fourth
year;
iv) record, store, process, sequence, present and output calendar dates and data related
to dates falling on or after 1 January 2000, in the same manner and with the same
functionality as they do on or before 31 December 1999 and without errors or
omissions; and
v) lose no functionality with respect to the introduction into them of dates or data
related to dates falling on or after 1 January 2000;
provided that, in the case of any non-conforming Deliverables that are returned to the Company
promptly following discovery of the non-conformity, the Company will, at its option and cost,
repair or replace such Deliverable or refund to the Purchaser the purchase price therefor. This
shall be the Purchaser’s sole and exclusive remedy for breach of the foregoing warranty.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall not, under any circumstances whatsoever, be
liable for any defects or errors caused by: materials or workmanship made, furnished or specified
by the Purchaser; non-compliance with the Company’s installation or operation requirements;
failure to install any revisions and/or upgrades to the Deliverables deemed mandatory by the
Company; any modifications to Deliverables not previously authorized by the Company in writing;
the use by the Purchaser of any non-authorized spare or replacement parts in connection with the
goods used in conjunction with the Deliverables; or the use of the Deliverables with any hardware
or software not supplied by the Company. The Purchaser shall at all times remain solely
responsible for the adequacy and accuracy of all information supplied by it. Any third party
content in Deliverables shall carry only the warranty extended by the original manufacturer.
THE FOREGOING CONSTITUTES THE COMPANY’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
WARRANTY IN RELATION TO THE PERFORMANCE OF THE DELIVERABLES AS IT
RELATES TO THE CHANGE FROM YEAR 1999 TO YEAR 2000 OR THE OCCURRENCE
OF LEAP YEARS THEREAFTER, AND THE PURCHASER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
BREACH THEREOF. IN NO EVENT WILL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOSS OF USE,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR LOSS OF PROFITS, IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER THE
COMPANY HAD NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
The foregoing warranty shall remain valid until the later of December 31, 2000 or one year after
the date that the Deliverable was shipped.
DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC.
DANLOAD 6000 SCRIPT LANGUAGE
REFERENCE MANUAL
NOTICE
DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC. AND DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL ("DANIEL")

SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS IN THIS MANUAL
OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. DANIEL MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL
AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL DANIEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, ETC.
PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER

IDENTIFICATION ONLY AND MAY BE TRADEMARKS/REGISTERED TRADEMARKS
OF THESE COMPANIES.
COPYRIGHT © 1999
BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL
HOUSTON, TEXAS, U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or

copied in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic or
mechanical - without first receiving the written permission of
Daniel Measurement and Control, Houston, Texas, U.S.A.
WARRANTY
Daniel Measurement and Control ("Daniel") warrants all equipment manufactured by it to be free
from defects in workmanship and material, provided that such equipment was properly selected
for the service intended, properly installed, and not misused. Equipment which is returned,
transportation prepaid to Daniel within twelve (12) months of the date of shipment (eighteen (18)
months from date of shipment for destinations outside of the United States), which is found after
inspection by Daniel to be defective in workmanship or material, will be repaired or replaced at
Daniel' s sole option, free of charge, and return-shipped at lowest cost transportation. All
transportation charges and export fees will be billed to the customer. Warranties on devices
purchased from third party manufacturers not bearing a Daniel label shall have the warranty
provided by the third party manufacturer.
The warranties specified herein are in lieu of any and all other warranties, express or implied,
including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
Daniel shall be liable only for loss or damage directly caused by its sole negligence. Daniel's
liability for any loss or damage arising out of, connected with, or resulting from any breach hereof
shall in no case exceed the price allocable to the equipment or unit thereof which gives rise to the
claim. Daniel's liability shall terminate one year after the delivery of the equipment except for
overseas deliveries and extended warranty products as noted above.
In no event, whether as a result of breach of warranty or alleged negligence, shall Daniel be liable
for special or consequential damages, including, but not limited to, loss of profits or revenue; loss
of equipment or any associated equipment; cost of capital; cost of substitute equipment, facilities
or services; downtime costs; or claims of customers of the purchaser for such damages.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Functional Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2 Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.3 General Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
2.0 INSTALLATION
2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications ......................... 2-2
2.2 Installation Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.1 Card Cage Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.2 Input / Output Board Description and Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.3 Mechanical Installation ............................ 2-30
2.4 Electrical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.4.2 Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
2.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
2.4.3 Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.5.3 Wiring Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.5.4 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
3.0 SETUP
3.1 Overview ...................................... 3-3
3.2 Man-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.2.1 Data Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.2 Keypad Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.2.3 Script Language Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
i
3.3.1 Data Entry .................................... 3-25
3.4 Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.5 Process I/O Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3.5.1 Physical I/O Signal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.5.2 Flow Measurement and General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3.6 Product Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.6.1 Sequential Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
3.6.2 In-Line Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3.6.3 Off-Rack Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
3.7 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
3.8 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
3.9 Setup Checklist ................................ 3-106
3.10 Set Contrast / Backlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
4.0 OPERATION
4.1 Physical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.1 Displays and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-Numeric / Graphic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.1.1.3 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.3 Additive Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.1 Additive Injection Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.4 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4.4.1 Example Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4.5 Alarms /Fault Analysis / Correction /Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.5.1 Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.5.2 Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4.5.3 Crash Memory Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
5.0 FLOW METER PROVING

5.1 General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.1.1 Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5.2 Tank Prover Method .............................. 5-26
5.2.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 .............................. 5-27
5.2.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 .............................. 5-28
5.2.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 .............................. 5-29
5.2.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 .............................. 5-29
ii
5.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 ....................... 5-29
5.3 Master Meter Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.3.1 Meter Proof RUN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.3.2 Meter Proof RUN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.3.3 Meter Proof RUN 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.4 Meter Proof RUN 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
6.0 PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 Program Code Attributes ............................ 6-2
6.2 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3 Security Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.4 Unit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.5 Valve Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.6 Meter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6.7 Component Parameters ............................ 6-38
6.8 Delivery Parameters .............................. 6-40
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters ........................... 6-48
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters ........................ 6-56
6.12 Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
6.13 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6.14 I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
6.15 Additive I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.16 Component I/O Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-128
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134
6.18 Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-152
6.19 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-158
6.20 Dynamic Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-162
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166
6.21 Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-170
6.22 Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-176
6.23 Additive pumps / Block Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-188
iii
APPENDICES
A Installation Worksheets ............................ A-1
A.1 Flow Meter Logical Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.2 Component Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A.3 Flow Control Valve Logical I/O Signals ................. A-9
A.4 Additive Injection Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Worksheets 1 to 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
B.1 Program Code Default Value Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

B.2 Version Dependent Program Codes .................... B-51
C Recommended Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
D Drawings ..................................... D-1
FIGURES
1-1 Typical Load Rack ................................ 1-5
2-1 Standard Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2-2 Standard Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-3 Shallow Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-4 Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-5 Card cage Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2-6 DC Power Supply Voltage Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2-7 AC Power Input Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-8 CPU Board Jumpers .............................. 2-13
2-9 CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2-10 DUART Board Address Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2-11 2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-12 Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
iv
2-13 Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2-14 Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . 2-24
2-15 Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2-16 DC I/O Board Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
2-17 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
3-1 Menu Tree ..................................... 3-6

3-2 Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-3 General Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-4 Parameter View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-5 Keypad (English Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-6 Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3-7 Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
3-8 Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-9 Thai Script Character Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-10 Alphanumeric Codes for Thai Bitmap Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-11 Alpha-Numeric Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3-12 Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
3-13 Set Date and Time Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3-14 Alarm Action Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3-15 Flow Measurement - General ........................ 3-86
3-16 Delivery - Blending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3-17 Digital Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3-18 Two-Stage Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
(without Stem-Switches)
3-19 Two-Stage Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
(with Stem-Switches)
3-20 Set Contrast / Backlighting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-120
4-1 Keypad Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

4-2 Key Functions (Batch Delivery) ....................... 4-8
4-3 Recipe Selection Display (Typical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
v
4-4 Additive Selection Display .......................... 4-12
4-5 Loading Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-6 Diagnostic Menu ................................ 4-61
4-7 Input / Outputs Diagnostic .......................... 4-63
4-8 DUART Ports Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
5-1 Prover / Meter Volume Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

5-2 Meter Proving Report for Tank Prover Method (Typical) . . . . . . . 5-47
5-3 Meter Proving Report for Master Meter Method (Typical) . . . . . . 5-48
Master Meter Meter-Factors Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
6-1 Menu Tree .................................... 6-10

6-2 Parameters List Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
APN A Worksheets 1 to 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 to A-30
APN B Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 to B-50
vi
Section 1
Introduction
Functional Characteristics
Hardware Configuration
General Terminology
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This manual contains information on the installation, setup, and operation of the DanLoad 6000.
The DanLoad 6000 is a versatile microcomputer based batch delivery controller and liquid flow
computer. This type of instrument is commonly referred to as a Preset in the tanker vehicle
loading industry. The DanLoad 6000 is easy to setup on-site for utilization in virtually any
application that requires precise flow measurement and control of liquid batch deliveries. Batch
delivery operations are easily conducted in a logical manner. A batch delivery can be setup and
started with several intuitive commands. The instrument provides a graphic display of the
progress of the batch delivery.
Note
This manual covers the Script Language DanLoad 6000 software configuration version 1.20.
Several configuration parameters (Program Codes) and functions have been added or changed
from the Script Language DanLoad 6000 software version 1.00 and version B of this manual.
The Script Language DanLoad 6000 software version number is displayed during the startup
sequence after power is applied to the instrument.
How to use the Manual
The information contained in this manual is intended for use by operators, shift supervisors,
instrument technicians, process engineers, and terminal / plant managers. To the extent that is
practical, each section of the manual is designed as a stand alone document. The last section,
Section 6, contains a reference for the function of all program codes (parameters) that define the
operation of the DanLoad 6000.
Information applicable to new installations is located in the following sections.
# Section 1 - Introduction
# Section 2 - Installation
# Section 3 - Setup
# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 1
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Information applicable to system operation is located in the following sections.

# Section 4 - Operation
# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving
The individual sections contain the following information.

# Section 1 - Introduction (this section)
This section contains an overview of the capabilities of the DanLoad 6000. A glossary of terms
used throughout the manual is located at the rear of this section.
# Section 2 - Installation
This section contains information on installation planning, mechanical installation, and
electrical installation of the DanLoad 6000. Design considerations for on-site placement,
mounting, and wiring methods are included in this section. Also read Section 3, Section 6,
Appendix A, and Appendix B before installing the instrument.
# Section 3 - Setup
This section contains information on the initial setup (functional configuration), script language
activities and modification of setup parameters stored in the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad
6000 retains setup information in non-volatile memory. Therefore, the initial setup can be
performed in a shop or office, before on-site physical installation of the instrument. Also read
Section 2, Section 6, and Appendix B before installing the instrument.
1 - 2 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Section 4 - Operation
This section contains detailed information on local operation of the DanLoad 6000. Single
product delivery, multi-component blending, and additive injection procedures are covered.
Information on data logs and fault analysis and correction is also located in this section.
# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving

This section contains information on operator directed, manual flow meter proving using the
DanLoad 6000. The instrument can monitor and perform flow meter proofs using tank meter
provers, master flow meters, or mechanical displacement pipe provers.
# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions

This section contains reference information for all program codes (parameters) which
determine the functional configuration of the DanLoad 6000.
# Appendix A - Installation Worksheets

This appendix contains several worksheets that aid in designing and implementing the system
interconnections and field wiring. These worksheets are described in Section 2 - Installation.
# Appendix B - Program Code Configuration

This appendix contains a list of all parameters and their default values.
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 3
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Overview
The DanLoad 6000 can be operated in an independent stand-alone mode with batch delivery
operations monitored and controlled from the operator control panel located on front of the
DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 can also function as a slave unit in a terminal automation
system network. The information contained in this manual covers local operation of the DanLoad
6000 in the Stand-alone Mode. The DanLoad 6000 accepts process input signals from and
provides process control signals to the common instruments and devices used in liquid batch
delivery systems. These instruments / devices include: liquid flow meters (turbine and positive
displacement type), multi-stage solenoid controlled flow control valves, additive injectors,
security devices for verifying electrical ground connections and compartment overfills, electric
motor driven pumps, and motor operated block valves. The DanLoad 6000 can be easily setup
(configured) to deliver single component liquids or to blend multiple liquid components in precise
ratios, with or without additive injection. The various possible delivery and blending functions
of the DanLoad 6000 are controlled by operator selectable recipes (predefined delivery control
procedures). Additive injection is controlled by manual selection or automatic selection from a
terminal automation system. These features allow one DanLoad 6000 and the associated liquid
delivery equipment to deliver many different combinations of liquid products, based on
requirements of the client or receiver of the delivered product.
One common application for a DanLoad 6000 is as an on-site controller for delivering refined
hydrocarbon liquid products from loading terminal storage tanks to mobile tanks, such as tanker
trucks, rail tank cars, and tank barges. Some other applications include liquid component
blending and / or additive injection in refinery or chemical plant processes. In addition, liquid
components can be blended with or without additive injection into flowing pipelines or into storage
tanks. A typical load rack installation with a DanLoad 6000 and associated equipment is shown
in Figure 1 - 1.
1 - 4 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 5
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
1.1 Functional Characteristics
The functional characteristics and capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 are presented in this section.
These functional characteristics and capabilities are closely related to the hardware configuration
of the instrument. Section 1.2 - Hardware Configuration, contains general information on the
hardware configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The DanLoad 6000 is delivered from the factory
with several basic electronic modules and other optional modules to accommodate process input
/ output signals. The required process input / output signal boards are determined by the loading
system configuration and should be specified when the DanLoad 6000 is purchased. The mix of
process input / output signal boards and communications modules is field reconfigurable. The
hardware configuration determines the input / output process signal handling capacity and the data
logging / data communications capability of the instrument. The flow measurement and logical
functions listed below are available in all hardware configurations of the DanLoad 6000.
However, each unique installation requires a specific complement of process input / output signal
boards, based on the actual devices that are monitored and controlled in the system.
The DanLoad 6000 can monitor and control operation of up to four flow meters, up to four flow
control valves, delivery of up to four products, and up to six additive injectors simultaneously.
Two high resolution pulse per unit volume outputs are provided for use by external equipment,
such as meter prover counters. Product deliveries and component blending deliveries are selected
by up to thirty configurable recipes (batch delivery / blending control procedures) and automatic
or manual selection of additive injection. The actual implementation of the various possible
process operations are covered in detail in other sections of this manual.
1 - 6 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Batch Delivery
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control quantity-based preset batch delivery
of one product or a blend of two to four liquid components. During blending operations, one
to four flow meter streams are controlled independently from the other flow meter streams.
Any combination of pulse output type flow meters of different sizes and flow handling
capacities can be monitored and controlled by one DanLoad 6000. Each flow meter stream can
have unique characteristics for the liquid component. For accounting and tracking purposes
a batch delivery or group of consecutive batch deliveries can be combined to form one
transaction.
In addition, the DanLoad 6000 can control batch loading of up to four independent loading
arms, if only one loading arm is in use at any one time.
# Blending
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically measure and control gross or standard quantity based
blending of several liquid components. Component blending can be performed by one of the
following selectable methods.
# Sequential, automatic
# Sequential, manual
# In-line, proportional
# In-line, non-proportional
# Off-rack
Sequential blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components, or transfers one component
at a time to the receiving tank by using block valves, either automatically or manually controlled.
Components are delivered in a time sequence through one flow meter / flow control valve stream.
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 7
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
In-line blending is the mixing of two, three, or four components simultaneously measured by
individual flow meters / flow control valves, into one composite delivery stream. The blend ratio
is precisely maintained during in-line proportional blending. The blend ratio is roughly maintained
during in-line non-proportional blending. However, the blend ratio of a completed batch load is
precise after the batch has been completely loaded.
Off-rack blending is performed by using a separate meter skid (off-rack) with flow meters, flow
control valves, and temperature probes for each component stream. The blending operation is
identical to in-line proportional blended with the composite blended product delivered from the
blending skid to one loading arm.
# Additive Injection
The DanLoad 6000 can automatically control injection of one to six additive streams or no
additive, into either a single product stream or a blend delivery stream. Additive injection
can be enabled automatically or manually. Additive injection can be monitored and the
delivery suspended if an additive injector fails. The volume of additive injected can be
totalized to provide accurate accounting.
# Meter Proving
The DanLoad 6000 can be used to perform manual flow meter proofs. Tank provers, master
meters, or mechanical displacement meter proves can be used for flow meter proving.
1 - 8 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
1.2 Hardware Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 contains electronic modules in the form of plug-in printed circuit boards. The
basic hardware configuration of the instrument is required for normal operation. In some cases,
the instrument in the basic hardware configuration has the capacity to monitor and control the
batch delivery installation. In other cases, additional process input / output signal expansion
printed circuit boards and / or data communications modules may be required. Flow calculations
and logical control capabilities of the DanLoad 6000 in the basic hardware configuration and the
fully expanded configuration are identical. Hardware expansion of the instrument only increases
the process signal handling capacity and / or provides data signal handling capability. Information
on hardware configuration is contained in Section 2 - Installation. The basic configuration of
a DanLoad 6000 is described below.
# Integral text / graphics display and operator keypad mounted in a rugged weatherproof case,
designed for outside installation in NEC Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous atmosphere
environments.
# One DC Voltage power supply with factory selectable power input of 115 Vac or 230 Vac, 47
to 63 Hertz.
# One main processor (CPU) board with two micro-controllers, shared memory, non-volatile
memory, and other related logic and process signal circuitry. Two swing arm status inputs.
And optionally (requires addition of one or two modules to the main processor board):
# One RS-485 port and one RS-232 port OR two RS-485 ports.
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 9
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# One flow meter pulse input board, able to process two flow meter pulse inputs (two flow
meters or IP-252 pulse integrity from one flow meter) and provide two discrete DC Voltage
control outputs.
# One discrete AC input / output board, able to process two status inputs and eight control
outputs (90 to 230 Vac).
1 - 10 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
1.3 General Terminology
The terminology used throughout this manual is defined in the table below. Section 6 - Program
Code Definitions contains additional information which helps clarify these terms. Some of the
definitions are based on information contained in American Petroleum Institute (API) standards
and industry accepted use. Other national standards use similar terminology.
Term Definition
additive A liquid that is injected into a primary liquid component in relatively small
quantities, usually less than four percent of the delivered volume total.
Additives are injected into the primary liquid component by an injector
mechanism which places a known, fixed volume of the additive into the
primary liquid component stream for each injector pulse received from the
DanLoad 6000.
arm (also: swing arm, loading arm) A movable pipe / hose assembly used at a
tanker truck loading island. The arm can be designed for either top loading
or bottom loading to the tanker compartments. A swing arm can be
positioned to load at either side of the loading island or the parked state.
batch A preset quantity-based product delivery or blended component delivery of

a single recipe.
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 11
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Term Definition
blending The process of mixing two or more liquid components to form a composite
delivered stream. The DanLoad 6000 can control blending based on a
predetermined recipe by the sequential automatic or manual), the in-line
(proportional or non-proportional), or the off-rack method. The quantity of
each component in a blend is typically greater than two to four percent of the
blended product. Injection of very small quantities of liquids, less than two
to four percent of the blended product, is usually controlled by the additive
injection process.
component Any liquid metered and controlled by the DanLoad 6000. Liquid
hydrocarbons refined from crude oil are usually referred to as products.
Components are base products or tank products stored at a distribution
terminal. The component is measured before blending or additive injection.
gross standard quantity
the gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is a

quantity measurement.
Calculation: gross standard quantity = gross quantity times CTLM (correction
factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the meter) times CPLM
(correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the meter)
gross quantity the indicated quantity times the meter factor derived from a meter proving of
the flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a quantity measurement.
Calculation: gross quantity = indicated quantity times meter factor
1 - 12 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Term Definition
indicated qty The change in the flow meter reading that occurs during a product flow
measurement operation. This is a quantity measurement. (Not displayed by
the DanLoad 6000)
Calculation: indicated quantity = end reading minus start reading
IP-252 Institute of Petroleum standard 252. A British standard for pulse fidelity and
security for pulse output type flow meters. Program codes 233 and 234
define the operation of this function. (Note: Equivalent standard is API
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards / Chapter 5 - Metering / Section
5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission
Systems.)
K-factor (system factor)

The pulses per unit quantity generated by a pulse output type flow meter. The
K-factor is also called the system factor. The nominal value is determined by
flow meter design and factory water flow calibration. The actual K-factors
for the flow meters are indicated on the flow meter nameplates.
loading island (also loading rack) An installation of one or more loading arms or risers used
to deliver liquid components to a tanker vehicle located on one or both sides
of the island, depending on the design of the island.
loading riser The related instruments and devices, located in a meter stream, that provide
the liquid component loading capability to a mobile tanker vehicle. (Note:
The flow meter piping can also be installed horizontally, if desired.)
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 13
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Term Definition
load spot (also bay, lane) One side of a loading island, a position where a tanker
vehicle parks for a loading operation. One load spot can have one or more
loading arms.
meter factor A number obtained by dividing the actual volume of liquid passed through a
flow meter during a meter proving operation by the volume registered by the
flow meter. The meter factor is used in flow calculations to correct the
indicated volume (end flow meter registration minus start flow meter
registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter throughput at
operating conditions)
Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditions

Meter factor = ------------------------------------------------------------
Flow meter indicated volume corrected to standard conditions
meter proving A procedure used to determine the meter factor for a flow meter. The K-
factor (exact number of pulses per a volume unit that are generated by a flow
meter) is determined at the factory. The K-factor is used to derive a
mathematical factor, known as meter factor, that is used to adjust results of
the internal flow calculations performed by the DanLoad 6000. (Note: The
flow meter is not re-calibrated; determination of the meter factor allows the
operator to manually re-calibrate the DanLoad 6000 so that the non-
adjustable calibration characteristic [pulses per volume unit (K-factor)] of
the flow meter is incorporated into the flow calculations.)
permissive A discrete signal from a device that is input to a discrete input in the DanLoad
6000. The signal is used by the DanLoad 6000 to allow a product delivery
to be initiated or allow a product delivery to continue. Permissive contacts
are CLOSED in the normal or safe state and OPEN in the abnormal or unsafe
state.
1 - 14 __________________________________________________ Introduction
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Term Definition
preset A generic term that describes the functional instrument group of the DanLoad
6000. The term originated from mechanical and electrical preset counters.
The DanLoad 6000 provides much more versatility and capability compared
to a simple mechanical or electrical preset counter.
program code One of approximately 800 parameters that define the operation of the
DanLoad 6000. All program codes are defined in Section 6.
quantity (example: gross standard quantity)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for operational
temperature and pressure, indicated in one of the following corrected units:
cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
recipe A pre-entered delivery / blending / control description that allows the

DanLoad 6000 to automatically control the product quantity or total quantity
based on percentages of multiple components during a batch delivery
operation. Up to thirty recipes can be defined in the DanLoad 6000.
transaction Grouping of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting

purposes. A transaction always uses one recipe, one additive selection, and
one loading side. An example of a transaction is the delivery of multiple
batches to different compartments in a single tanker vehicle.
volume (example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, indicated in one of the
following actual units: cubic meters, liters, barrels, gallons.
Introduction _________________________________________________ 1 - 15
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
1 - 16 __________________________________________________ Introduction
Section 2
Installation
Specifications
Installation Planning
Mechanical Installation
Electrical Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Note
Appendix A contains several tables with data on the physical and functional configuration of
the DanLoad 6000. These tables can be photocopied and unique configuration data can be
manually entered to provide a record of specific DanLoad 6000 installations.
This section contains DanLoad 6000 specifications and information on installation of the DanLoad
6000. Installation tasks should be performed in the following order.
# Installation planning
# Initial setup (described in Section 3 - Setup)
# Mechanical (physical) installation
# Electrical installation
The initial setup, described in Section 3 - Setup, must be performed before the DanLoad 6000 is
placed in-service. The initial setup can be performed with only a 115 or 230 Vac power source
connected to the instrument.
Mechanical and electrical installation recommendations for the DanLoad 6000 adhere to general
industry standards for this type equipment and are covered in Section 2.3 - Mechanical Installation
and Section 2.4 - Electrical Installation. The remaining part of Section 2 contains information on
installation planning for the DanLoad 6000.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2-1

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications
# Dimensions (approximate):
Standard The standard enclosure for the DanLoad 6000.
Remote / Secondary
The short enclosure contains the front panel display and keypad only. This enclosure is
usually used as a remote operator station in a two side loading island.
Item Standard Remote / Secondary

Height 13-inches (330 mm) 13-inches (330 mm)
Width 14-inches (355 mm) 14-inches (355 mm)
Depth 14-inches (355 mm) 8-inches (200 mm)
Weight 75-pounds (34 kg) 45-pounds (20,5 kg)
# Power requirements:
115 Vac (+ 10% / - 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase
230 Vac (+ /_ 15%), 47 to 63 Hertz, 1-phase
25 VA nominal
# Cable entry (USA version):

Center 2-inch female NPT, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse,
RTD, analog, status / control) cables
Left 1-inch female NPT, normally used for AC power input and AC status /
control signals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):
1-inch female NPT, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog
signals when separate signal routing is required
2 - 2 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Cable entry (metric version):

Center M50 x 1.5 mm, normally used for all DC signal (meter pulse,
RTD, analog, status / control) cables
Left M25 x 1.5 mm, normally used for AC power input and AC status / control
signals
Right (separate routing for low level signals and status / control signals):
M25 x 1.5 mm, used for meter pulse and / or RTD and / or analog signals
when separate signal routing is required
# Environment:
Temperature[operating with case heater installed]:
-40 to + 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-40 to + 60 degrees Celsius)
Temperature[storage (non-operating)]:
-4 to + 158 degrees Fahrenheit (-20 to + 70 degrees Celsius)
(Note: Storage temperature lower limit is due to fluid in the liquid crystal
display (LCD) unit.)
Relative humidity: 5 to 95 percent (non-condensing)
# Radiated emissions:
FCC (CFR 47) class A digital device
CCA LMB-EG-08 section 3.6.3.4
RF interference of 10 V/M over the frequency range of 20 MHZ to 500 MHZ
# Mechanical shock:
Per S.A.M.A. PMC 31.1-1980, Section 5.3
Installation __________________________________________________ 2-3

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# Enclosure:
NEMA 4X weatherproof, corrosion resistant
NEMA 7 for Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D areas
EEx d IIB T6, IP65
# Fasteners:
Front cover hex drive bolts and case mounting bolts: M10 - 1.5 (metric)
Two front cover bolts are longer than the other front cover bolts. These two long
bolts have holes near the end of the threaded end to allow placement of a Weight
and Measures seal wires. The seal wires prevent undetected access to the
DanLoad 6000 electronic / field wiring compartment.
Depth of tapped mounting bolt holes: 0.50 inches (13 mm)
Front cover hex bolt wrench: 8-mm (or 5/16-inch) Allen wrench
Torque specification (all bolts): 18 to 21 foot-pounds-force
(24 to 29 Newton-meters)
2 - 4 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Standard Enclosure Dimensions

Figure 2 - 1
Installation __________________________________________________ 2-5

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Standard Enclosure Field Mounting

Figure 2 - 2
2 - 6 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Shallow Enclosure Dimensions

Figure 2 - 3
Installation __________________________________________________ 2-7

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting

Figure 2 - 4
2 - 8 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
2.2 Installation Planning
Installation planning is very important due to the physical and functional reconfigurable
capabilities of the instrument. Several worksheets are provided in Appendix A to aid in
installation planning and system design. These worksheets are used in conjunction with the Setup
Procedure described in Section 3. Installation planning consists of the following three major
tasks.
# Assure that the DanLoad 6000 contains the required number and type of process input /
output signal boards for monitoring and controlling the other devices in the product
delivery system.
# Determine the functions to be performed by the DanLoad 6000. These functions are
selectively enabled during the setup procedure (logical configuration) of the instrument.
# Design the mechanical / electrical installation considering the safety and ease of use by the
operator. Also consider the safety and ease of access to instruments and devices for
maintenance technicians.
2.2.1 Card Cage Description
The DanLoad 6000 is constructed in a modular electronic and functional form. An electronic card
cage is located inside the cast enclosure. The layout of the card cage is shown in Figure 2-5. The
card cage contains a passive backplane with sockets for installation of a main processor board,
a DC power supply board, and one to seven process input / output signal boards. The function
of each board is described in Section 2.2.2.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2-9

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Card cage Layout

Figure 2 - 5
NOTE: Placement of I/O boards in card cage determines I/O assignments

during start up. Please see section 3.5.1 for details.
2 - 10 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
2.2.2 Input/Output Board Description and Jumper Settings
Note
Several of the electronic circuit boards contain jumpers that must be verified for correct
configuration before installation of the instrument. Jumper configuration should be verified
before the setup procedure is executed. Verify the following jumper configurations before
applying any power or connecting any process input / output signals to the instrument.
# Power Supply (DC Voltage)
Installed in the leftward vertical slot (J0) with component side facing right (toward the
I/O card slots).
The DC power supply generates the following voltages for the following uses;
Voltage Use
+ 5 Vdc digital logic
+ 5 Vdc unregulated LCD display unit
+ 15 Vdc / - 15 Vdc analog inputs
+ 12 to + 15 Vdc meter pulse transmitter power supply (100 mA dc version)
+ 24 Vdc DC status / analog transmitters
DC Power Supply Voltage Use

Figure 2 - 6
Two field-wiring connectors are located on the front edge of the power supply board.
TB1 accepts AC power input (either 115 or 230 Vac) and provides a fused output for an
optional internal space heater. TB2 accepts AC Voltage input and provides fused AC
Voltage output to the permissive circuits.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 11
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12692)
Jumper Function
JO1-1 to JO1-2 115 Vac power input
JO2-1 to JO2-2
JO1-2 to JO2-2 230 Vac power input
AC Power Input Jumpers

Figure 2 - 7
The AC power jumpers are soldered wire jumpers located on the DC power supply board.
AC power input should be specified at order time so that the jumpers are installed
correctly at the factory.
2 - 12 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# CPU Board
Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.
The main processor board has two CPU' s (central processing units). One CPU processes
the control panel and communications functions and the other CPU performs flow
measurement and process input / output signal handling. Dual port RAM (random access
memory) is used by both CPU' s to transfer data. Data is maintained in a non-volatile
state for ten years by an on-board battery. The CPU board also contains one 3-terminal
connector which is dedicated to one or two dry contact closure inputs used for sensing the
position of a swing-arm switch.
CPU Board Jumper Settings
Jumper Function
E16 to E17 4Mbit EPROM installed
E7 to E8
E2 to E3 Enable display failure /internal
temp alarm LED (yellow LED)
CPU Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 8
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 13
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
CPU Board and Analog Inputs Board Combinations - Jumper Settings
The DanLoad 6000 can be configured without an analog inputs board or with a 2-channel
analog inputs or an 8-channel analog inputs board. Jumpers are provided for configuration
of analog ground and digital ground. These jumpers should be set as follows.
Jumper Function
E12 to E13 on the CPU Board No Analog Inputs
Board installed
Remove E12 to E13 on CPU Analog Inputs Board is
board and install JP1 on Analog installed
Inputs Board
CPU & Analog Inputs Board Combination Jumpers

Figure 2 - 9
2 - 14 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# DUART (Dual Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) Communications Board
Optional DUART module can be installed, with the component side down, on top of the
main processor board.
One dual serial communications port module (DUART module) with 1 RS-485 and 1 RS-
232 OR 2 RS-485 ports is optional. The communications module is not required for stand-
alone operation of the DanLoad 6000. However, the DUART is required if the data
logging feature is used or if communication to an Automation System is required.
Switch Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12693)

The address of the DanLoad 6000 serial port is set by an eight position DIP switch located
on the optional DUART board. Each address must be unique for data access by a terminal
automation system.
Switch SW1 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Decimal weight 6 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128

Address
0 < reserved> on on on on on on on on
1 off on on on on on on on
2 on off on on on on on on
3 off off on on on on on on
4 on on off on on on on on
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
255 off off off off off off off off
DUART Board Address Switch

Figure 2 - 10
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 15
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board (MPB)
Recommended card cage locations are slots J5 and / or J6, component side faces left
(toward the power supply). The recommended location for a single meter pulse board is
slot J5.
The two-channel meter pulse board provides 8 to 15 Vdc or 24 Vdc power for two meter
pulse preamplifiers and accepts meter pulse inputs from two meter preamplifiers or dual
inputs from one meter. The 2-Ch Meter Pulse Board can be used with 1 single pulse
meter, 1 dual pulse meter or 2 single pulse meters. The meter preamps or pulsers can be
powered with any one of three options. Options 1 and 2 are implemented by installing a
plug-on piggyback power supply module. These modules are adjustable 8-15 VDC power
supplies with either 15 ma (Daniel P/N 3-6000-002) or 100 mA (Daniel P/N 3-6000-022)
outputs. Option 3 uses 24 VDC supplied from the power-supply board. The DC power
source for each meter preamplifier is jumper selectable. Two optically isolated raw meter
pulse outputs (prover outputs) are provided. These outputs are for meter proving and are
duplicates of the raw meter pulse stream. Two DC Voltage control outputs are provided.
These control outputs are assignable to various functions. One common use for these
outputs is to drive external pulse per unit quantity totalizers.
# Power Down Pulse Counting

Should power failure shut the system down, power to the pulsers and preamps will
be sustained long enough to accumulate pulses until the flow control valve closes.
This is available with the 15 mA P/S option only (P/N 3-6000-002).
# Dual Pulse Security for a Single Flow Meter

Dual pulse security is available per the IP252 Level-B standard. This is
accomplished by monitoring two meter pulse inputs that are electrically 90 degrees
out of phase. Reference program codes 233 and 234 in Section 6.13 of this
manual.
2 - 16 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12694)

P/N 3-6000-022, 100 mA P/S - P/N 3-6000-002, 15 mA P/S
Jumper Connection Function
JP1 1 to 2 meter 1 preamp power = 24 Vdc
JP5 in
JP1 2 to 3 meter 1 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS1)
JP5 in
JP1 1-to-2 meter 1 input optically isolated and floating,
JP3 1-to-2 requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP3 3-to-4
JP5 out
JP3 1 to 2 meter 1 input optically isolated
JP3 3-to-4
JP3 2-to-3 meter 1 input direct
JP8 out meter 1 standard input filtering
( 5 kHz. low pass filter)
in meter 1 additional high frequency filtering
( 50 Hz. low pass filter)
JP2 1-to-2 meter 2 preamp power = 24 Vdc

JP4 in
JP2 2-to-3 meter 2 preamp power = 8 to 15 Vdc (PS2)
JP4 in
JP2 1-to-2 meter 2 input optically isolated and floating,
JP7 1-to-2 requires external 5 to 24 Vdc supply
JP7 3-to-4
JP4 out
JP7 1-to-2 meter 2 input optically isolated
JP7 3-to-4
JP7 2-to-3 meter 2 input direct
JP6 out meter 2 normal input filtering
(5 kHz. low pass filter)
in meter 2 additional high frequency filtering
(50 Hz. low pass filter)
2-Channel Meter Pulse Input Board Jumpers - Figure 2 - 11
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 17
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# AC Discrete Input / Output Board (AC I/O)
Recommended locations are slots J1 and / or J2, component side faces left (toward the
power supply). The recommended location for a single AC I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the AC I/O board (Ver. 1 & Ver. 2). Terminal
connections are the same on each version of the board. However, the on-board jumper
configuration is different for each version of the board. Note drawing CE-12695 in
Appendix D and information in Figures 2-12 and 2-13.]
The AC I/O board accepts two discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and provides eight
discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. Note Figures 2-12 and 2-13 for jumper settings to
set the discrete input voltage level selection options (24 Vdc, 24 Vac, 90-240 Vac or Vdc).
Internal series resistors in each input circuit should be jumpered (bypassed) if 24 Vac or
24 Vdc signals are used. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each output
circuit is rated to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay or
solenoid coil.
2 - 18 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Status inputs are processed as indicated:
Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

Inputs are externally powered by 120/240 volts AC/DC or 24 volts AC/DC by
installing a jumper. This voltage should be applied through a contact closure only,
as a solid-state relay may not drop below the input voltage threshold when
deenergized.
The status input is ON when the contact is closed or the voltage is present on the
input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open or the voltage is removed.
Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

All functions are the same as the Version 1 AC I/O Board except that each voltage
range has a jumper selection (24 VAC, 24 VDC, 120 VAC and 240 VAC), and
the inputs will function with either contact closures or solid-state relays.
Note: Version 2 board will not work with 120/240 VDC.
Note
Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of
AC triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is
required, the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper
isolation.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 19
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Jumper Settings - Version 1 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

(Assembly Drawing CE-12693 - P/N 3-6000-005)

W1 out Input 2 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in Input 2 24 Vac / Vdc
W2 out Input 1 90-to-240 Vac / Vdc
in Input 1 24 Vac / Vdc
Version 1 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 12
Jumper Settings - Version 2 AC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12695)

(Assembly Drawing CE-12722 - P/N 3-6000-045)

JP1 pins 1 to 2 Input 2 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP2 pins 1 to 2 Input 1 is 24 Vac or 24 Vdc
JP1 pins 2 to 3 Input 2 is 120 Vac
JP2 pins 2 to 3 Input 1 is 120 Vac
JP1 out Input 2 is 240 Vac

JP2 out Input 1 is 240 Vac
Version 2 AC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 13
2 - 20 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Enhanced I/O Board and Additive Injector I/O Board
power supply). The recommended location for a single Enhanced I/O board is slot J1.
[Note: There are two different versions of the Enhanced I/O board. The Ver. 1 style
board is shown in drawing CE-12697 in Appendix D as the “Additive Injector (I/O)
Board”. The “Additive Injector Board” will be recognized as an Enhanced I/O Board
when the DanLoad 6000 displays the identity and location of the boards in the card cage.
The Ver. 2 style board is shown in drawing CE-19027 in Appendix D as the “Enhanced
(I/O) Board”. Terminal connections are the same on each version of the board.
However, the on-board jumper configuration is different for each version of the board.]
The Enhanced (or Additive Injector) I/O board accepts six discrete (ON/OFF) status
inputs (24 Vac or 24 Vdc maximum voltage) and provides six discrete (ON/OFF) control
outputs. Note Figures 2-14 and 2-15 for jumper settings to select discrete input voltage
levels for the two board styles. Control output circuits are 24 to 230 Vac only. Each
output circuit is rated to switch an inductive load of 2 Amps ac maximum, such as a relay
or solenoid coil. Inputs are available as high-speed (< 32 ms), low speed (> 32 ms) or
a mixture of both. Be sure to specify the correct part number.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 21
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# Version 1 (Additive Injector) I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697)
Internally powered status input (Note Reverse Logic):

The status input is ON when the contact is open.
The status input is OFF when the contact is closed.
Externally powered status input:

The status input is ON when the contact is closed and the voltage is present
on the input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is
removed.
Note
Ganging Triac Outputs: Due to the leakage current inherent to the triac, ganging of
AC triac outputs to one common point is not recommended. If output ganging is
required, the use of interposing relays is recommended in order to provide proper
isolation.
2 - 22 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027)
Internally powered status input:

The status input is ON when the contact is closed.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open.
Externally powered status input or solid-state relays:

There are three voltage ranges which are jumper selectable (24 VAC,
24VDC, 120 VAC or 240 VAC). When using DC voltage, the positive
voltage must be on the common input to two-channel inputs.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 23
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Jumper Settings - Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-12697) - P/N 3-6000-010 (low speed), -060 (high speed),
-059 (combination low and high speed)
INPUT JUMPER INTERNAL POWER EXTERNAL POWER

1&2 W3 SHORT PINS OPEN
1&2, 3&4, 5&6 NO JUMPERS
1&2, 3&4, 5&6 NO JUMPERS
1&2, 3&4, 5&6 NO JUMPERS
Version 1 Enhanced (Additive Injector) I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 14
Note
The maximum voltage for discrete inputs on the Additive Injector Board is 24 Vac
or 24 Vdc.
2 - 24 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Jumper Settings - Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board

(Field Wiring Diagram CE-19027) - P/N 3-6000-036 (low speed), -048 (high speed),
-049 (combination low and high speed)
Jumper Schedule
Select Internal Power (JP10 pins 2 to 3)
External Power
Input 24 Vdc
20 to 30 102 to 140 204 to 260
Channel Internal Power
Vac or Vdc Vac Vac
1 and 2 JP9 1 to 2, 3 to 4, 5 to 6 JP9 all out JP9 all out JP9 all out
JP8 1 to 2 JP8 1 to 2 JP8 2 to 3 JP8 all out
Version 2 Enhanced I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 15
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 25
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# DC Discrete Input / Output board (DC I/O) (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696)
power supply). The recommended location for a single DC I/O board is slot J3.
The DC I/O board accepts six 24 Vdc or 24 Vac discrete (ON/OFF) status inputs and
provides four discrete (ON/OFF) control outputs. The nominal input level is 24 Vdc or
24 Vac, either dry contact closures or externally powered, depending on internal jumper
configuration. See Figure 2-18. Control output circuits are 24 Vdc only. Each output
circuit is rated to switch a non-inductive load of 250 mA dc maximum. Inputs are
available as high speed (< 32 ms), low speed (> 32 ms) or a combination of both. Be sure
to specify the correct part number.
Internally powered status input:
Externally powered status input:
The status input is ON when the contact is closed and voltage is present on the
input.
The status input is OFF when the contact is open and the voltage is removed.
2 - 26 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Jumper Settings - DC I/O Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12696) - P/N 3-6000-006
(low speed), -058 (high speed), -057 (combination of low and high speed)

W1 2-to-3 in Input 6 floating, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc external input
W1 1-to-2 in Input 6 internal 24 Vdc power furnished
W1 3-to-4
W2 3-to-4
W3 3-to-4
W4 3-to-4
W5 3-to-4
W6 3-to-4
DC I/O Board Jumpers

Figure 2 - 16
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 27
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# 2-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram BE-12707) - P/N 3-6000-061
(standard, -40 to 110 oC), -062 (high range, 50 to 200 oC), -063 (low range, -50 to -200
o
C)
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 2-channel analog input board accepts one 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)
input and one 4 to 20 mA dc current loop input. The RTD input must be a platinum RTD,
100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha
is 0.003850 S/S/ oC (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 oC. A common current
source and Vref is provided for the RTD. The 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an
internal 225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load is 975 Ohms.
Analog transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a
standard range (-40 to 110 oC), high range (50 to 200 oC), and a low range (-50 to -200
o
C). Be sure to specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
2 - 28 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# 8-Channel Analog Input Board (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12698) - P/N 3-6000-064
(standard, -40 to 110 oC), -065 (high range, 50 to 200 oC), -066 (low range, -50 to -200
o
C)
Recommended location is slot J7, component side faces left (toward the power supply).
The 8-channel analog input board accepts four 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)
inputs and four 4 to 20 mA dc current loop inputs. RTD inputs must be platinum RTD' s,
100 Ohm base resistance at 32 degrees Fahrenheit (0 degrees Celsius). The RTD alpha
is 0.003850 S/S/ oC (DIN 43670) and will be 115.54 S at 40 oC. A common current
source and Vref is provided for the RTD' s. Each 4 to 20 mA dc current loop contains an
internal 225 Ohm precision resistor. The maximum transmitter loop load in 975 Ohms.
Analog transmitter power of 24 Vdc is provided. The RTD inputs are available in a
standard range (-40 to 110 oC), high range (50 to 200 oC), and a low range (-50 to -200
o
C). Be sure to specify the correct part number.
Refer to Figure 2-9 for jumper settings.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 29
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.3 Mechanical Installation
In planning the physical installation of the DanLoad 6000, consider ease of use of the instrument
with the operator in a safe and comfortable position. Consideration must also be given to
performance of maintenance tasks without disrupting ongoing product delivery operations in close
proximity. It may be helpful to draw rough diagrams of the normal actions of the operator during
the different possible batch delivery related tasks. Be especially mindful of the location of the
operator in relation to the location of one or two tanker vehicles and their related loading arm /
bottom loading hose connections. Some location / position restrictions may be present when a
DanLoad 6000 is used as a retrofit or upgrade in an existing installation. However, mechanical
installation planning should still be performed. It may be possible to correct an inconvenient
controller mounting location that exists in a current loading rack installation when a DanLoad
6000 is retrofit at the installation.
The major steps performed during installation are listed below.

# Plan the installation
# Fabricate device supports and lay electrical conduit
# Mount the DanLoad 6000 and other load rack devices
# Run and connect all wiring
# Verify and tag each wire
# Seal conduit within 18-inches (450 mm) of each device
# Secure cases and covers of all devices
# Apply electric power
# Setup (configure) DanLoad 6000 and any other devices as required
# Disable product block valves and additive block valves to prevent any product or
additive flow - then verify system monitor and control functions with dry piping
# Enable one product block valve at a time and one additive injection system at a time
- then verify the piping integrity and system operation in increments for each product and
each additive handling system
# Perform meter proofs to determine DanLoad 6000 meter calibration
2 - 30 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Consider the points listed below during installation planning for a DanLoad 6000.
# Maintenance access:
The operator panel is hinged at the bottom side and opens down for ease of maintenance
access. All conduit routing should be to the rear, sides, or down. No object should be
located under the DanLoad 6000 and in front of the conduit connections for a distance of
approximately 15-inches (380 mm) below the instrument.
# Mounting height:
Recommended mounting height is approximately 45 to 50 inches (1.14 to 1.27 meters)
above grade to the bottom of the DanLoad 6000 case. Mounting height determines the
ease of viewing the display panel and ease of use of the keypad.
# Mounting position:
North / south / east / west orientation of the operator control panel is somewhat
predetermined by the loading facility design. Consider the location of the user / operator
in relation to one or two tanker vehicles present and connected at the loading island.
# Mounting fixtures:
Mounting fixtures must be fabricated for the DanLoad 6000. Four M10-1.5 metric thread
bolts for mounting are provided with each DanLoad 6000. The instrument can be bottom
mounted or rear mounted. Bottom mounting is preferable due to the weight of the device.
The mounting attachment should be a 1/8-inch (3 mm) (minimum) thick mild steel
member with four 7/16-inch (11.5 mm) diameter holes that match the bolting pattern
being used. The steel member may be sheet, angle, channel, or other shape.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 31
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
The forward pair of mounting screw holes in bottom mount fixtures must be centered no
more than 3/4-inch (19 mm) from the edge. The case has a 2-degree taper to the rear.
The standard case may need a shim as much as 0.170-inch (4.3 mm) thick at the rear pair
of screws to level the instrument. Leveling the case will allow for best conduit alignment.
Fixtures for rear mounting may need additional bracing to ensure rigidity.
# Special installation considerations:

The DanLoad 6000 is designed for installation in an outdoor environment. The instrument
is weather proof and explosion proof per applicable standards. Some of the following
installation suggestions concerning environmental protection describe accepted engineering
practices and should not be considered to be limitations on the utility of the instrument.
# If the loading rack / island area is covered, the DanLoad 6000 should be located
so that the user / operator is protected or partially protected from direct rainfall.
# Tropical climates: It is advisable to place sunshades above the DanLoad 6000 and
other electronic instruments, such as process transmitters. Sunshades should be
located to prevent direct sunlight on the instruments during the hottest part of the
day (10:00 to 15:00). Sunshades can be constructed of metal, fiberglass, or
other suitable materials. They should be rear sloping to direct rain to the rear of
the instrument, away from the user / operator. Avoid sharp edges or corners on
sunshades to prevent injuries.
2 - 32 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Desert areas / blowing sand: In areas where blowing sand in common, it is

advisable to install a cover to protect the operator control panel during idle time.
Continuous blowing sand over an extended time period can affect the readability
of the key legends and the display panel due to the sandblasting effect. A cover
can be fabricated from raw materials or may consist of modified NEMA 4
weatherproof enclosure with a sealed rear cutout for placement over the operator
panel. Use care in the design of any hinged cover so that wind gusts do not move
the cover and cause injuries. Any cover design must allow for maintenance access
to the DanLoad 6000. The operator panel is hinged to open in the down direction
for maintenance access.
# High humidity: In areas of continuous high humidity, it is advisable to place a 3-

inch x 3-inch desiccant pack inside the DanLoad 6000 case. Desiccant packs
should be placed so that expansion due to moisture absorption does not interfere
with any of the equipment or wiring inside the case. Two sources of desiccant
packs are:
# Waterguard Desiccants # A+ Corporation

P.O. Box 1079 Prairieville, Louisiana 70769
16023 I-10 East, Suite 30
Channelview, Texas 77530
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 33
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.4 Electrical Installation
Warning
Shut off all sources of AC and DC power to the loading island site before installing the
DanLoad 6000.
2.4.1 General Considerations
Use two or three cable entries provided on the bottom of the enclosure for wiring access to the
DanLoad 6000.
# A threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the left side of
the unit (for AC power and control / status signals).
# A spare threaded 1-inch female NPT (or M25 x 1.5 mm metric) connection on the right
side of the unit (may be used for meter pulse wiring if it is desired to segregate meter
pulse wiring from all other signals).
# A threaded 2-inch female NPT (or M50 x 1.5 mm) connection for DC cabling and low
voltage level signals in the center.
Note
All cable entries must be sealed within 18-inches (450 mm) of the enclosure with suitable
sealing / potting compound.
2 - 34 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Guidelines for field wiring installation:
# External AC and DC wiring must be routed in separate conduits.
# Record cable / wire routing and interconnection information so that as-built documentation
for the system can be generated later.
# Provide remote circuit breakers and optional disconnect switches for all AC and DC power
input circuits.
# Follow power and signal field wiring grounding standards.
# Use only stranded copper wire, equal to or larger gauges as indicated on the basic wiring
diagrams located at the rear of this section, do not cut or weaken wire strands during
insulation removal.
# All wire ends should be clearly marked with slip-on wire tags or similar devices, the wire
tags should preferably be color coded to indicate the voltage level and marked with the
specific signal name.
# Power and signal wires should be cut with an additional length of approximately 2-inches
for service loops to allow terminal board / connector removal.
# All wiring should be positioned within the unit to avoid unnecessary crimping and
overcrowding, and to insure proper clearance for the instrument door and hinges.
# After completion, thoroughly check the wiring to insure that input AC power and all field
input / output signals are correctly connected at the DanLoad 6000 terminations and at the
terminations located on the corresponding field device.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 35
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.4.2 Selection / Installation of Electrical Wire and Cable
All wiring must conform to the National Electrical Code, local state or other jurisdiction, and
company standards and practices. Recommendations for 115 / 230 Vac power wiring:
# Use multi-strand copper conductor wire and cable for connecting the DanLoad 6000 to the
power source and the field devices.
# All wire and cable must be in new condition, and must adhere to the manufacturer' s
quality standards with the size, type of insulation, voltage rating.
# Recommended wire types and sizes for AC power input to the DanLoad 6000:
# Power feed should be 115 or 230 Vac, 47 to 63 Hertz, single phase, three wire.
A 15 Amp circuit breaker and optionally a power disconnect switch must be
located in a safe area.
# Wire size AWG 14 for power feed for distances up to 250 feet.
# Wire size AWG 12 for power feed for distances of 250 to 500 feet.
# Wire size AWG 10 for power feed for distances of 500 to 1000 feet.
# Contact Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service - Electronics Division, for

power feed distances greater than 1000 feet.
2 - 36 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Single-conductor wiring must be THWN type, which is moisture and heat-

resistant thermoplastic with nylon jacket, approved for dry-and-wet locations, and
has a maximum operating temperature of 75 degrees Celsius (167 degrees
Fahrenheit). The wire or cable jacket must contain the Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. mark for Gasoline and Oil Resistant, II.
# Shielded wires and cables for meter pulse signals must have shield-drain wires. The
shield-drain wires must not be more than two AWG sizes smaller than the conductors for
the cable. The shield-drain wire must be connected to ground at only one end of the run.
# RS-485 serial data signals should be connected via two twisted pairs with overall shield,
AWG 28 to AWG 22. Ideally, the capacitance should not be greater than 16 pF per foot
(Belden 9842 for example). The use of a signal common (ground) conductor connected
to each device is a recommended option. Capacitance greater than 16 pF per foot may be
used at reduced baud rates and/or with shorter data communication cable runs. See typical
communications connection drawings in Appendix D.
# RS-232 single ended serial data signals should be AWG 28 to AWG 18 for cable lengths
to 15 meters (50 feet). Consult factory for cable lengths greater than 15 meters.
# All cables must have either Teflon or PVC exterior jacket.
# Insulated wire and cable must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer' s
recommendation. Maximum wire tension, maximum insulation pressure and minimum
bending radius must not be exceeded.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 37
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# Use suitable lubrication during wire pulls in conduit to prevent wire stress.
# All cables and individual wires must have cable or wire markers at each termination.
Markers must contain the specific wire or cable codes designated for that particular
circuit. The wire and cable markers must be legible and permanent.
# Check all wiring connected to the DanLoad 6000 for continuity, proper size, and proper
classification. Verify the source or destination of each circuit before connection to the
DanLoad 6000 and related devices.
2 - 38 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
2.4.2.1 Input / Output Field Signal Wiring
Recommendations for process signal wiring:
# Metal conduit must be used for all process signal wiring.
# Use separate conduits for AC Voltage and DC Voltage circuits.
# All process signal wiring must be a single, continuous length between field devices, and
the DanLoad 6000, unless the length and / or conduit runs require that multiple pulls be
made. In these instances, the individual conductors must be interconnected with suitable
terminal blocks.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 39
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.4.2.2 Electrical Grounds
Recommendations for electrical grounds:
# A clamp type ground lug (color green) is located on the inside bottom front of the case.
Chassis ground conductors (color code green) inside the DanLoad 6000 enclosure should
be stranded, insulated, copper wire. These device chassis ground conductors should all
be connected to the clamp type ground lug.
# A clamp type ground lug is located on the outside of the case at the rear of the lower right
(facing the operator panel) casting rib. This ground point should be connected to a copper
ground rod as described below.
# A single-point ground (the outside case ground lug) must be connected to a copper-clad,
ten-foot long, 3/4-inch diameter steel rod, which is buried, full-length, vertically, into
the soil as close to the equipment as is practical. (Grounding rod furnished by others.)
# Resistance between the copper-clad steel ground rod and the earth ground must not exceed
25 Ohms. If necessary, additional ground rods may be driven into the ground, while a
spacing of not less than 6 feet is used to separate each of the ground rods. Additionally,
the ground rods must be interconnected with a continuous stranded wire, sized as indicated
below.
# When several DanLoad 6000 units are located in close proximity, each single point
equipment ground must be inter-connected to the single point grounds of the other
DanLoad units. These inter-enclosure equipment grounding connections must be made
in a daisy-chain fashion with only one point of the grounding daisy-chain being connected
to the actual ground rod.
2 - 40 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# The equipment-grounding conductors used between DanLoad 6000 units and the copper-
clad steel ground rod, or for inter-enclosure equipment ground connections must be sized
according to the following specifications:
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 8 for distances of less than 15 feet.
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 6 for distances of 15 to 30 feet.
# Stranded, insulated, copper wire size AWG 4 for distances of 30 to 100 feet.
# Consult Daniel Industries, Inc., Customer Service Department - Electronics

Division for distances greater than 100 feet.
# All inter-enclosure equipment-grounding conductors must be protected by metallic

conduit.
# Shield-drain wires must be connected to ground at only one end of the shielded
conductor run.
# External equipment, such as data printers or terminal automation systems, which

are connected to the DanLoad 6000, must be powered via isolation transformers
to minimize the ground loops caused by the internally shared safety and chassis
grounds.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 41
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.4.3 Selection / Installation of Wire Conduit
Recommendations for conduit installation:
# All conduit and the associated assembly and installation materials used for the installation
of the DanLoad 6000 must be in new condition and shall adhere to the manufacturer' s
quality standards.
# All conduit runs must have an explosion proof sealing (potting) fitting located within 18-
inches (455 mm) distance from the conduit entrance to the DanLoad 6000.
# The conduit installation must be vapor tight, with threaded hub fittings, sealed conduit
joints and gaskets on covers, or other approved vapor-tight conduit fittings.
# Conduit cutoffs must be square. Cutoffs must be made by a cold cutting tool, hacksaw,
or by some other approved means that does not deform the conduit ends or leave sharp
edges.
# All conduit fitting threads, including factory-cut threads, must be coated with a metal-
bearing conducting grease, such as Crouse-Hinds STL or equivalent, prior to assembly.
# Temporarily cap the ends of all conduit runs immediately after installation to prevent
accumulation of water, dirt, or other contaminants. Conduits must be swabbed out prior
to installing the conductors.
2 - 42 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Where applicable, explosion proof seals must be installed in the conduit.
# Install drain fittings at the lowest point in the conduit run, install seals at the point of
entry to the DanLoad 6000 to prevent vapor passage and accumulation of moisture.
# Use liquid tight conduit fittings, such as Myers Scru-tite, or similar, for conduit which
is exposed to moisture.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 43
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2.5 Installing the Secondary Keypad / Display
2.5.1 Hardware Setup / Configuration
Refer to Figure 2-16 Secondary Keypad / Display Connections.
The primary display/keypad is connected to P2 on the CPU board. The secondary display/keypad
is connected to P3 on the CPU board.
The jumper (W1) on the secondary keypad board is installed to recognize the key codes from the
secondary keypad. The jumper (W1) on the primary keypad board should not be installed.
The weights and measures key (top left of the keyboard) will only function on the primary keypad.
2.5.2 Software Setup / Configuration
The DanLoad 6000 auto-configures any connected display/keypad modules at power-up/reset of

the CPU board. The yellow (top) and red (bottom) LED's (located to the right of the display)
should "blink" on/off (once) just before text appears on the display. The displays/keypad modules
should not be powered on/off independently of the CPU board; they should be powered-up prior
to or at the same time as the CPU board.
The primary and secondary keypad/display modules have independently controlled automatic
backlighting and contrast adjustment. The primary LCD type (program code 355) and secondary
LCD type (program code 358) should be configured appropriately for each.
The primary and secondary displays display the same information simultaneously. However, only
one keypad (primary or secondary) is active at a time. The active keypad is controlled by the
swing-arm switches (SW2 and SW1) on the CPU board and the configured side detect method
(program code 312).
2 - 44 ___________________________________________________ Installation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
2.5.3 Wiring Details
The cable that connects the 2 interface cards requires 16 conductors, minimum wire size 24 AWG.
The maximum length of the cable should be 2000 feet (610 meters).
2.5.4 Power Requirements
The standard enclosure furnishes a line Power Supply, which can be 120 or 240 VAC, 47 to 63
HZ. The display/keypad modules power requirement is 7 VDC minimum at 0.5 amperes.
Installation __________________________________________________ 2 - 45
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
2 - 46 ___________________________________________________ Installation
Section 3
Setup
Man-Machine Interface
Initial Setup Procedure
Signal Handling
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This section contains information on the initial setup and configuration of the DanLoad 6000
Preset. Any combination of up to four flow meters, up to four components, and up to six
additives can be defined and controlled. The user performs the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000
via the operator control panel by following an automatic sequence of displayed-prompts and key-
press responses. The initial setup routine is a general procedure that combines basic configuration
of the instrument with a tutorial function that familiarizes the user with the methods of changing
values of program codes. The initial setup procedure does not cover all the different types of
parameters. For instance, the basic setup does not cover product blending or additive injection
operations. Section 3.6 contains details on the setup and parameters associated with product
blending. Section 3.7 contains details on the setup and parameters associated with additive
injection.
Section 6 and Appendix A and B contain additional information related to the initial setup
procedure and system configuration. Read Section 6, Appendix A, and Appendix B before
starting the initial setup procedure.
The DanLoad 6000 only requires AC power to execute the setup procedure. Therefore, it is
possible to preconfigure the instrument in a shop or office before on-site installation. The
DanLoad 6000 should have the correct type and number of process signal input / output boards
installed before initial setup procedure is begun. The initial setup procedure is performed in any
of the following instances.
# Before or during installation of a new DanLoad 6000 that has not been setup previously.
# If a new main processor board, that has not been setup, is installed (Note: Spare main
processor boards can be setup for your application in advance. The setup parameters are
retained in non-volatile battery backed RAM (random access memory). Note: A
configured battery backed RAM module can be moved from one main processor board to
another main processor board without loss of configuration data.)
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 1
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# If the integrated RAM / battery module on the main processor board is replaced.
After the initial setup procedure has been completed, the DanLoad 6000 can be easily
reconfigured to add or change operational features such as product blending, additive injection,
new delivery control recipes, data logging, and communication with a terminal automation
system.
3 - 2 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.1 Overview
The major functions of the Script DanLoad 6000 are described below.
# Provides a user interface to the operator in script languages such as Chinese and Thai.
# Accepts various types and combinations of process input signals, such as flow from pulse
output type flow meters, temperatures (RTD), pressures and / or density (4 to 20 mAdc
analog), and discrete contact closures indicating various status and permissive conditions.
# Performs mathematical and logical calculations based on configuration parameters (setup

parameters), user / operator input from the keypad, and the current values and states of
the process inputs.
# Generates discrete relay / solenoid driver control output signals based on the results of the
mathematical and logical calculations performed.
# (Optionally) Transmits selected data logs to a logging printer and / or performs bi-
directional communication, functioning as a slave processor for a terminal automation
system, distributed processing system, or other host computer.
The DanLoad 6000 can be setup to perform many different tasks based on the requirements of
various load rack applications. Setup is accomplished by physical configuration (installing circuit
boards) and then executing the setup routine. The setup routine or logical configuration is
accomplished by user interaction with the operator control panel which consists of a multi-line /
graphical LCD display panel and a numeric / function keypad.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 3
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Information on installation planning, design, and physical configuration of the DanLoad 6000
is covered in Section 2 - Installation. Therefore, it is assumed at this time that the instrument
contains the process input / output signal boards which provide the physical signal handling
capacity for the intended load rack application. The physical configuration, locations and types
of process input / output boards, is automatically sensed by the DanLoad 6000 and is displayed
for verification at the start of the setup routine.
Program Codes (Parameters)
Program codes identify all configuable parameters of the DanLoad 6000. Each Program Code
consists of the following four parts. A three-digit identification number (the program code), a
name, a selection or value (note: some values are preset selections, other values are free form
entry), and one to five program code attributes. The selection or value of a program code affects
the general or specific operation of the DanLoad 6000. Each name / three-digit identification
number combination identifies the specific selection or value. Identical names are repeated when
the associated function is required at several places in a series of similar functions. Therefore,
the name is the general identifier of the program code and the three-digit identification number is
the specific identifier of the program code.
Example: 085 Low flow restart qty 50
Item Description
085 The 3-digit program code identification of the parameter is
in the range of 001 to 831, not all numbers in the sequence
are used, the program code number is a unique identifier of
an associated value or selection.
3 - 4 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Item Description
Low flow restart qty The name of the parameter, the name can be unique or can
be repeated for similar parameters in a series of parameters
or can be unique. In this example: PC [085, 091, 097,
103] Low flow restart qty correspond to components 1, 2,
3, and 4.
50 The value of the parameter. In this example, the value can
be any number from 0 to 99999.
<attribute> (not shown) Program codes may have one or more of the following five
attributes set active: Read only, Weights and measures,
Data logging, Value changed, Transaction storage. See
Section 6.1 for additional information on program code
attributes.
Program codes are divided into twenty-one functional groups. Each functional group is divided
into one or more display pages which can be shown on the display panel. Parameters are
accessible for monitoring or changing when the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode.
A diagram of the Program Mode menu tree is shown in Figure 3 - 1. All program codes are
accessible via the Setup selection of the Program Mode Menu. Functional groups of program
codes are listed in Figure 3 - 2. The value part of a program code can be changed by keypad
entries.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 5
______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Program Mode Menu

Alarm reset 6 Alarm Reset display
Setup 6 Setup Menu )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))),

*
Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display *
*
Set date and time 6 Set date and time display *
*
Diagnostics 6 Diagnostics Menu )))))))))))))))))), *
* *
Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display * *
9 9
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu
Firmware versions Security parameters
RAM tests Unit parameters
Keypad Valve parameters
Display Meter parameters
Inputs/Outputs Component parameters
DUART Delivery parameters
ARCNET Digital Valve parameters
Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs
Show memory Additive delivery params
Show trans memory Factors
Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms
I/O parameters
Additive I/O parameters
Component I/O parameters
Temp/press/dens
Recipes
Data communications
Dynamic data display
Data logging
Blending
Additive pumps/block valves
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Menu Tree - Figure 3 - 1
Setup ____________________________________________________________________________ Section 3-6

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameters Program Code Used For

Security parameters 001 to 024 operation security
Unit parameters 025 to 046 global parameters
Valve parameters 048 and 049 flow control valves
Meter parameters 050 to 062 flow meters
Component parameters 065 to 077 liquid components
Delivery parameters 078 to 111 batch deliveries
Digital valve parameters 112 to 127 digital flow control valve
Pulse per unit outputs 128 to 134 quantity pulses to external equipment
Additive delivery parameters 135 to 168 additive injection
Factors 169 to 218 flow meter factors
Alarms 219 to 268 actions and limits
I/O parameters 280 to 372 input / output signal assignments
Additive I/O parameters 380 to 397 additive injection signal assignments
Component I/O parameters 400 to 422 component block valve signal assignments
Temperature / pressure / density 426 to 479 quantity correction
Recipes 480 to 660 product / batch deliveries
Data communications 661 to 672 logging / terminal automation system
Dynamic data display 679 to 695 operator data view (programmable)
Data logging 696 to 704 reports to printer
Blending 710 to 799 product blending control
Additive pumps/block valves 800 to 831 additive pump and block valve control
Parameters List Overview - Figure 3 - 2
Setup ____________________________________________________________________________ Section 3-7

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Operating Modes
The form of user interaction with the DanLoad 6000 is defined by the functional state of the
instrument. Communications and interaction with a terminal automation system is defined by the
state of the Operating Mode. The Operating Mode is set by PC 025, located in the Unit
parameters group.
FUNCTIONAL MODE (SET BY THE USER VIA THE CONTROL PANEL):

# Loading Mode Normal operation with the instrument controlling batch product
deliveries to a tanker vehicle.
# Program Mode Permits initial setup and modification of the operation of the
instrument. Access to this mode is passcode restricted and can only
be entered while the DanLoad 6000 is not controlling a batch
delivery operation and a delivery transaction is not open.
OPERATING MODE (SET BY STATE OF PC 025 OPERATING MODE):

# Auto Remote control operation, status to and control from a terminal
automation system.
# Manual Local control operation, status only to a terminal automation

system, no remote control functions performed.
# Stand-alone Independent local operation, status / control functions to / from a

terminal automation system are not implemented.
3 - 8 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.2 Man-Machine Interface
User / operator interaction with a DanLoad 6000 is described below.
# The user issues a command via a single key press / release action or by simultaneously
pressing / releasing two keys. While operating in the Loading Mode, all entries are
single-key press actions. Some entries are simultaneous two-key actions while operating
in the Program Mode.
# The DanLoad 6000 responds by either executing the command immediately or by

prompting the user, via the display panel, for additional data entry.
# If the command is executed immediately, the displayed information will change in some
manner to indicate response to the command.
# If the command cannot be completed without additional information from the user, one
of various types of data input prompt displays will be shown. Now the user has the option
to enter the data in response to the displayed prompt or to return the DanLoad 6000 to the
existing state without modifying any internal or external state or configuration.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3-9

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.2.1 Data Display Operation
While operating in the Program Mode, data from the DanLoad 6000 is presented to the user on
an 8-line by 40-column LCD display panel. Miscellaneous messages and data are displayed in the
format shown in the General Display Format, Figure 3 - 3.
Header line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Data line
Message line
General Display Format

Figure 3 - 3
One common format of the general display is the Parameter View display, Figure 3 - 4. The
Parameter View display is used throughout the initial setup procedure and in the future for
monitoring and / or changing parameter values / selections.
Header line
ccc name vvvvvvvv
ccc name vvvvvvvv
ccc name vvvvvvvv
ccc name vvvvvvvv
ccc name vvvvvvvv
ccc name vvvvvvvv
Message line
Parameter View
Figure 3 - 4
3 - 10 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The field types displayed in the Parameter View, Figure 3 - 4, are described below.
# Header line An alpha-numeric field that is used to describe the contents

of the display. Usually a parameters group or sub-group
title, such as:
Meter 1 parameters
# ccc A three digit field containing the Program Code that

identifies a specific parameter. Program codes are unique
for each parameter. The range of the program code series
is 001 to 831 (several program code numbers in the series
are not assigned). All program codes / parameters are
described in Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
# name An alpha-numeric field that contains the name that describes

the function of the program code. Names up to 34-
characters long are used. Identical names are used for
functions that are repeated several times in a series of similar
parameters for different physical or logical items. A typical
name is:
Meter ID
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 11
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# vvvvvvvv A variable length numeric, alpha-numeric, or selection

field that contains the value or selection of the corresponding
parameter (Program Code). The contents of this field can
be changed by the user (unless the value is Read-only). The
value / selection is changed via key entries. The key entry
sequences are dependent on the type of field and are
described in the following section. The three types of fields
that can be displayed in this area are:
# numeric The field can contain a variable number of
digits (0 thru 9), a decimal separator (defined by
PC 040 Decimal separator), and a minus sign (-).
# alpha-numeric The field consists of a variable
number of alpha-numeric characters (also called a
string).
# selection The field consists of one of an internally
defined option selected from a list of possible options
for this field entry.
# Message line An alpha-numeric field used to display a message to the

user. Prompt messages are defined in the applicable sections
of the following setup description.
3 - 12 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.2.2 Keypad Operation
The keypad, located on the operator panel, provides the method for the local operator to enter
commands and data into the DanLoad 6000. The keypad layout is shown below.
Keypad (English Version)

Figure 3-5
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 13
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
KEY PRIMARY FUNCTION ALTERNATE FUNCTION

0 thru 9 numeric digits
ALT used in combination with
other keys to modify the
function of the other keys,
see descriptions in the
ALTERNATE FUNCTION
column
0 0 digit view I/O configuration summary
1 1 digit toggle minus sign ' -'
3 3 digit increase display contrast
(darken)
6 6 digit decrease display contrast
(lighten)
START start batch delivery
STOP/PRINT stop batch delivery/print
batch/transaction report
ENTER accept value or execute option PROGRAM
CLEAR remove selected value EXIT
SELECT scroll options list BACKSPACE
8 scroll up scroll left
7
9 scroll down scroll right
6
W&M the Weights and Measures security switch
(round, spring loaded, sealable switch located in the upper left
area of the keypad; this switch is sealable in the depressed
(CLOSED) position)
Key Functions
Figure 3 - 6
3 - 14 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Several keys perform dual functions, dependent on the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000.
The Loading Mode is active if the Loading Display, the Additive Selection Display, or the Recipe
Selection Display is currently showing on the display panel. The Program Mode is active if the
Program Mode Menu or any related sub-menu is currently showing on the display panel. Specific
functions of the keys in the Loading Mode and the Program Mode are described below.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 15
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Key Function
Loading Mode only:
START Initiate a batch delivery after entry of the preset quantity.
STOP/PRINT Suspend a batch delivery operation in progress or end transaction

in progress. Print an optional transaction report that may include
batch data.
Loading Mode and Program Mode:
W&M (spring loaded captive switch located in the upper left area of the keypad)
The Weights and Measures security switch provides global restriction for
modification of all program codes that have the Weights and Measures
attribute set ON. This restriction prevents users / operators from
modifying the values or selections of these program codes. See Section 6.1
Program Code Attributes for a complete description of program code
attributes and the Weights and Measures security switch.
# CLOSED Depressed and captive with the slot in the vertical

position. Can be wire sealed in this position. Critical weights and
measures variables cannot be modified.
# OPEN Extended with the slot in the horizontal position. Critical

weights and measures variable can be modified (the switch must be
OPEN prior to accessing the Program Mode to enable modification
capability).
3 - 16 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Key Function
ALT This key is used in conjunction with several other keys to change the
primary function performed by the other key. The primary function of a
dual function key is indicated on the top of the key face (white letters /
black background). The alternate function of a dual function key is
indicated on the bottom of the key face (black letters / white background).
Numeric keys 0, 1, 3, and 6 also have alternate functions as indicated
below. The ALT key should be pressed and maintained in the depressed
position while simultaneously pressing and releasing an alternate function
key to execute an alternate function.
0 thru 9
(Loading Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry.
(Program Mode) Numeric keys used for numeric data entry and selection of alpha
character group for data entry.
ALT+ 0 Active in Program Mode only, activates display of the physical

configuration of the DanLoad 6000. The first page displayed contains the
location of the process signal input / output boards detected during the
power-up sequence. Successive pages, accessed by the 98 keys, show the
currently configured state of physical input / output to logical input / output
assignments in the following groups: RTD inputs, 4-20 mA inputs,
Discrete inputs, Discrete outputs
ALT+ 1 Active in Program Mode only. Toggles the minus sign on or off for a
numeric entry. Can be used before, during, or after entry of a numeric
value.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 17
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Key Function
ALT+ 3 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Increases the display contrast
(darkens the display).
ALT+ 6 Active in Loading Mode and Program Mode. Decreases the display
contrast (lightens the display).
ENTER
(Loading Mode) Accept or bypass data item entry or preset quantity entry and
continue.
(Program Mode) Accept the value or selection highlighted by the box cursor.
PROGRAM (ALT+ ENTER)

(Loading Mode) Change to Program Mode.
(Program Mode) Ignore any edit made to the current field selected by the box cursor
and restore the original value / selection.
CLEAR
(Loading Mode) Clear the current data item entry or preset quantity entry.
Remove the Dynamic Data Display window from the loading.
display
(Program Mode) Clear the current numeric or alphanumeric entry.
3 - 18 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Key Function
EXIT (ALT+ CLEAR)

(Loading Mode) Bypass the data item entry sequence. If data item entry is defined
(Program Mode) Step to the next higher menu level. Change to Loading Mode when
the Program Mode Menu is displayed.
SELECT
(Loading Mode) Display dynamic data window on the loading display.
(Program Mode) Scroll through selection options. Step to next character position
when editing an alpha-numeric string entry.
BACKSPACE (ALT+ SELECT)

(Loading Mode) No function.
(Program Mode) Step to previous character position when editing an alpha-numeric

string entry. Scroll backward through selection options.
98 (Loading Mode) Change Dynamic Data Display page.
(Program Mode) Step to next or previous program code (parameter) display line.
67 (ALT+ 9 or ALT+ 8)
(Loading Mode) No function.
(Program Mode) Step to next or previous character entry when editing an alpha-
numeric string entry.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 19
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.2.3 Script Language Support
A language dependent message may be displayed on the DanLoad 6000 on the message line of
the display, via an automation system. Communication command code 1C, “Display message”
can be used to display a user configured script, roman or a mixture of script and roman message
on the DanLoad 6000 graphics LCD display.
Each script language has a set of script characters that are available for display on the DanLoad
6000. A script character has an 8-bit character code from 32 hexadecimal to FF hexadecimal.
A script message may be formed by an 8-bit character code group preceded by a “SCRIPTON”
character code (FF). This special character code is used as an escape sequence to turn on the
script character mapping.
The string of 8-bit character codes are downloaded as part of the “Display message” command.
The script message, preceded by a SCRIPTON (FF) character, are downloaded in the msgtxt
field of the “Display message” command (Refer to the DanLoad 6000 communication
specifications for a description of the “Display message” command). The script message is
always preceded by a "SCRIPTON" character (FF). The preceding "SCRIPTON" characters
activate the bitmaps (script character) for the language that has been selected on the DanLoad
6000. The script language may be selected via program code “Language”. The series of
characters following the "SCRIPON" character invoke individual bitmaps (script characters)
corresponding to the character code.
The bitmaps defined for the language is de-activated by a "SCRIPTOFF" character (8-bit
character code FE). Characters that are preceded by a "SCRIPTOFF" character are displayed
based on the Thai ASCII character set mapping. The ASCII character is the default mapping on
the Script DanLoad 6000 and is invoked if the “SCRIPTON” character is not received.
3 - 20 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
With the use of the "SCRIPTON" and "SCRIPTOFF" escape sequences a message containing a
mixture of script characters based on the script language chosen, and alphanumerical characters
(e.g English messages) may be displayed on the Download 6000 LCD graphics display via the
automation system.
The Chinese language script characters that are displayed and the character code that invokes them
are shown as follows.
Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 1)

Figure 3 - 7
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 21
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Chinese Script Characters Bitmap (Part 2)

Figure 3 - 8
Thai Script Character Bitmap

Figure 3 - 9
3 - 22 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
HI 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
LO
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É 3 7 d0 e0 f0
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ 3 7 d1 e1 f1
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ 3 7 d2 e2 f2
3 # 3 C S c s â ô 3 7 d3 e3 f3
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö 0 4 8 d4 8 f4
5 % 5 E U e u à ò 0 4 8 d5 9 f5
6 & 6 F V f v å û 0 4 8 d6 e6 f6
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù 0 4 8 d7 e7 f7
8 ( 8 H X h x ê 1 5 9 d8 e8 f8
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö 1 5 9 d9 e9 f9
A * : J Z j z è Ü 1 5 9 da ea fa
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ 1 5 9 db eb fb
C , < L \ l | î £ 2 6 dc ec fc
D - = M ] m } ì ¥ 2 6 dd ed fd
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä . 2 6 de ee fe
(SCRIPT OFF)
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ 2 6 df ef ff
(SCRIPT ON)
Alphanumeric Codes for Thai Bitmap Construction

Figure 3 - 10
Characters codes A0, A1, A2 and A3 are the "waveform drawing" characters; "low", "low to
high", "high to low" and "high", i.e.
+) ), ))))
)))) ))- .))
A0 A1 A2 A3
Characters codes CC to CF are "white spaces". Character codes A4 to CB make up the top left,
top right, bottom left and bottom right portions of large numbers ' 0' through ' 9' displayed on the
loading screen.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 23
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.3 Initial Setup Procedure Overview
The initial setup procedure guides the user through a sequence of displayed prompts and key press
responses. The user accomplishes the following three tasks while executing the initial setup
procedure.
# Accept or modify several default parameter values / selections that inform the DanLoad
6000 about the physical characteristics of the batch loading system. Section 3.5 contains
information on process input / output channel assignment.
# Accept or modify several default parameter values / selections that inform the DanLoad
6000 about the type of flow calculations and logical operations to be performed.
# Guide the user through interactive verification and / or parameter value changes. This
tutorial function familiarizes the user with the display format and the man-machine
interface, using the keypad.
Read all of this section and review Section 6 - Program Code Definitions prior to performing the
initial setup procedure. In most cases, desired responses to the prompts encountered during the
initial setup procedure can be determined during execution of the setup procedure. However, if
the correct response cannot be determined during the setup procedure, it is permissible to accept
any or all of the default values / selections for the parameters. Any default value or selection that
is accepted or modified can be changed easily at any time in the future.
The initial setup procedure automatically enters default values / selections for some parameters that
are not covered by the procedure. In some cases, these default values / selections require
modification for the intended application. Review the additional information contained in Sections
3.6, 3.7, and 3.8 after the initial setup procedure is completed. This additional information
should be reviewed to assure that the DanLoad 6000 is properly configured for your installation.
3 - 24 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.3.1 Data Entry
Several key press responses are required during execution of the initial setup procedure. The
responses are a press / release of ENTER or 9 to continue, numeric data entries with the 0 thru
9 numeric keys, option selection scrolling with the SELECT key, or alpha-numeric data entry.
The value or option displayed is accepted and entered by pressing the ENTER key or either the
9 or 8 arrow key. Methods for data entry are described below.
# Numeric data entry

Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. Enter the
desired number with the numeric keys 0 through 9. Numeric entries are toggled between
negative and positive values by entering the numeric value in the field and then pressing
and holding the Alt key while pressing the 1 digit key. If an entry error is made, press
the CLEAR key to clear the field and start again, or toggle the sign to the opposite state.
# Option data entry

Selection options are contained in short lists permanently stored in the DanLoad 6000.
Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow keys. If necessary,
use the SELECT key or the BACKSPACE KEY (ALT+ SELECT) to scroll the list
forward or backward until the desired option is displayed.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 25
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# Alpha-numeric data entry

If alpha-numeric data entry is permitted in a field, the message line will display the
following prompt: 0= Space, 1= A, 2= a, 3= 0, 4= #, 5= "
This prompt indicates to the user that an alpha-numeric string of characters can be entered.
The numbers 1 through 5 point to a specific location in a continuous string of characters.
For example, the number 1 points to the letter A, a string of upper case letters continue
to Z, the next character is a, a string of lower case letters continue to z, the next
character is 0, a string of numbers continues to 9. In other words, each group of
characters is in one continuous string of all possible characters. The apparent groups of
characters do not wrap around to the start of that group.
3 - 26 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
1 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 5
A a 0 # number/pound " è 0 7 ef
B b 1 $ dollars ' ï 0 7 f0
C c 2 % percent : î 0 7 f1
D d 3 ? question mark ; ì 1 7 f2
E e 4 ! exclamation ( Ä 1 8 f3
point
F f 5 & ampersand ) Å 1 8 f4
G g 6 + plus < É 1 8 f5
H h 7 - minus > æ 2 8 f6
I i 8 * asterisk [ Æ 2 9 f7
J j 9 / slash ] ô 2 9 f8
K k = equal { ö 2 9 f9
L l . dot } ò 3 9 fa
M m , comma \ û 3 e0 fb
N n ù 3 e1 fc
O o ^ 3 e2 fd
P p ~ Ö 4 e3 fe
Q q 7F Ü 4 8 ff
R r Ç ¢ 4 9
S s ü £ 4 e6
T t é ¥ 5 e7
U u â . 5 e8
V v ä ƒ 5 e9
W w à 5 ea
))
X x | + 6 eb
)-
Y y ç ), 6 ec
.
Z z ê )) 6 ed
ë 0 6 ee
Alpha-Numeric Characters
Figure 3 - 11
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 27
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Figure 3 - 11 contains a list of all available alpha-numeric characters organized into five
groups. Alpha-numeric characters are entered in the following manner when the prompt
is displayed.
# The flashing square cursor is positioned in the leftward field position. The cursor
indicates the current character entry position within the alpha-numeric field.
# The cursor is moved one character position right each time the SELECT key is
pressed. The cursor is moved one character position left each time the
BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key is pressed.
# To enter an alpha-numeric character in the current character position, press the

number key 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 which indicates the group of characters which
contain the desired entry. Any number group selector can be pressed after the
initial selection, if an error is made. (Note: An easy method to access the Z
character is press 2 to display lower case a then press the 7 (ALT+8) key.)
# The first character of the selected group will now be displayed in the active
character position.
# To select another character from the specified group of characters, press the ALT
key and maintain the key depressed. With the ALT key depressed, press the 6
(ALT+9) to move to the next character in the selection string. Or, with the ALT
key depressed, press the 7 (ALT+ 8) to move to the previous character in the
selection string. The character selections will jog in sequence automatically if both
the ALT key and either one of the arrow keys are simultaneously maintained
depressed. When the desired character is displayed in the active character position,
release the keys.
3 - 28 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Use the SELECT or the BACKSPACE (ALT+SELECT) key to step the cursor
to the next or any desired position in the alpha-numeric field. Repeat the entry
sequence described above until the field display is as desired.
# Special alpha-numeric data entry
Parameters ccc Control meters in the Pulse per unit outputs group and ccc Additive control
meters in the Additive parameters group select one of the fixed options G, N, or X in the
following manner. Place the box cursor over the selected parameter with the 9 or 8 arrow
keys. Maintain the ALT key depressed and select the desired option with the 9 or 8 arrow
keys.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 29
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.4 Initial Setup Procedure
The Weights and Measures switch located in the upper left area of the keypad should be rotated
until the captive pin passes through the slot and releases the switch to the extended (OPEN)
position. The electrical jumper configuration, described in Section 2 - Installation, should be
verified. AC power should be connected and applied to the instrument.
The sequence of the initial setup procedure is presented below with examples of the displays
presented to the user, an explanation of the contents of the display, and the user response to each
display.
DanLoad 6000
CPU-1 firmware v1.20
CPU-2 firmware v1.20
Message EPROM v1.20
Power failure mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
The display example above shows the firmware (application software) version of the DanLoad
6000 and the date and time that AC power input was last removed from the instrument.
DanLoad 6000
Running CPU-1 RAM test
Passed
Running CPU-2 RAM test
Passed
3 - 30 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The display example above shows the results of automatic diagnostic tests that check the operation
of the RAM (random access memory). The normal message is Please wait while the test is in
progress and the normal result message is Passed. A Failed message indicates that a hardware
problem exists in the DanLoad 6000.
Slot 1 Empty
Slot 2 AC I/O
Slot 3 Empty
Slot 4 Empty
Slot 5 Meter Pulse
Slot 6 Empty
Slot 7 Empty
DUART = Off ARCNET = Off Any key
The display example above shows the location of all process input / output signal boards installed
and the serial communications capability of the DanLoad 6000. A message DUART = ###,
where ### is 000 to 255, indicates the communications address (set by DIP switches) for the
dual universal asynchronous receiver / transmitter module that handles RS 232 / RS 485 serial
communications is present, otherwise the message is DUART = Off.
The worksheets located in Appendix A should be photo-copied at this time and the copies used to
document the physical input / output signal assignments for the DanLoad 6000. The individual
channel assignments can be viewed and recorded at this time. While viewing the slot assignment
display above, press any key to continue. The following display will be shown.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 31
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Meter inputs
01 Chan 0 Meter Pulse in J5 0
02 Chan 1 Meter Pulse in J5 0
ALT+SELECT to reconfigure
The display example above shows one of several similar displays which indicate the automatic
input / output signal numbering performed by the DanLoad 6000. The 9 and 8 arrows keys are
used to page through this display group. Display types included in this group are:
# Meter inputs (shown above)

# RTD inputs
# 4-20 mA inputs
# Discrete inputs (can be more than one display page)
# Discrete outputs (can be more than one display page)
Section 2.4.1 contains additional information on automatic assignment of input / output channels.
The fields located in this display group are described below.
# Header line Defines the input / output signal type.
3 - 32 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# 01 Sequential number for this input. The sequence starts at 01 and

continues through the highest input or output channel of that type.
The DanLoad 6000 assigns these numbers automatically by sensing
the type of board in each slot (J1 to J7). Boards are scanned from
left to right. Therefore, similar type channels in leftward located
boards will have lower numbers than similar type channels in
rightward located boards. A minimum of one meter pulse board
must be present. If an analog board is not present, the RTD inputs
and 4-20 mA inputs groups will display the message No points of
this type.
# Chan # Sequential number of the physical input / output channel on the

corresponding board. The sequence starts at 0. The maximum
value for this field is 7, which corresponds to the eighth output on
an AC I/O board (channels 0 to 7). All other boards have fewer of
the corresponding channel type for the board, than the AC I/O
board.
# Meter Pulse This field indicates the board type in the indicated slot. Entries in
this field can be: Meter pulse, Analog, AC I/O, DC I/O, or
Additive I/O.
# J5 This field indicates the physical location of the board. Entries in

this field can be: J1 through J7.
# 0 The number of times used / referenced in the current configuration.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 33
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# ALT+SELECT to reconfigure
Configuration during the initial setup procedure is automatic and no
response to this prompt is required. If an input / output signal
board is added in slots J1 to J7 in the future, the DanLoad 6000
senses the presence of the new board and always displays the
current configuration in the Slot # <board type> display.
However, the input / output channels are not renumbered until the
manual command (ALT+SELECT) is issued.
(Note: If the input / output signal board complement of a DanLoad

6000 functioning in a loading system is changed and the
ALT+SELECT command is issued, all input / output points of
similar types to the board(s) installed must be checked. The
physical channel to internal logical signal may be changed when the
channels are renumbered to correspond to the new configuration.)
Note
The two swing arm switch inputs on the Main Processor Board and the two high resolution
meter pulse outputs on the Meter Pulse Board are dedicated functions and are not shown in the
Configuration Summary Display.
3 - 34 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.5 Process Input / Output Signal Handling
All input / output signal board slots (J1 to J7) are electrically identical. However, for electrical
isolation of AC and DC signals, only AC I/O or Enhanced I/O boards should be installed in slots
J1 or J2. It is strongly suggested that board placement follow the recommended layout indicated
in the descriptions of each board in Section 2. The recommended board layout provides electrical
isolation of AC Voltage control and status signals (AC I/O and / or enhanced I/O boards) by the
vertical metal partition between slots J2 and J3. In addition, if an analog input signal board is
installed, this board is electrically and physically isolated in the rightward slot J7. A DanLoad
6000 in basic configuration contains the following boards.
Capacity
I/O Board Input Output
main processor 2 DC (dedicated N/A

2 RS-485 function: swing arm)
or
1 RS-485 and 1 RS-232
and / or
1 LAN
one meter pulse 2 pulse 2 pulse (dedicated

function: high
resolution meter
pulse)
2 DC (control)
one AC I/O 2 DC/AC (status) 8 AC (control)
Basic Configuration
Figure 3 - 12
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 35
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Basic configuration considerations:
# Serial communications require that either a DUART module for RS-485 / RS-232. A
DUART module is required for data logging to a printer or data logging device.
# The two meter pulse inputs on each meter pulse board can be either single pulse inputs
from two separate flow meters or a dual pulse input from one flow meter (IP-252 pulse
security. Channel A is used for flow measurement, Channel B is used for verification of
Channel A integrity), a maximum of two meter pulse boards can be installed.
# The swing arm input is normally from either a single switch or dual switch swing arm.
This input is used for swing arm side detect and keypad side enable and to indicate the load
rack side to a terminal automation system.
3.5.1 Physical Input and Output Signal Assignment
The DanLoad 6000 automatically assigns physical input and output channel numbers during initial
setup or when manually commanded to do so. The channel assignment is performed as follows.
The instrument scans the input / output signal boards located in slots J1 (leftward) through J7
(rightward) in that order. Each board is identified and the physical channels on each board,
indicated in Appendix A - Worksheets 3 through 7b, are assigned a sequential channel number
corresponding to the same type channel. These physical I/O channel assignments can be viewed
by pressing the ALT+0 key while operating in the Program Mode. While viewing the channel
assignments, the prompt message ALT+SELECT to reconfigure is displayed on the message line.
Issuing this command causes the DanLoad 6000 to re-number the physical input / output channels
if the board complement has been altered in any manner since the last configuration. There are
five different types of input / output signals that can be handled by the DanLoad 6000. These
channel types are listed below.
3 - 36 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
I/O Channel Type Description

Meter inputs Assigned meter pulse input numbers 01 and 02 if one meter pulse board is
installed. Assigned meter pulse input numbers 01, 02, 03, 04 if two meter
pulse board are installed.
RTD inputs Assigned RTD input number 01 if a 2-channel analog board is installed.
Assigned 01, 02, 03, 04 if an 8-channel analog board is installed.
4-20 mA inputs Assigned 4-20 mA input number 01 if a 2-channel analog board is installed.
Assigned 01, 02, 03, 04 if an 8-channel analog board is installed.
Discrete inputs Assigned discrete input numbers from 01 to the maximum number of
discrete status inputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered
by the configuration scan.
Discrete outputs Assigned discrete output numbers from 01 to the maximum number of
discrete control outputs present, in the order that the inputs are encountered
by the configuration scan.
The physical channel assignments are indicated under each channel type header in the following
format.
cc Chan n <board type> in Jn s
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 37
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
where:
cc = Logical (software assigned) channel number (for this type of point)
assigned to this point. This number is assigned automatically. Vdc and
Vac status inputs are numbered sequentially in the same series. Each
channel number is dependent on the I/O board location and the physical
board channel. Vdc and Vac control outputs are numbered sequentially in
the same series, dependent on the I/O board location and the physical
board channel.
Chan n = Sequential channel number 0 to n that identifies the physical channel on the
I/O board. The maximum range for this number is 0 to 7. (Note:
Maximum of 8 output channels on an AC I/O board.)
<board type> = Board name: Meter Pulse, AC I/O, DC I/O, Add I/O, 2-Ch.
Analog, 8-Ch. Analog
Jn = Slot number, J1 through J7, where the board is located.
s = (reserved for future use)
The logical channel assignments are solely dependent on I/O board locations. This assignment
informs the DanLoad 6000 of the physical input / output signal configuration and assigns non-
duplicated logical channel numbers (leftward column) for identifying each point. The physical
channel assignments cannot be changed. The assignments are determined by the process I/O
board complement and type of boards.
3 - 38 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Discrete Signal Processing
As a general rule, discrete input and output signals are processed in the following manner. The
operating state of a field contact closure status input is CLOSED when the field sending or sensor
device is in a DEENERGIZED, OPEN, NORMAL, or SAFE state. The operating state of a field
control output is OPEN when the controlled device is in a DEENERGIZED, CLOSED, OFF, or
IDLE state. Discrete outputs that control flow control valves, block valves, or pumps are
maintained CLOSED to OPEN the valve or RUN the pump motor so that an open wire, open coil,
or power failure to the DanLoad 6000 will cause the affected valve(s) to move to their CLOSED
positions and pump motors to stop running. This method of handling status / permissive inputs
and control outputs assures that operation of the loading system is inherently fail-safe.
Safety circuits (permissive status inputs) are normally closed switch or relay contacts that indicate
a normal or safe condition from the corresponding device. Common permissive devices are
vehicle ground connection detectors, tank overspill detectors, and fire warning systems. The
DanLoad 6000 has the capability of detecting up to eight general purpose safety circuit inputs,
six recipe selection inputs, and four block valve status inputs. Several normally closed contacts
for different safety circuits can be field wired in series. This implementation reduces the number
of physical discrete inputs required, but also generalizes the common safety input. The DanLoad
6000, or terminal automation system, cannot determine the specific device that has generated the
safety circuit open alarm when several permissive signals are wired in series.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 39
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Logical Signal Processing
All process computing instruments handle input and output signals as logical variables while
processing these variables internally. This means that calculations that use the variables are
independent from the external source or destination of the signals. The DanLoad 6000 also
implements logical signal handling techniques at the process signal interface level by allowing any
process input or output signal to be connected to any physical input or output channel of the same
type, such as meter pulse, RTD, status input, or control output. Each physical input and output
channel is assigned to an internal logical channel (function) during the setup procedure. This
design provides greater application versatility for the user by allowing one common physical
configuration of the DanLoad 6000 to be adaptable to most applications and avoiding
configurations with unnecessary and unused input / output signal handling hardware. In addition
to installation versatility, the spare parts stocking requirements are greatly reduced so that only
a minimal number of different types of electronic signal input / output boards are required.
The actual links (assignments) between a physical input and output channels and internal
processing of these channels is performed manually during the initial setup of the DanLoad 6000.
These assignments can be changed later if required. The current physical channel to logical
channel assignments can be viewed at any time. All physical input / output channel to logical
channel assignments are defined in the following parameter groups. Appendix A contains
worksheets that identify each point.
# Meter parameters, PC's 050 to 062

# I/O parameters, PC's 280 to 372
# Additive I/O parameters, PC's 380 to 397
# Component I/O parameters, PC's 400 to 422 and 361 to 372
# Additive pumps / block valves, PC's 800 to 831
3 - 40 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The channel assignments defined by these parameters are viewable while operating in Program
Mode. The rightward column of the parameter display line contains a one or two digit number.
This number is the currently assigned physical channel number in the series of channel numbers
corresponding to the type of channel.
Flow meter pulse input channel and RTD input channel assignments are probably acceptable in
the default state. However, discrete status inputs and control outputs may have been assigned,
during the initial setup procedure to default physical inputs / outputs that do not electrically match
the field devices.
Example: PC 288 Pump control output for component (product) number 1 may have been
assigned to a control output on an AC I/O board and the pump control device in the field is
actuated by 24 Vdc. If this were the case and a DC I/O board was installed, the pump control
output should be manually re-assigned to a control output from the DC I/O board. The I/O point
re-assignment procedure is described in Appendix A.
Copies of the worksheets located in Appendix A with the physical configuration data manually
entered should be available at this point.
Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key to exit the input / output signal configuration display area
and continue with the initial setup.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 41
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
DanLoad 6000
Unit is not configured
Initial setup required
Enter passcode _________
The display example above shows messages that indicate the initial setup procedure has never been
executed on this DanLoad 6000. Enter the factory default passcode, 6000, with the numeric keys
and then press the ENTER key.
The Set Date and Time display is shown next. This display provides the method the set the current
date and time for the DanLoad 6000 internal calendar / clock. The date and time are maintained
by an on-board battery on the main processor board and does not require external power.
Set Date and Time
Current date is mm/dd/yy

Enter new date (mm/dd/yy):
Current time is hh:mm:ss
Enter new time (hh:mm:ss):
Set Date and Time Display

Figure 3 - 13
3 - 42 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The current date and time are displayed in the formats indicated in the Set Date and Time display.
The date format is always in the form (mm/dd/yy) during the initial setup. After the initial setup
is complete, the date format can be change via PC 038 Date format, if desired. The date and
time default during initial setup and before modification is: 01/01/93 00:00:ss [January 1,
1993, several seconds (ss) after midnight (00:00:00)]. The flashing underline cursor is
displayed right of the Enter new date (mm/dd/yy): prompt line for entry of a different date than
the current date. Use numeric keys 0 to 9 to enter all or part of a new date. If it is desired to
leave the value for any component of the current date unchanged, press the ENTER key. The
ENTER key must be pressed once after each component of the date is entered or to accept the
current value in that component. After the date has been entered or accepted, the flashing
underline cursor moves to the right of the Enter new time (hh:mm:ss) prompt. The time value
is entered or accepted in a similar manner as the date entry. The EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key
may be used at any time to step to the next entry line.
The Set Date and Time display can be accessed at any time after the initial setup procedure is
completed by selecting Set Date and Time from the Program Menu.
Meter totalizers
Meter Gross Std
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
Press any key to continue
The display example above shows the gross and standard values of the flow meter accumulators.
The values may be zeros as indicated or some other values.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 43
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Initial setup
Is this unit a blender No
The display example above shows the default selection No, which indicates that the application
is single component loading. The default selection sets the number of flow meters, number of
flow control valves, and number of components to 1.
If the application requires blending of two to four components, press the SELECT key to scroll
the pick list to the Yes option. Press the ENTER or the 9 arrow key to select the next parameter.
The Type of blender defaults to Seq.(auto). If another type of blending control is desired, press
the SELECT key to scroll the options list (options are described in Section 6 - 026 Unit type.
Press the 9 arrow key to select the next parameter.
If Type of blender is Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual), the next prompt displayed is:

065 Number of components which defaults to 2
If Type of blender is In-line or Off-rack, the next prompt displayed is:

050 Number of meters which defaults to 2
Accept or change the default value as required.
Initial setup
Is this unit a blender Yes
Type of blender Seq.(auto)
065 Number of components 2
3 - 44 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Note
For the remaining description of the initial setup procedure, it is assumed that:
Is this unit a blender selection remains the default option No
The following description covers one flow meter, one flow control valve, and one component.
The procedure for defining multiple devices and components is similar except for the
requirement to define additional parameters for the additional devices and components.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 45
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Meter 1 parameters
051 Meter ID M1
052 Meter pulse board input 1
053 Valve to be controlled 1
x
x
x
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="
The display example above shows parameters related to flow meter number 1. The No selection
for blending has set the number of meters to 1, parameter 050 indicated below is not displayed
in the initial setup procedure:
050 Number of meters 1
Parameter:
051 Meter ID M1
Is set to the default string M1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the bottom
line to allow the user to change this string to any five characters.
Parameter:
Is set to the default value 1. This entry indicates that the physical flow meter 1 that has the
descriptive tag name M1 is connected to meter pulse board input 1 (channel 1 (terminals 1, 2,
3). If there is only one meter pulse board in the DanLoad 6000, this number can only be 1 or 2.
However, if there are two meter pulse boards in the DanLoad 6000, valid input assignments
would be 1, 2, 3, or 4. It is important to note that this assignment informs the DanLoad 6000
that a physical flow meter with an arbitrary name identification, M1 in this case, is assigned to
the physical pulse input channel 1. Future references to this flow meter, for relation to other
physical equipment or process tasks, are as meter 1, regardless of the name identification or
pulse input channel.
3 - 46 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
If IP-252 dual pulse security checking is implemented, the pulse input processing is handled as
follows.
IP-252 Pulse Security

Flow Meter Pulse Card Meter Logical Logical Meter
Transmitter Input Input Assignment
A1 MP board 1 channel 1 1 1
(2 not used)
B1 MP board 1 channel 2
A2 MP board 2 channel 1 3 2
(4 not used)
B2 MP board 2 channel 2
If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a Seq.(auto) or Seq.(manual) multi-component blender,

components are defined at this time. If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as an In-line or Off-rack
blender, flow meters 2 through 4, as required, are defined at this time.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 47
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Component 1
066 Component ID Component #1
067 Meter 1
068 Available Yes
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3= 0, 4=#, 5="
The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1. The No selection
for blending has set the number of components to 1, PC 065 indicated below is not displayed in
the initial setup procedure:
Parameter:
066 Component ID Component #1
Is set to the default string Component #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on
the message line to allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters.
Parameter:
067 Meter 1
Is set to the default value 1. This number indicates that flow meter 1 is assigned to measure this
component. Only one flow meter, meter 1, is defined at this time so 1 is the only valid
assignment. However, this assignment can be from 1 to 4 depending on the number of flow
meters defined in the installation. ZERO disables the component, thus making it unavailable for
loading. (This parameter defines the relation between components (products) and flow meters.)
3 - 48 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameter:
068 Mass Adjustment 0.000000
This parameter sets the component’s “mass computation adjustment factor”, i.e. 1, where:
Mass = Net volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1.
Zero disables mass computation. A non-zero value causes the “standard Quantity”, i.e. the meter
component, batch and running totalizer standard quantities, to be computed as mass (using the
formula above) rather than net volume. Buoyancy is configured via program code 426. Refer to
Section 6 for further discussion and examples.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 49
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Delivery parameters
078 Maximum preset qty 3000
079 Minimum preset qty 50
080 Preset/delivery type Gross
081 Delivery display type Gross
082 Stop key action Low flow
083 Fall back qty 1000
The display example above shows global parameters related to the delivery method used to deliver
all defined components. The default delivery parameters should be verified or changed as required
to match the requirements of the installation.
Parameter:
078 Maximum preset qty 3000
Is set to the default value 3000. The entry sets the upper limit, in quantity units, for any batch
delivery, that can be entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This
number is in quantity units. The value is typically set to the quantity of the largest compartment
to be loaded in any authorized tanker vehicle. This number is the typical upper quantity limit for
any delivery operation. Operating procedures may require loading of a quantity in excess of this
number by loading more than one batch to one compartment.
Parameter:
079 Minimum preset qty 50
Is set to the default value 50. The entry defines the lower limit, in quantity units, for any batch
delivery, that can be entered by the user / operator during a loading operation setup. This number
is in quantity units. The value is normally set to the expected minimum quantity to deliver. This
quantity is referred to as the flushing quantity at some installations.
3 - 50 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameter:
080 Preset/delivery type Gross
Is set to the default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the gross quantity calculation is
used for delivery control. The flow control valve always controls ramp up to high flow rate based
on gross delivered quantity. The flow control valve controls ramp down to the low flow rate and
terminates delivery based on the quantity type selection in this field. Optionally this parameter can
be set to standard quantity.
Parameter:
081 Delivery display type Gross
Is set to the default selection Gross. This selection indicates that the Loaded, Remaining, and
Transaction values are displayed in gross quantity. Optionally this parameter can be set to
standard quantity.
Parameter:
082 Stop key action Low flow
Is set to the default selection Low flow. This selection indicates the action to take after the STOP
key is pressed during a batch delivery. The flow rate is reduced until the low flow rate is achieved
and then the load is terminated by commanding the flow control valve to close.
Parameter:
083 Fall back qty 1000
Is set to the default value 1000. This value is the quantity that flows at a fall back flow rate before
the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up to the next higher flow rate.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 51
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Comp 1 delivery parameters

084 Low flow start qty 50
085 Low flow restart qty 20
086 Low flow stop qty 50
087 Line pack delay (secs) 2
088 Pump stop delay (secs) 30
089 Block valve delay (secs) 0
The display example above shows parameters related to the delivery method used to deliver the
component number 1 only. These default delivery parameters should be verified or changed as
required depending on the design of the installation.
Parameter:
084 Low flow start qty 50
Is set to the default value 50. This value indicates the quantity units that must be loaded at the low
flow rate before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve.
Parameter:
085 Low flow restart qty 20
flow rate before issuing the high flow command to the flow control valve. If the quantity specified
by PC 084 Low flow start qty has been delivered, this quantity is used after restart of a batch
delivery that has been temporarily suspended for any reason.
Parameter:
086 Low flow stop qty 50
flow rate before issuing the close command to the flow control valve at the end of a batch delivery
operation.
3 - 52 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameter:
087 Line pack delay (secs) 2
Is set to the default value 2. This value indicates that the pump run relay output is energized two
seconds before the command is issued to open the flow control valve to low flow rate setting.
Parameter:
088 Pump stop delay (secs) 30
Is set to the default value 30. This value indicates that the command to close the flow control
valve is issued and 30 seconds later the pump run relay output is de-energized.
Parameter:
089 Block valve delay (secs) 0
Is set to the default value 0. This value indicates that the control output to open the component
block valve is issued and 0 seconds later (immediately) the command to open the flow control
valve to low flow rate is issued. The block valve control output is opened (block valve closed)
at the termination of the batch delivery.
If the DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional components are

defined at this time.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 53
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Delivery parameters (cont'd)

108 Ramp clicks 30
109 Maintenance clicks 30
110 Additive pump stop (secs) 10
111 Primary component 1
The display example above shows global parameters related to the method used to adjust flow
control valves, additive pump control, and blending.
Parameter:
108 Ramp clicks 30
Is set to the default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts
to increase the flow rate to the next higher flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and
maintaining the fall back flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
Parameter:
109 Maintenance clicks 30
Is set to the default value 30. This value is the number of times that the DanLoad 6000 attempts
to maintain the current normal flow rate without success, before ceasing attempts and falling back
to the next lower flow rate. Click refers to the jog output to the valve control solenoids.
Parameter:
110 Additive pump stop (sec) 10
Is set to the default value 10. This value is the number of seconds between the end of the load
operation and deenergizing the additive pump control circuits.
3 - 54 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameter:
Is set to the default value 1. This value sets the number of the component to use for calculation
of blend ratios and for line flushing.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 55
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Meter factors
169 Number of factors/component 2
170 Meter factor method Fixed
The display example above shows global parameters related to the method used to handle meter
factors for all components / flow meters.
Parameter:
169 Number of factors/component 2
Is set to the default value 2. This value indicates that two meter factors for each component at two
different flow rates (low flow start/stop and high flow) will be defined. Up to four flow rates
for each component can be defined.
Parameter:
170 Meter factor method Fixed
Is set to the default selection Fixed. This selection indicates that the exact meter factors are used
and no mathematical interpolation of the meter factor values between associated flow rate points
will be performed.
3 - 56 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Component 1 factors
171 Nominal K-factor 23.0
172 Master meter factor 1.0000
The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1 only. The DanLoad
6000 maintains the fixed relationship between each defined component and each flow meter so that
high flow measurement accuracy can be maintained when multiple components are delivered
through one flow meter.
Note
The values of PC [171, 182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor parameters have great affect on
control of the quantity of product delivered and course measurement accuracy. These parameter
values must be set properly before any loading operation is performed.
Parameter:
171 Nominal K-factor 23.0
Is set to the default value 23.0. This value indicates the K-factor (system factor) for the flow
meter. [NOTE: The initial K-factor should be the pulses per unit of product obtained from the
flow meter identification plate or from the manufacturer. This number should be mathematically
rounded to one decimal place (nn.n)].
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 57
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
172 Master meter factor 1.0000
Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the base meter factor value used for comparison
with all system meter factor entries. PC ccc Comp p meter factor f meter factors are compared
to the PC ccc Master meter factor for the component and are considered invalid if they deviate
more than +/- the percentage value of PC 215 Master MF %. In this example, assuming that PC
215 Master MF % is the default value of 2.00, acceptable meter factors must be within the range
of 0.9800 to 1.0200 (NOTE: The master meter factor is calculated by the 171 Nominal K-factor
divided by the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
3 - 58 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Component 1 factor 1
174 Flow rate 1 200
175 Meter factor 1 1.0000
The display example above shows parameters related to PC ccc Component number 1 and PC ccc
Meter factor 1 (low flow rate) only.
Parameter:
174 Flow rate 1 200
Is set to the default value 200. This value is the low flow rate (start/stop rate) in quantity units
per minute (such as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of PC
ccc Nominal K-factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units
for the flow meter.
Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this parameter are gallons per
minute.
Parameter:
Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the nominal meter factor that is used when
component 1 is flowing at the low flow rate defined by PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1. (NOTE:
The meter factor is calculated by the PC ccc 171 Nominal K-factor divided by the actual K-factor
and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 59
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Component 1 factor 2
176 Flow rate 2 600
The display example above shows parameters related to component number 1 and meter factor 2
(high (loading) flow rate) only.
Parameter:
176 Flow rate 2 500
Is set to the default value 500. This value is the high flow rate in quantity units per minute (such
as gallons per minute). The engineering units are dependent on the value of PC ccc Nominal K-
factor which determines the quantity unit accumulation units and flow rate units for the flow
meter. Example: If quantity units are gallons, engineering units for this parameter are gallons
per minute.
Parameter:
Is set to the default value 1.0000. This value is the nominal meter factor that is used when
component 1 is flowing at the high flow rate defined by PC 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2. (NOTE:
The initial meter factor should be 1.0000 until an actual meter factor can be determined from a
meter proof. The initial meter factor is calculated by PC ccc 171 Nominal K-factor divided by
the actual K-factor and mathematically rounded to four decimal places.)
A third and fourth flow rate for component 1 can be defined at this time if desired. If the
DanLoad 6000 is configured as a multi-component blender, additional flow rates / meter factors
are defined at this time.
3 - 60 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
MF validation
215 Master MF % 2.00
216 Adjacent MF % 0.25
The display example above shows global parameters that set the limits for validation of manually
entered meter factors.
Parameter:
215 Master MF % 2.00
Is set to the default value 2.00. This value is the setpoint for verification of individual component
meter factors with respect to the Master meter factor for the component. Program codes for
master meter factors and components are indicated in the table below.
Components 6 1 2 3 4
Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205
Comp p meter factor 1 175 186 197 208

Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 61
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
216 Adjacent MF % 0.25
Is set to the default value 0.25. This value is the setpoint for verification of individual component
meter factors with respect to adjacent meter factors for the component. Program codes for master
meter factors and adjacent meter factors are indicated in the table below.
Components
1 2 3 4
Master Meter Factors 6 172 183 194 205
Adjacent Meter Factors 9

9
8
9
8
9
8
3 - 62 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Alarm parameters
220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 300
The display example above shows a global parameter that sets the storage time for secondary
alarm conditions.
Parameter:
220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 300
Is set to the default value 300. This value indicates that active alarms designated as Secondary
alarms will be automatically cleared (reset) after 300 seconds has elapsed.
The time limit allows time for the operator to correct a condition that causes a secondary alarm
to occur during loading. The secondary alarm condition terminated the batch delivery. However,
if the cause of the secondary alarm is cleared within the time specified by PC 220 Secondary
alarm reset (secs), the product delivery can be restarted. If the cause of the alarm is not cleared
within the time specified by PC 220 Secondary alarm reset (secs), the batch delivery is ended
and a new batch must be defined before delivery can resume.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 63
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that
alarm. The four possible alarm actions are described below. The alarm actions for several
alarms are limited to less than four selections. The Alarm action for several alarms is pre-
determined and cannot be changed.
Alarm Action Description Reset
Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is Keypad in Program Mode.
shut and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot
resume until the alarm is cleared. Alarm reset discrete input, PC 344
Primary alarm reset (if defined).
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is steady ON
Terminal automation system.
Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output
is maintained closed (if defined).
Alarm data is stored in Alarm Storage Memory.
Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is Correct cause of alarm
shut and the delivery is suspended. Delivery cannot
resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary Automatically reset after time value
alarm reset time has elapsed. in PC 220 Secondary alarm reset
(secs) has elapsed.
RED (lower) LED on operator panel is pulsed ON
/ OFF
Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output

is pulsed (if defined).
Info An event message is displayed on the message line < not applicable>
of the display panel for ten seconds.
Off Disable monitoring of this alarm. < not applicable>
Alarm Action Summary
Figure 3 - 14
3 - 64 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Alarm parameters (cont'd)

221 Low flow alarm action Primary
222 Minimum flow rate 100
223 Low flow time (secs) 10
224 High flow alarm action Primary
225 Maximum flow rate 660
226 High flow time (secs) 10
The display example above shows parameters which define the global method of processing low
and high flow rate conditions for any defined flow meter.
Parameter:
221 Low flow alarm action Primary
Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the Low flow alarm becomes
active, the current delivery operation will be suspended.
Parameter:
222 Minimum flow rate 100
Is set to the default value 100. This value is the minimum flow rate (quantity units per time unit)
allowed for the time period indicated by PC 223 Low flow time (secs).
Parameter:
223 Low flow time (secs) 10
Is set to the default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be
continuously below the minimum flow rate specified by PC 222 Minimum flow rate before the
alarm is triggered.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 65
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
224 High flow alarm action Primary
Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the High flow alarm becomes
Parameter:
225 Maximum flow rate 660
Is set to the default value 660. This value is the maximum flow rate (quantity units per time unit)
allowed for the time period indicated by PC 226 High flow time (secs). This flow rate setting
should be set above and close to the normally expected high flow rate. This setting allows rapid
detection of a loss of control of the flow control valve condition.
Parameter:
226 High flow time (secs) 10
Is set to the default value 10. This value is the elapsed time allowed for the flow rate to be
continuously below the minimum flow rate specified by PC 225 Maximum flow rate before the
alarm is triggered.
3 - 66 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

227 Overrun limit qty 2.0
228 Underflow alarm action Off
229 Underflow limit qty 5.0
230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary
231 No flow t-o (secs) 5
232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10.0
The display example above shows parameters which define the method of processing several flow
related error conditions.
Parameter:
227 Overrun limit qty 2.0
Is set to the default value 2.0. This value is the quantity units allowed to be delivered which
exceed the preset quantity. The alarm can only occur after the DanLoad 6000 has attempted to
stop the delivery in the normal manner. The alarm priority selection is permanently set to
Primary. If the Overrun limit qty alarm becomes active, the delivery operation in progress will
be suspended. (NOTE: It may be necessary to temporarily set this value to a significantly larger
value while the first several batches are delivered at a new installation. This is required so that
the DanLoad 6000 can calculate the final trip or closing quantity delivered. The DanLoad 6000
does not calculate the final trip quantity if the delivery is terminated by an alarm action.)
WARNING
Use several small batch deliveries to load a vessel after initial setup. This procedure permits
verification of proper flow control valve operation and prevents overfilling the vessel.
Parameter:
228 Underflow alarm action Off
Is set to the default selection Off. This selection indicates the action taken if the delivered quantity
is less than the value of PC 229 Underflow limit qty. The Off selection disables the underflow
alarm.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 67
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
229 Underflow limit qty 5.0
Is set to the default value 5.0. This value is the number of quantity units allowed for the delivered
quantity to be less than the preset quantity at the end of a batch delivery operation.
Parameter:
230 No flow t-o alarm action Primary
Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that if the No flow alarm becomes
Parameter:
231 No flow t-o (secs) 5.0
Is set to the default value 5.0. This value is elapsed time allowed for not receiving any pulses
from the flow meter when the system is in a component flowing configuration.
Example: The pump is running, the block valve is OPEN, and the flow control valve is
OPEN and no pulses are detected.
Parameter:
232 Unauthorized flow qty 10.0
Is set to the default value 10.0. This value is the quantity units allowed accumulated due to flow
through a flow meter when a batch delivery is not active. The priority selection is permanently
set to Primary. The unauthorized flow condition exits when product is passing through the flow
meter and the flow control valve is commanded to the CLOSE position. If the Unauthorized flow
quantity alarm becomes active, an attempt will be made to shut-in the flow meter stream. Note
the meter stream should be shut-in if a delivery operation is not in progress. This alarm could
indicate a loss of control of the component flow control valve or block valve or both valves.
3 - 68 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

233 Error limit (pulses) 0
234 Reset count (pulses) 10000
235 Data logging alarm action Info
236 Comms fail alarm action Primary
237 Comms fail t-o (secs) 10
The display example above shows parameters related to the method of processing pulse security
error conditions. These parameters are only applicable in installations that used IP-252 pulse
security methods and only during batch deliveries.
Note
Pulse security implementation is hardware and software dependent. The value of PC 233 Error
limit (levels B and C) must be set to 0, to prevent triggering this alarm, if the physical flow
meter installation does not provide the required dual pulse train to the DanLoad 6000.
Parameter:
233 Error limit (pulses) 0
Is set to the default value 0. This value is the error count at which a pulse security alarm occurs.
Pulse security checks are performed only when a load is in progress. This is an 8-bit hardware
down counter, which can be set at any time by software and generates an interrupt when it reaches
zero, i.e. error limit exceeded. Zero disables pulse security.
Parameter:
234 Reset count (pulses) 10000
This parameter is used for pulse security level “B” and is set to the default value 10000. This
value is used to reset the accumulated pulse comparison error count from dual pulse train
comparison to zero after 10000 errors have been accumulated during the current delivery
operation.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 69
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Example: If PC 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to 10 and PC 234 Reset count (pulses) is set to
1000, the DanLoad 6000 allows no more than 10 pulses errors for each
accumulated 1000 input pulses.
Parameter:
235 Data logging alarm action Info
This selection is used to specify the action taken when a data logging alarm (overwriting an alarm
message in the alarm message storage memory) occurs.
Parameter:
236 Comms fail alarm action Primary
This selection is used to specify the action taken when a communications failure with a terminal
automation system or host computer occurs. A communications fault can occur during a batch
delivery or during idle time. This alarm will halt a delivery in progress. In all cases, the alarm
must be specifically reset before the DanLoad 6000 can resume operation.
Parameter:
237 Comms fail t-o (secs) 10
This value specifies the allowable time between receiving messages from the terminal automation
system before issuing a Comms fail alarm.
3 - 70 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

238 Temp fail alarm action Primary
239 Minimum temperature -40.0
240 Maximum temperature 110.0
241 Density fail alarm action Primary
242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000
243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000
The display example above shows parameters related to the method of RTD temperature input
signal and density input signal error conditions.
Parameter:
238 Temp fail alarm action Primary
Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation
will be suspended if the process temperature input is less than the value of PC 239 Minimum
temperature or greater than the value of PC 240 Maximum temperature. A Primary alarm must
be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary setting
detects temperature input failures. The backup temperature specified by PC [434, 437, 440,
443] Comp p backup temp is not used in the Primary mode.
Parameter:
239 Minimum temperature -40.0
Is set to the default value -40.0. This value is lower limit allowed for a process temperature input
before a Temp fail alarm is issued.
Parameter:
240 Maximum temperature 110.0
Is set to the default value 110.0. This value is upper limit allowed for a process temperature input
before a Temp fail alarm is issued.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 71
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
241 Density fail alarm action Primary
Is set to the default selection Primary. This selection indicates that the current delivery operation
will be suspended if the process density/gravity input is less than the value of PC 242 Minimum
density/gravity or greater than the value of PC 243 Maximum density/gravity. A Primary alarm
must be manually reset or specifically reset from a terminal automation system. The Primary
setting detects density/gravity input failures. The backup density/gravity specified by PC [457,
459, 461, 463] Comp p backup density/gravity is not used in the Primary mode.
Parameter:
242 Minimum density/gravity 0.0000
This value is lower limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is
triggered.
Parameter:
243 Maximum density/gravity 0.0000
This value is upper limit allowed for a process density input before a Density fail alarm is
triggered.
3 - 72 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

244 Minimum pressure 0.0
245 Maximum pressure 0.00
246 Additive error limit 3
247 Feedback time 10
248 Block valve time (secs) 10
The display example above shows parameters related to the method of processing the indicated
error conditions.
Parameter:
244 Minimum pressure 0.0
This value is the low pressure setpoint used for validation of pressure input signals.
Parameter:
245 Maximum pressure 0.00
This value is the high pressure setpoint used for validation of pressure input signals.
Parameter:
246 Additive error limit 3
This value sets the error count limit for triggering an Additive error limit alarm.
Parameter:
247 Feedback time 10
This value sets the time in seconds that an additive injection feedback signal can be energized
before and Additive error limit alarm is triggered.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 73
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Parameter:
248 Block valve time (secs) 10
This value sets the time allowed for a component block valve to close after the block valve control
output has been deenergized at the end of a loading operation or when a loading operation is
temporarily stopped.
3 - 74 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary
250 #1 Ground detector open
251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary
252 #2 Overspill detector open
error conditions.
Parameter:
This selection specifies the action to be taken if safety circuit 1 is open.
Parameter:
250 #1 Ground detector open
This selection is the message that is indicated when safety circuit 1 is open.
Parameter:
251 Circuit 2 alarm action Primary
Parameter:
252 #2 Overspill detector open
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 75
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

254 #3 Permissive power failure
256 #4 Additive injection failure
error conditions.
Parameter:
Parameter:
254 #3 Permissive power failure
Parameter:
Parameter:
256 #4 Additive injection failure
3 - 76 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

258 #5 Arm down side 1
error conditions.
Parameter:
Parameter:
Parameter:
Parameter:
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 77
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

262 #7 Walkway down side 1
error conditions.
Parameter:
Parameter:
Parameter:
Parameter:
3 - 78 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

265 Circuit 5 type 1
error conditions.
Parameter:
This selection limits checking for an open safety circuit 5.
Parameter:
Parameter:
Parameter:
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 79
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
The following table indicates the scope of the values of PC's 265 to 268.
PC 265 to 268 Circuit x type

Type Description
0 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress
1 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress ONLY at side 1
2 Check Safety circuit x while a batch load is in progress ONLy at side 2
3 - 80 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Recipes
480 Number of recipes 1
Recipe 1
481 Name Recipe #1
482 Component 1 % 100.00
483 Component 2 % 0.00
486 Sequence to load 1
0=Space, 1=A, 2=a, 3=0 4=#,5="
The display examples above show parameters related to the method defining recipes that control
the delivery of components in blending operations. Validation of recipe component percentages
is performed when a recipe is selected and when a preset quantity is entered. Component
percentages are validated as follows.
# Sequential blending
The sum of the percentages referenced by PC ccc Sequence to load PC must equal 100.
Example: Sequential Blending

(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code Valid Invalid
481 Name
482 Component 1 % 70 70
483 Component 2 % 20 30
484 Component 3 % 10 0
486 Sequence to Load 312 32
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 81
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# In-line blending
The sum of the percentages of 1 through PC 065 Number of components must equal 100.
Example: In-line Blending

(065 Number of components = 3)
Program Code Valid Invalid
481 Name
482 Component 1 % 70 70
483 Component 2 % 20 20
486 Sequence to Load
Parameter:
480 Number of recipes 1
Is set to the default value 1. This value causes one set of recipe definition parameters to be
available for configuration.
Parameter:
481 Name Recipe #1
Is set to the default string Recipe #1. The alpha-numeric data entry prompt is displayed on the
message line to allow the user to change this string to any sixteen characters. The name of the
currently selected recipe is shown in the upper left area of the display while operating in the
Loading Mode.
3 - 82 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameter:
482 Component 1 % 100
Is set to the default value 100. This value sets the recipe to define a single component
(component #1) for delivery. This value was set automatically because of the initial selection of
No blending (one flow meter, one flow control valve, and one component)
Parameter:
483 Component 2 % 0
Is set to the default value 0. This value indicates that this component is not used.
Parameter:
484 Component 3 % 0
Parameter:
485 Component 4 % 0
Parameter:
486 Sequence to load 1
Is set to the default value 1. This value indicates only one component is delivered when this recipe
is selected. If more than one component is defined, the other components can be specified in the
sequence to load by indicating the component number at the desired sequence place in this
parameter.
Example: PC ccc Sequence to load set to 142 indicates that during sequential loading,
component 1 is loaded first, component 4 is loaded second, component 2 is loaded third,
then the complete batch load is terminated.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 83
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Setup complete
Press ALT+CLEAR to exit
The display example above shows that the initial setup procedure is finished. Press the EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) key to continue. The permissive power indicator (green LED) and the display
panel will be OFF for a few seconds. The DanLoad 6000 is now in the Loading Mode.
Additional parameters, such as those controlling additive injection, that were not covered in the
initial setup procedure should be reviewed and modified if required at this time.
Assuming that only one recipe was defined, the loading display indicated below is displayed.
Loaded 0 Gal 0%
+))),
* *
Preset 0 Recipe * *
Remaining 0 Recipe * *
Enter preset qty .)))-
The Loading Display example above is the normal display for the English language that is
presented to the user / operator during normal operation. The user / operator is able to define the
delivery quantity and monitor the delivery operation via this display and the keypad. Batch
delivery operations are described in Section 4 - Operation.
3 - 84 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
If “Thai” has been selected via PC 028 Language, the loading display indicated below is
displayed.
3.5.2 Flow Measurement and General Parameters
The table below indicates the input and output signal assignment parameters related to associated
parameters in the DanLoad 6000.
DanLoad 6000 Field Signal Types

Signal Description
Flow inputs meter pulse inputs rom flow meter preamplifier

or pulse transmitter
Temperature inputs 4-wire RTD (resistive temperature device)
Pressure inputs 4 to 20 mAdc pressure transmitter
Density/gravity inputs 4 to 20 mAdc density/gravity transmitter or
converter device
Discrete inputs switch or relay contact closure
Discrete outputs driver for relay or solenoid coil
Parameters related to flow measurement and general parameters are shown in the following table.
Setup ________________________________________________________ 3 - 85
______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Flow Measurement - General (Figure 3 - 15)

Inputs Related Program Codes Outputs
METER PULSE INPUTS 218 Product units m nem onic (engineering units label for products)
050 N um ber of m eters (num ber of flow m eters)
M eter 1 051, 054, 057, 060 M eter ID (process tag)
052 M eter pulse board input 053, 056, 059, 062 V alve to be controlled (flow control valve assignm ent)
128 N um ber of pulse per unit outputs (enable PC 313 / PC 314) 313 Pulse per unit output 1
M eter 2 129, 132 C ontrol m eters (source of PC 313 / PC 314) 314 Pulse per unit output 2
055 M eter pulse board input 130, 133 Factor (factor for PC 313 / PC 314)
131, 134 Pulse width (m s) (pulse width for PC 313 / PC 314)
M eter 3 169 N um ber of factors/com ponent (flow rate / m eter factor sets for all flow m eters)
058 M eter pulse board input 170 M eter factor m ethod (fixed or linear interpolation)
COMPONENT P [ METER M ASSIGNMENT FROM PC 067, 070, 073, 076 METER ]
M eter 4 171, 182, 193, 204 N om inal K -factor (nam eplate K -factor to one decim al place)
061 M eter pulse board input 172, 183, 194, 205 M aster m eter factor (validation factor to four decim al places)
215 M aster M F % (m idpoint for ccc M aster m eter factor validation)
174, 185, 196, 207 C om p p flow rate 1 (low flow rate setpoint)
175, 186, 197, 208 C om p p m eter factor 1 (corresponding m eter factor)
176, 187, 198, 209 C om p p flow rate 2 (high flow rate or fall back flow rate)
177, 188, 199, 210 C om p p m eter factor 2 (corresponding m eter factor)
178, 189, 200, 211 C om p p flow rate 3 (high flow rate or fall back flow rate)
179 190, 201, 212 C om p p m eter factor 3 (corresponding m eter factor)
180 191, 202, 213 C om p p flow rate 4 (high flow rate)
181 192, 203, 214 C om p p m eter factor 4 (corresponding m eter factor)
216 A djacent M F % [M F1-2] [M F2-1 / M F2-3] [M F3-2 / M F3-4] [M F4-3]
219 Safety circuit m essage (default safety circuit alarm m essage)
221 Low flow alarm action (alarm result)
222 M inim um flow rate (low alarm setpoint for Flow rate too low m eter m )
223 Low flow tim e (secs) (low flow allow able tim e lim it)
224 H igh flow alarm action (alarm result)
225 M axim um flow rate (high alarm setpoint for Flow rate too high m eter m )
226 H igh flow tim e (secs) (high flow allow able tim e lim it)
233 Error lim it (pulses) (IP 252 error count for Pulse security error m eter m )
234 R eset count (pulses) (IP 252 error count reset)
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 86

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

RTD INPUTS 319, 325, 331, 337 M eter m offset (O hm s) (R TD w ire length resistance com pensation)
353 R TD inputs (R TD input type definition)
318 M eter 1 tem p input 426 Buoyancy (density adjustm ent for buoyancy in air)
324 M eter 2 tem p input 427 T em perature units (engineering units)
330 M eter 3 tem p input 430 R eference tem perature (base tem perature for corrections)
336 M eter 4 tem p input 431 Sam ple qty (product quantity m easured betw een tem perature sam ples)
432, 435, 438, 441 C om p p tem p option (calculation m ethod)
433, 436, 439, 442 C om p p alpha (coefficient of therm al expansion for product)
434, 437, 440, 443 C om p p backup tem p (default fixed tem perature)
238 Tem p fail alarm action (alarm result)
239 M inim um tem perature (low alarm setpoint for Tem perature failure m eter m )
240 M axim um tem perature (high alarm setpoint for Tem perature failure m eter m )
4 TO 20 MADC INPUTS 429 Pressure units (engineering units)

444, 447, 450, 453 C om p p pres option (calculation m ethod)
320 M eter 1 pres input 445, 448, 451, 454 C om p p F-factor (com pressibility factor for product)
326 M eter 2 pres input 446, 449, 452, 455 C om p p vapor pressure (equilibrium vapor pressure for product)
332 M eter 3 pres input 464, 468, 472, 476 Pressure @ 4 m A (zero scale setpoint)
338 M eter 4 pres input 465, 469, 473, 477 Pressure @ 20 m A (full scale setpoint
244 M inim um pressure (low alarm setpoint for Pressure failure m eter m )
245 M axim um pressure (high alarm setpoint for Pressure failure m eter m )
4 TO 20 MADC INPUTS 046 D ensity/gravity scale (num ber of decim al places)

428 D ensity units (engineering units)
321 M eter 1 dens input 456, 458, 460, 462 D ensity/gravity option (enable / disable)
327 M eter 2 dens input 457, 459, 461, 463 Backup density/gravity (default fixed density / gravity)
333 M eter 3 dens input 466, 470, 474, 478 D ensity @ 4 m A (zero scale setpoint)
339 M eter 4 dens input 467, 471, 475, 479 D ensity @ 20 m A (full scale setpoint)
241 D ensity fail alarm action (alarm result)
242 M inim um density/gravity (low alarm setpoint for D ensity failure com ponent p)
243 M axim um density/gravity (high alarm setpoint for D ensity failure com ponent p)
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 87

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Sw ing arm 1 312 Side detect m ethod (sw ing arm loading side perm issive)
Sw ing arm 2
343 A uto/m anual change-over 025 O perating m ode (auto / m anual)
344 Prim ary alarm reset 220 Secondary alarm reset (auto clear tim e for Secondary alarm s) 287 A larm control output
345 Safety circuit 1 249 C ircuit 1 alarm action (alarm result)

250 #1 G round detector open (default m essage)

252 #2 O verspill detector open (default m essage)

254 #3 Perm issive pow er failure (default m essage)

256 #4 A dditive injection failure (default m essage)

258 #5 A rm dow n side 1 (default m essage)
265 C ircuit 5 type (general or loading island side)

260 #6 A rm dow n side 2 (default m essage)

262 #7 W alkw ay dow n side 1 (default m essage)

264 #8 W alkw ay dow n side 2 (default m essage)
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 88

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.6 Product Blending
From two to four products can be blended into the loaded composite stream. The Delivery -
Blending table located at the end of this section contains an overview of all physical input and
output signals and internal control parameters that are related to product delivery / blending
equipment and procedures.
The basic configuration of the type of blending to be performed is controlled by the entry in PC
026 Unit type. The configurable blender types are described below.
3.6.1 Sequential Blending
Sequential blending is the loading of one product at one time. The blend ratio is correct only after
all components of the blend have been loaded. A DanLoad 6000 that controls loading of one
product is configured as a sequential blender, although no blending action is performed. Block
valve control for each component can be controlled either automatically or manually as described
below.
# Seq.(auto)
The DanLoad 6000 controls the opening and closing of the component block valves
automatically.
# Seq.(manual)
The DanLoad 6000 prompts the operator to open and close the component block valves at
the start and end of each batch loading.
Prompt: Open block valve - press ENTER after a batch delivery has been
configured and the START key is pressed
Prompt: Close block valve - pres ENTER after delivery of the batch and after the
flow control valve has been closed
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 89
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
The response to either prompt is to press the ENTER key to execute the open or close
block valve operation.
The loading method for sequential blending is described below.
# Setup the batch loading operation and press the START key.
# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the low flow rate
value and maintain the low flow rate for the specified time period.
# Open the flow control valve to increase the flow rate of the component to the high
(normal) flow rate value and maintain the flow rate during the component delivery.
# Close the flow control valve to decrease the flow rate of the component to the low flow
rate value and deliver the specified quantity at the low flow shutdown rate.
# After the low flow rate quantity has been delivered, shut the flow control valve.
# If only one component was specified in the recipe, the batch delivery is complete at this
time, if another component was specified in the recipe, this component is loaded in the
same manner as specified by the steps listed above. The sequence of component loading
is repeated for each component specified by the recipe and in the order to load specified
by the recipe.
3 - 90 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.6.2 In-Line Blending
In-line blending is the simultaneous blending and loading of two to four products. Each product
has a dedicated flow meter and flow control valve. In-line blending can be either non-proportional
or proportional as described below.
# In-line non-proportional
In-line non-proportional blending is accomplished by delivering the lesser quantity
component(s) of the blend at the normal flow rate, which is less than the flow rate for the
highest quantity component of the blend. After the lesser quantity component(s) have
been delivered, the highest quantity component continues delivery until the blend ratio is
attained. The total blend ratio can be in error until the total preset quantity is delivered.
# In-line proportional
In-line proportional blending is accomplished by controlling the ratio between all
components at all times during the delivery by controlling the individual flow rate of each
component. The ratio of the delivered blend is correct at all times during the delivery.
Therefore, the delivery can be stopped at any time and the delivered blend will be within
tolerance.
3.6.3 Off-Rack Blending
Off-rack blending uses a separate skid with two to four flow meters, located away from the load
rack. The DanLoad 6000 delivers a single recipe (components are loaded simultaneously) to one
or more delivery points.
Parameters related to product blending are indicated in the following table.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 91
______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Delivery - Blending (Figure 3 - 16)

026 U nit type (blender type) Valve 1
027 V alve type (flow control valve type) 292 Solenoid 1 (upstream )
048 N um ber of valves (num ber of flow control valves) 293 Solenoid 2 (dow nstream )
049 Initial flow tim e (secs) (tim e before flow control action begins)
115, 119, 123, 127 O pen m ethod (control during Initial flow tim e (secs)) 288 Pum p control output
065 N um ber of com ponents (num ber of products)
066, 069, 072, 075 C om ponent ID (product identification) Valve 2
067, 070, 073, 076 M eter (flow m eter assignm ent for product) 297 Solenoid 1 (upstream )
068, 071, 074, 077 M ass adjustm ent (m assa adjustm ent factor) 298 Solenoid 2 (dow nstream )
078 M axim um preset qty (m axim um batch size)
079 M inim um preset qty (m inim um batch size) 289 Pum p control output
080 Preset/delivery type (gross quantity / standard quantity)
081 D elivery display type (gross quantity / standard quantity) Valve 3
082 Stop key action (result of STO P key press) 302 Solenoid 1 (upstream )
083 Fall back qty (quantity delivered at fall back flow rate) 303 Solenoid 2 (dow nstream )
084. 090, 096, 102 Low flow start qty (low flow delivery quantity)
085, 091, 097, 103 Low flow restart qty (low flow delivery quantity after restart) 290 Pum p control output
086, 092, 098, 104 Low flow stop qty (low flow shutdow n quantity)
087, 093, 099, 105 Line pack delay (pum p start 6 TIME 6 open flow control valve) Valve 4
088, 094, 100, 106 Pum p stop delay (close flow control valve 6 TIME 6 pum p stop) 307 Solenoid 1 (upstream )
108 R am p clicks (num ber of attem pts to increase flow rate) 308 Solenoid 2 (dow nstream )
109 M aintenance clicks (num ber of attem pts to m aintain flow rate)
112, 116, 120, 124 Low flow % error (allow able low flow rate deadband) 291 Pum p control output
113, 117, 121, 125 H igh flow % error (allow able high flow rate deadband)
114, 118, 122, 126 V alve delay (secs) (flow control valve response tim e) Load phase
227 O verrun lim it qty (alarm setpoint for U nable to close valve m eter m ) 315 Trip 1 output
228 U nderflow alarm action (alarm result) 316 Trip 2 output
229 U nderflow lim it qty (alarm setpoint for Valve closed early m eter m ) 317 Trip 3 output
230 N o flow t-o alarm action (alarm result)
231 N o flow t-o tim e (secs) (alarm setpoint for Tim ed-out - no flow detected m eter m )
232 U nauthorized flow lim it qty (alarm setpoint for U nauthorized flow exceeds lim it m eter m )
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 92

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Flow control valve BLENDING (continued from
(continued from previous page) previous page)
111 Prim ary com ponent (for blend ratio error detection and / or line flushing)
714 C lean line qty (quantity of 111 Prim ary com ponent to load at end of delivery)
712 R ate reduction (fall back flow rate for blend deliveries)
713 Low flow start qty (blend quantity to load at low flow startup rate)
715 Low prop fac (flow rate to deliver low proportion com ponents of a blend)
716 C orrect after qty (quantity allowed to be loaded before blend ratio correction)
717 A larm after qty (quantity allow ed to be loaded before checking blend ratio alarm )
718 A djustm ent qty (quantity of a blend w hich is subject to the blend ratio)
719 C om p % display (display blend com ponents in gross quantity or standard quantity)
722 Blend error m ethod (the m ethod for calculating an error in the blend ratio)
723 M ax dev % (m axim um percent deviation in the blend)
724 Blend tol % (blend tolerance percentage)
725 M ax dev qty (m axim um blend deviation quantity)
726 Blend tol qty (blend tolerance quantity)
727 Blend sam ple qty (blend sam ple quantity)
METER M
728, 734, 740, 746 Flow adj fac (flow adjustm ent factor)
729, 735, 741, 747 R adio adj fac (blend ration adjustm ent factor)
COMPONENT P
752, 758, 764, 770 Stop rate (sum of the shutdow n low flow rates for all com ponents of a blend)
348 Safety circuit 4 (m ust be set to 0 to enable the recipe rem ote selection below )
361 R ecipe 1 input 481, 487, 493, 499, 505, 511 R ecipe N am e (identification) 367 R ecipe 1 output
362 R ecipe 2 input 482, 488, 494, 500, 506, 512 Com ponent 1 percentage 368 R ecipe 2 output
366 R ecipe 6 input 486, 492, 498, 504, 510, 516 Sequence to load (blending sequence) 372 R ecipe 6 output
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 93

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Com ponent 1 089, 095, 101, 107 Block valve delay (open block valve 6 TIME 6 open flow control valve) Com ponent 1
401 Block valve input 248 Block valve tim e (secs) (tim e allow ed to close product block valve) 400 Block valve output
Com ponent 2 Com ponent 2

403 Block valve input 402 Block valve output


C om ponent C om binations
408 C om bination 1 (1X X X )
409 C om bination 2 (X 2X X )
410 C om bination 3 (X X 3X )
411 C om bination 4 (X X X4)
412 C om bination 5 (12X X )
413 C om bination 6 (1X 3X )
414 C om bination 7 (1X X 4)
415 C om bination 8 (X 23X )
416 C om bination 9 (X 2X 4)
417 C om bination 10 (X X 34)
418 C om bination 11 (123X )
419 C om bination 12 (12X4)
420 C om bination 13 (1X 34)
421 C om bination 14 (X 234)
422 C om bination 15 (1234)
342 O ff-rack start/end rem ote control of batch / blend start and stop
Setup __________________________________________________________________________ Section 3 - 94

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.7 Additive Injection
From one to six additives, or no additives can be injected into the loaded stream. The primary
features of the additive injection control system are listed below.
# Each of the selected additives is injected based on the delivered batch quantity (the sum
of the components delivered). The additive injection operation is reset at the start of each
batch delivery. This method of additive injection control assures that the desired additive
ratio is maintained at all times.
# Additives can be selected individually or simultaneously by either local keypad commands,

external switches, or a terminal automation system.
# Injection of each additive can be verified by individual feedback circuits for each additive.
# The volume of each additive injected can be totalized. Totalization can be based on
injection output pulses (Ratio outputs) or positive feedback pulses (Feedback inputs).
# Discrete outputs can be configured to control an additive pump for each additive. The
configured pump output for a selected additive is energized at the start of the batch load
at the same time the component pump outputs are energized. The additive pump outputs
are deenergized at the end of a batch load at the same time the component pump outputs
are deenergized plus the time specified by PC 110 Additive pump stop (secs). PC 110
Additive pump stop (secs) delay time applies to all selected additive pumps. This feature
permits the additive pumps to remain running as consecutive batches are loaded into one
compartment.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 95
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# Discrete outputs can be configured to control an additive line block valve for each additive.
The configured additive block valve output for a selected additive is energized at the start
of the batch load at the same time the additive pump outputs and the component pump
outputs are energized. The additive block valve outputs are deenergized when the preset
quantity of the product minus the quantity of PC 138 Clean line qty has been delivered.
Additive quantity injection is calculated by the DanLoad 6000 to compensate for any
quantity specified by PC 138 Clean line qty.
Several program codes define parameters used by the additive injection process. These parameters
are described in the following tables.
PC Name Function
Common to all Additive Injection

044 A dditive units Engineering units for additive totalizing in the D ynam ic D ata D isplay elem ents 096 to
101 Add x total and 115 to 120 Add x batch.
110 A dditive pum p stop (secs) Tim e between load stop and deenergize additive pum p outputs.
135 N um ber of additives Total num ber of additive injectors controlled.
136 Selection m ethod M ethod used to select additives:

# External A ll configured PC ccc Ratio outputs are cycled. Individual outputs can be
disabled w ith series sw itches or relays in each output circuit.
# Prom pt Local operator is prom pted to select each configured additive w ith the
Additive selection display at the start of each transaction.
# Inputs Each configured additive is selected by the corresponding PC
[382, 385, 388, 391, 394, 397] Selection input in the
CLOSED state during the batch loading.
137 Totalizing m ethod M ethod used to totalize additives (see text below ).
138 C lean line qty The quantity of product delivered w ithout additive at the end of a load to prevent
additive contam ination in the next load.
246 A dditive error lim it Lim it of ccc Ratio output pulses that are not verified by PC ccc Feedback input pulses
(see text below ).
247 Feedback tim e M axim um tim e that a PC ccc Feedback input can be energized before an Additive x
failure alarm is generated.
255 C ircuit 4 alarm action Select the response to an Additive injection failure alarm .
256 #4 A dditive injection failure The m essage Additive injection failure for PC 255 Circuit 4 alarm action.
3 - 96 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
PC Name Function
Additive 1 (see Section 6 for corresponding PC's for Additives 2 to 6)
139 A dditive control m eters Select the com ponent flow m eters and either gross or standard quantities for
controlling additive injection.
140 R atio qty The delivered quantity increm ent that controls PC ccc Ratio output. W hen fifty
percent of this quantity is delivered, PC ccc Ratio output is energized. W hen one-
hundred percent of this quantity is delivered, PC ccc Ratio output is deenergized.
Therefore, PC ccc Ratio output duty cycle is alw ays 50/50 (50 % energized and 50
% deenergized).
141 O ffset volum e The volum e to be delivered w ithout any additive injection. This volum e is delivered,
then PC ccc Ratio output is energized. From this tim e forw ard, PC ccc Ratio output
cycle is controlled by the m easured delivered volum e and the value of PC ccc Ratio
qty.
142 Totalizing volum e The volum e of additive injected w hen each PC ccc Ratio output is generated or each
PC ccc Feedback input is received. This volum e tim es the value of D ynam ic D ata
D isplay elem ents Add x total or Add x batch determ ines the actual volum e of additive
injected.
143 A vailable A llow s disabling selection of this additive in the Additive Selection D isplay. If the
additive is not available, a batch load that specifies this additive cannot be started.
380 Ratio output A discrete output assignm ent used to select the control output for an additive injector
device.
381 Feedback input A discrete input assignm ent used to select the status input for verifying that an additive
has been injected.
382 Selection input A discrete input assignm ent used to select an additive for injection if PC 136 Selection
m ethod is set to Inputs.
800 Pum p output A discrete output assignm ent used to select the control output for an additive pum p.
801 Block valve output A discrete output assignm ent used to select the control output for an additive line block
valve.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 97
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
PC 137 Totalizing method sets the common mode for totalizing all additives. The totalizing
method is divided into the following two parts.
# Totalize additives based on output (Ratio output) or on input (Feedback input).
# Method of handling the Feedback inputs, which can be Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle or
Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle or Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input.
The options for PC 137 Totalizing method are described below. Pulse timing diagrams are shown
for the different feedback methods. The symbols used in these diagrams are defined below.
Symbol Description
VO Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers if PC
137 Totalizing method is set to: Out, Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk
VI Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers if PC
137 Totalizing method is set to: In, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk
R+ Increment the ratio counter. If PC 137 Totalizing method is set to: Out/Sgl,
Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk, verify that [the absolute
value of the ratio counter minus 1 is less than or equal to the value of PC 246
Additive error limit. If not true, issue an Additive x failure alarm.
R- Decrement the ratio counter. If PC 137 Totalizing method is set to: Out/Sgl,
Out/Dbl, Out/Hshk, In/Sgl, In/Dbl, In/Hshk, verify that [the absolute
value of the ratio counter less than the value of PC 246 Additive error limit.
If not true, issue an Additive x failure alarm.
T0 Timer started when PC [380, 383, 386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output is
energized. Time-out occurs and generates an Additive x failure alarm if a PC
[381, 384, 387, 390, 393, 396] Feedback input is not received and the
corresponding [380, 383, 386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output is not
deenergized.
3 - 98 _______________________________________________________ Setup
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Notes:
# Add x total is Dynamic Data Display element 096 to 101. Add x batch is Dynamic Data
Display element 115 to 120. (see PC 680 to 695 Element x data code for additional
information.)
# The ratio counters are internal up / down counters, one for each additive. One ratio
counter is incremented for each corresponding PC ccc Ratio output and is decremented for
each corresponding PC ccc Feedback input. This operation allows a comparison of the
value of ratio counters to a preset limit, PC 246 Additive error limit, to determine if
problems exist in the additive injection loops.
# 137 Totalizing method: Out

The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter
is ignored. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each of the
ccc Ratio output cycles. ccc Feedback inputs are not monitored.
# 137 Totalizing method: In

is ignored. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each of the
ccc Feedback input cycles. ccc Ratio outputs are not monitored.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 99
DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Sgl or In/Sgl

set to zero at the start of the batch loading. One PC ccc Feedback input is expected after PC ccc
Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers
for each PC ccc Ratio output (Out/Sgl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Sgl).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
R+* * R+* * R+* * 7 Ratio Output
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+)), +)), +)), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback Input
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
))))))- .)))))))))))- .)))))))))))))- .))))))))))Q 7 OFF
Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle
3 - 100 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Dbl or In/Dbl

set to zero at the start of the batch loading. One PC ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after
the PC ccc Ratio output is energized and one PC ccc Feedback input is expected after the PC ccc
Ratio output is deenergized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers
for each PC ccc Ratio output (Out/Dbl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Dbl).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+)), +)), +)), +)), +)), +)), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback
* * * * * * * * * * * * Input
* * * * * * * * * * * *
))))))- .)))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))Q 7 OFF
Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 101

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
# 137 Totalizing method: Out/Hshk or In/Hshk

An Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive ratio counter
set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive injection timer is set when PC ccc Ratio
output is energized. One PC ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after the PC ccc Ratio output
is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC
ccc Ratio output (Out/Hshk) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Hshk).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
T0* * T0* * T0* *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+))))), +)))))), +)))))), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback
* * * * * * Input
* * * * * *
)))))))- .))))))))- .))))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input
3 - 102 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
3.8 Mass Loading Using a Volumetric Flow Meter
When the mass of product is required (for display, data logging or delivery control) there are two
options; 1) use a mass meter, e.g. a Coriolis effect flow meter, which reports "pulses per unit
mass" to the DanLoad 6000, or 2) use a volumetric flow meter, e.g. a turbine meter, which
reports "pulses per unit gross volume" to the DanLoad 6000 and have the DanLoad 6000 compute
the mass from the gross volume. Both options are possible with the DanLoad 6000. This section
describes the second option.
In order to have the DanLoad 6000 compute product mass, the DanLoad 6000 should first be
configured to compute the standard quantity in the usual way, i.e. specify temperature units,
temperature correction option per component, pressure correction option per component,
temperature input (RTD) per meter or backup temperature per component, density input (4-20
mA) per meter or backup density per component, etc. The temperature and pressure correction
options are likely to dictate the density units used by the DanLoad 6000. If a "live" density input
is used, the input density should be corrected to standard conditions external to the DanLoad
6000.
Mass computation is enabled by entering a mass computation adjustment factor per component,
which causes the standard volume to be recomputed as mass, i.e. for "standard quantity" read
"mass". Thus, batch mass, meter mass totalizers, component mass totalizers, etc. can be
displayed in the dynamic data display, printed on data logs and requested by an automation
system. The meter standard quantities to 2 decimal places (data codes 147, etc.) are not
recomputed as mass, and still show the standard volume even when mass computation is enabled.
This allows meters to be proved volumetrically, if required. If meters are proved by mass, i.e.
by comparison with a weighscale, the following should be considered:
- The weighscale' s resolution/accuracy will contribute to overall inaccuracy.

- The meter factor adjustment is still applied to the gross volume measured by
the DanLoad 6000.
- Flow rates on the DanLoad 6000 are in gross volume units per minute.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 103

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
The mass computation adjustment factor provides the flexibility to compute mass in almost any
units (pounds, kilograms, etc.) from volume and density in almost any units. However, it should
be noted that the DanLoad 6000 displays mass only in (rounded to nearest) whole units, e.g. ± 0.5
tons if the mass computation adjustment factor computes tons. See program code 68 for more
information and examples. An adjustment for buoyancy in air can be included in the mass
computation. See program code 426 for more information.
It is also possible to preset by mass, e.g. to preset and load a batch of 10,000 kilograms, by
enabling mass computation (as described above) and then setting the preset/delivery type to "Std"
(standard quantity). See program code 80 for more information.
Care should be exercised when enabling mass computation and, more importantly, when
presetting by mass since the number of mass units can be very different from the number of
volume units. Small batches should be loaded in order to verify the configuration.
Mass Loading Example:
Application: It is desired to preset and deliver an amount in units of mass using a gross volume
meter, e.g. a liquid turbine meter or a PD meter.
In this particular example the unit of mass to be delivered is in Kilograms by measuring a gross
volume in Liters, at a average batch temperature of 28.5 ° C, of a product with density .7560
grams/cm3 using "China" temperature correction table.
The DanLoad 6000 is configured as follows:
"PC 080 Preset/delivery type" Std

"PC 081 Delivery display type" Std
"PC 046 Density/ gravity scale" 4
"PC 457 Backup/density gravity" 0.7560
"PC 426 Buoyancy (PC 426) 0.0011
3 - 104 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
"PC 430 Reference temperature" 20

"PC 432 Temperature option" China
"PC 068 Mass adjustment" 1.000000
"PC 218 Product units mnemonic" Kg
"PC 680 Element 1 data code" 103
Note: Mass adjustment is used as a multiplier to convert gross volume to mass and takes into
account density units (grams/cm3), K factor units (pulses/liters) and desired mass units
(Kilograms).
The DanLoad 6000, when configured as above displays the mass loaded in Kilograms in large
numbers next to the word Loaded. The SELECT key may be pressed in the loading screen to
invoke the dynamic data display which displays "Mtr1 grs batch" and "Mtr 1 std batch".
When the DanLoad 6000 is configured as described, and a quantity of 748 Kg is preset, the
DanLoad 6000 delivers 748 Kg. The DanLoad displays the meter 1 grs batch quantity loaded
as 1000 (which is in liters), and the meter 1 std batch quantity loaded as 748 (which is in
Kilograms).
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 105

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.9 Setup Checklist
This sub-section, the following sub-sections, and Appendix B should be reviewed after the initial
setup procedure is completed. A check list is provided that contains a brief description of all
parameters groups and their relation to various operational configurations. Section 6 - Program
Code Definitions contains additional information on all program codes and options.
Access to Program Mode from Loading Mode: press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key,
enter the passcode, the factory default passcode is 6000, press the ENTER key. The Program
Mode Menu is now displayed. The first selection, indicated by the box cursor, is Setup. Press
the ENTER key to access the Setup Menu. The Setup Menu contains twenty-one parameter group
selections divided into four display pages. Each of these parameter groups is listed below. The
applicable parameters in each group should be verified before the DanLoad 6000 is placed into
service.
# Security Parameters Control access to DanLoad 6000 setup and operation.
# Unit Parameters General global parameters.
# Valve Parameters Assign flow control valves.
# Meter Parameters Assign flow meter to flow control valve.
# Component Parameters Assign component to flow meter.
3 - 106 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Delivery Parameters Define batch loading control parameters.

Define the pump / block valve / flow control valve timing relationship. The parameters indicated
below set the timing for each component.
open start open close stop

BV PUMP FCV FCV BV PUMP
* * * * * *
))))3))))))))3))))))))))))))))))3))))))))))))))3)2))))))))3))))
* * 7----- LPD -----6 * * 7-- PSD-6 *
* 7--------- BVD ----------6 *
where:
BV - block valve
FCV - flow control valve
LPD - ccc Line pack delay (secs)
BVD - ccc Block valve delay (secs)
PSD - ccc Pump stop delay (secs)
Startup:
The line pack delay and block valve delay are relative to the opening of the flow control valve at
the start of a loading operation. The diagram indicates the line pack delay time is shorter than
block valve delay time. Both of these delays are independent and only related to the opening of
the flow control valve. Therefore, the delays may be set to open the block valve and start the
pump simultaneously or to start the pump before opening the block valve. If 0 seconds delay is
entered for the line pack delay and the block valve delay, the pump starts, the block valve opens,
and the flow control valve opens simultaneously. The logic does not allow configuration for
starting the pump or opening the block valve after the flow control valve is commanded OPEN.
PC ccc Valve delay (secs) parameter in the Digital Valve Parameters group sets a time period that
is added to the computed time to open or close the flow control valve.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 107

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Shutdown:
The flow control valve is shut to stop the flow. The block valve is automatically closed when no
flow is detected. For a normally terminated delivery, the pump stop delay is from the time that
no flow is detected until the pump output is de-energized.
PC ccc Block valve delay (secs) in the Alarms group sets the time period to allow after sending
a block valve CLOSE command (discrete output OPEN) before activating an Unable to close
block valve # alarm, if the block valve fails to respond to the CLOSE command.
# Digital Valve Parameters Define operation of flow control valves.

This group of parameters define the characteristics for operation of digital flow control valves
(throttling valves) only. Fixed setpoint stem switch valves do not use these parameters.
However, two-stage valves with one or two stem switches do use the Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2
control outputs to control the valve actuator. The control logic for digital flow control valves is
shown in Figure 3 - 10. And the control and status logic for two-stage valves with stem switches
is shown in Figure 3 - 11.
3 - 108 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Digital Flow Control Valve Operation
Valve State
Device Closed Opening Static Open Closing
Solenoid 1 (upstream) open closed closed open

control output
Upstream pilot valve open closed closed open
Solenoid 2 (downstream) open closed open open

control output
Downstream pilot valve closed open closed closed
Digital Flow Control Valve
Figure 3 - 17
The incremental open / close state of a digital flow control valve, such as a Daniel model 1815
or Dan-Flo valve, is controlled by two variable duration pulsed control outputs (Solenoid 1 and
Solenoid 2). A digital flow control valve has a sealed variable capacity chamber downstream of
the movable plug. The upstream surface area and cavity surface area of the plug plus pressure
exerted by a closing spring, closes the plug against the seat and stops all flow through the valve
when the upstream process liquid is allowed to enter the cavity (through normally open Solenoid
1). This is the normal state of the valve with neither solenoid powered.
The valve is opened to the low flow setpoint by closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot and
opening the downstream (cavity drain) pilot. The DanLoad 6000 senses the flow rate from the
meter pulse input and stops the valve from opening when the desired flow rate is attained. The
valve open / close action is stopped at any position by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot
and closing the upstream (cavity fill) pilot. Flow rate through the flow meter is adjusted
dynamically. The valve is closed by closing the downstream (cavity drain) pilot and opening the
upstream (cavity fill) pilot.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 109

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
WARNING
The Daniel model 1815 flow control valve has an needle valve located in the upstream pilot
circuit that can be used to restrict the flow in this circuit and slow the valve opening speed. A
corresponding needle valve located in the downstream pilot circuit can be used to restrict flow
in that circuit and slow the valve closing speed. These two needle valves are normally set fully
open so that the DanLoad 6000 has maximum possible control of the valve. These needle valves
should only be adjusted by persons familiar with the operation of these valves. Use caution
when delivering a product after one or both of these needle valves have been adjusted. Mis-
adjustment of the needle valves can cause tank overfill and spillage or under delivery.
3 - 110 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches) Operation
V alve State
D evice O pening to C losing to

Low Flow Start & O pening to Full Low Flow Stop &
C losed Low Flow Start O pen & Full O pen Low Flow Stop C losed
Solenoid 1 open close close close open

control output
Solenoid 2 open open close open open

control output
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (without Stem-Switches)
Figure 3 - 18
The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs are used to control the open / close position of a
flow control valve without stem switches. A flow control valve without stem switches does not
control the flow rate based on rate of flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate at low
flow start high flow (normal flow) and low flow stop is controlled by an external flow rate
regulator. Control output Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens to the low flow
start position and the low flow start quantity is delivered at that rate. After the low flow start
quantity has been delivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed to open the flow control valve to
the high (normal flow rate) position. When the remaining quantity equals the low flow stop
quantity, control output Solenoid 2 is opened to position the valve at the low flow stop flow rate.
After the low flow stop rate is delivered, control output Solenoid 1 is opened and the flow control
valve is fully shut. All flow through the valve ceases.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 111

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches) Operation
Valve State
Device
Low Flow Full Low Flow
Closed Opening Start Open Closing Stop
Solenoid 1 (upstream) open closed open open open open

control output
Stem switch 1 (normally open) closed --- open open open to

(low flow stop) close
Solenoid 2 (downstream) open open open open closed open

control output
Stem switch 2 (normally closed close to open open ---

closed) open
(low flow start)
Two-Stage Flow Control Valve (with Stem-Switches)
Figure 3 - 19
The Solenoid 1 and Solenoid 2 control outputs and the Stem switch 1 and / or Stem switch 2 status
inputs can be used to control the open / close position of a flow control valve with one or two stem
switches. A flow control valve with stem switches does not control the flow rate based on rate of
flow feedback from the flow meter. The flow rate for low flow startup and (optionally) low flow
shutdown is manually set by mechanical adjustments of the one or two stem switches. Control
output Solenoid 1 is closed to open the valve. The valve opens until a close-to-open transition
of Stem switch 2 is sensed. Control output Solenoid 1 is opened at that time. The valve remains
at the low flow startup mechanical setting for a selectable time period. After the time period has
elapsed, control output Solenoid 1 is closed again and the valve is fully opened. Low flow
shutdown is attained by closing control output Solenoid 2 until an open-to-close transition of Stem
switch 1 is sensed. Control output Solenoid 2 is opened at that time. The valve remains at the low
flow shutdown mechanical setting until a selectable quantity is delivered. After the quantity has
been delivered, control output Solenoid 2 is closed again and the valve is fully closed.
3 - 112 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Pulse per Unit Outputs Define up to two pulse outputs.
# Additive Delivery Parameters

Define additive injection parameters.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 113

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Program Code Additive 1 Injection Related Function

Parameters common to all additive injection:
135 Number of additives Sets the total number of additive injectors to control.
136 Selection method Method for selection the additive injection while operating in the
Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode.
# External All additive ratio outputs enabled by PC 135
Number of additives program code are
cycled. Each additive injector output circuit
can be selectively enabled / disabled by a
series switch.
# Prompt The local operator is prompted (Additive
Selection Display) to select the desired
additives before the start of each transaction.
# Inputs All additive ratio outputs enabled by PC 135
Number of additives program code are cycled
if enabled by an external contact closure
input for that EACH specific additive.
3 - 114 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

137 Totalizing method Selects method of totalizing injected additive volume:
# Out Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive ratio output cycle.
# Out/Sgl Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive ratio output cycle. One
feedback cycle per each ratio output cycle.
# Out/Dbl Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive ratio output cycle. Two
feedback cycles per each ratio output cycle.
# Out/Hshk Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive ratio output cycle.
Handshake feedback cycle.
# In/Sgl Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive feedback cycle. One
feedback cycle per each ratio output cycle.
# In/Dbl Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive feedback cycle. Two
feedback cycles per each ratio output cycle.
# In/Hshk Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive feedback cycle. Handshake
feedback cycle.
# In Increment the additive volume totalizer once
for each additive feedback input cycle.
Additive totalization is independent from the
ratio output cycle.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 115

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________

138 Clean line qty The quantity of product to deliver at the end of a load without additive
injection. This additive free delivery assures that the load rack delivery line
and arm are additive free and ready for the next loading operation.
139 Additive control meters Define the combination of gross and / or standard flow through any
combination of flow meters for control of additive injection.
140 Ratio qty The delivered quantity through the configured additive control
meters that controls one cycle of additive injection.
141 Offset volume Set the gross volume to deliver through the configured additive
control meters before starting additive injection. The additive
injection ratio outputs are suppressed during the delivery of this
volume at the start of each batch delivery.
142 Totalizing volume Set the volume that is injected by the additive injector for each
injection cycle.
143 Available Enable or disable the capability to select this additive in the Additive
Selection Menu during batch delivery setup.
380 Ratio output Assign the additive injection function output to a physical AC or DC
control output.
381 Feedback input Assign the additive injection verification input from the injector
mechanism to a physical AC or DC status input.
3 - 116 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

382 Selection input Assign the additive injection enable input from an external contact
closure to a physical AC or DC status input. If this input is
assigned, the input must be closed and remain closed to enable
injection of additive number 1.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 117

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
Additive Injection Operations:
Additive number 1 injection is performed in the following manner.
# The batch delivery is started.
# The batch volume specified by PC 141 Offset volume is delivered.
# After the offset volume has been delivered, the additive injector is controlled by the
following algorithm.
Control output PC 380 Ratio output is turned ON when the following equation is true:
Delivered volume MOD ratio volume = ratio volume / 2
Control output PC 380 Ratio output is turned OFF when the following equation is true:
Delivered volume MOD ratio volume = ratio volume
# Additive 1 injected volume is totalized, if required, as follows.
# Factors Define the K-factors and meter factors for flow

meters.
NOTE: Very important to verify these values.
# Alarms Define alarm setpoints or trigger conditions.
# I/O Parameters Verify / define physical board and input / output

signal assignments.
# Additive I/O Parameters Define additive input / output signal assignments.
3 - 118 _______________________________________________________ Setup

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Component I/O Parameters

Define component block valve input / output signal
assignments.
# Temperature / Pressure / Density

Define procedures to use in temperature , pressure,
and density or gravity calculations (if applicable).
# Recipes Define delivery control / blend recipes.
# Data Communications Define parameters for data communications ports

(applicable to systems with terminal automation
system and / or remote data printer).
# Dynamic Data Display Verify / define data elements for display.
# Data Logging Enable / disable report printing data printer.
# Blending Define the control parameters for product blending

operations.
# Additive pumps/block valves

Assignment of output signals for additive injection
pumps and additive injection block valves.
Setup _______________________________________________________ 3 - 119

DanLoad 6000 _____________________________________________________
3.10 Set Contrast / Backlighting
Access to the Set Contrast / Backlighting display is via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of
the Program Mode Menu. This display provides the method to change the current contrast and
backlighting settings for either the local or remote LCD panel.
Set contrast/backlighting
SELECT display Primary
8/9 adjust contrast level n

ALT+8/ALT+9 adjust backlight level n
Set Contrast / Backlighting Display

Figure 3 - 20
If only the local display is present, it is preselected and indicated. Use the 8 and 9 arrow keys
to adjust the contrast level. A value of 0 is minimum contrast, a value of 15 is maximum
contrast. Use the ALT+8 and ALT+9 keys to adjust the backlight level. A value of 0 is
backlight off, a value of 7 is maximum backlight intensity.
3 - 120 _______________________________________________________ Setup

Section 4
Operation
Man-Machine Interface
Batch Delivery
Additive Injection
Data Logging
Fault Analysis / Correction

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This section contains information on operation of the DanLoad 6000 Preset during batch delivery
and multiple batch delivery transactions. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 is defined by program
codes (PC's). Program codes consist of an identification number, a name, and a value or
selection. Program codes are configured during the setup procedure described in Section 3 -
Setup. Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contains additional information on the function of
all program codes.
A batch is defined as the delivery of one single product or a blend consisting of two to four
components, with or without additives. A single batch delivery may constitute a transaction, that
is no more batches will be delivered to this client at this time. A batch delivery begins when the
user / operator presets a quantity to be delivered and initiates the delivery. A batch delivery can
be suspended and restarted at any time if the following two limitations are met. All the permissive
circuits are closed (no active permissive alarm condition) and the Remaining quantity is greater
than the value set in PC 079 Minimum preset qty. The batch delivery is terminated when the last
pulse from the flow meter is detected and the batch delivery cannot be restarted due to one of the
conditions mentioned above.
A transaction is defined as one or more batch deliveries that are grouped together for accounting
purposes. Transactions are logically the delivery of one or more batches to one client, which
would be the case in multiple batches delivered to multiple compartments in a tanker vehicle. The
DanLoad 6000 allows the operator to define the batch deliveries that comprise a transaction. A
transaction is terminated if any of the following conditions occur.
# Loss of power to the DanLoad 6000.
# The swing arm position is changed from the current active delivery side.
# An end transaction command is received from the terminal automation system.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4-1

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# The STOP/PRINT key is pressed and a delivery operation is not in progress. If a batch
delivery is temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key, and it is desired to
continue the batch delivery, the ENTER and START key press sequence will restart the
batch delivery. If while the batch delivery is suspended, the STOP/PRINT key is
pressed, the transaction is terminated and either the Recipe Selection Display, the Additive
Selection Display, or the Loading Display is presented to the user / operator, depending
on the system configuration. The system configuration was defined by the setup
procedure. At this time, a new batch delivery which will be part of a new transaction can
be defined.
The batch delivery procedure is described in Section 4.2. Batch delivery control parameters are
preset by the user / operator. Parameters are selected as follows.
# A recipe selection: Performed automatically if only one recipe is defined or performed

manually if two or more recipes are defined. The recipe defines the single product or
multi-component blending characteristics of the batch delivery. (Section 6 - PC's 480 to
660).
# An additive selection: Required if additive injection selection method PC 136 Selection

method is set to Prompt and the additive is selected PC [143, 148, 153, 158, 163, 168]
Available.
# Entry of one to five data items: Each data item can be from zero to eight numeric digits,
data items are used by terminal automation systems for batch / transaction accounting
purposes (Section 6 - PC's 030 to 037).
4 - 2 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
All of the batch delivery parameters must be preset before a batch delivery can begin. A
transaction must share all of these parameters for all associated batch deliveries. Therefore, a
transaction is restricted to one or more batch deliveries of a single product or a single blend of
components which have preselected additive injection parameters. A transaction cannot include
multiple recipes, or various additive injection combinations.
4.1 Physical Configuration
The display panel, status indicators, and keypad that are mounted in the operator control panel
provide man-machine interface with the instrument.
Desired functions are controlled via command entries at the keypad in response to displayed data
and prompt messages.
4.1.1 Displays and Controls
Two types of displays are provided, a multi-line alpha-numeric character / graphic LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display) panel and three (red, green, yellow) LED (Light Emitting Diode) status
indicators.
4.1.1.1 LED Status Indicators
The three LED status indicators are visible through the vertical window located to the right of the
LCD display panel. During normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 in the Stand-alone mode or
the Manual mode (not connected to a terminal automation system) the yellow indicator is OFF
and the green indicator is ON if safety circuits are enabled and connected properly.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4-3

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
These indicators provide the following status information.

LED Status Function
AUTO/MANUAL
(yellow) OFF The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual
Mode (PC 025 Operating Mode). (Note: Local operation is identical in
either of these two modes.)
ON The DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Auto Mode (linked to a host

computer and operating as a slave unit) (PC 025 Operating mode).
FLASHING
# (Two short pulses every two seconds) Case internal temperature out
of range, power is removed from the keypad and display panel.
# (One short pulse every two seconds) Case internal temperature has
returned within limits after an out of range state.
# (Rapid flashing) Power failure or low power condition.
PERMISSIVE POWER
(green) ON The permissive power circuit is closed (normal state when a batch delivery
is in progress). The function of the green LED indicator is dependent on
the state of the permissive circuit, located on the power supply module,
and is not programmable.
OFF The permissive power circuit is open when a batch delivery is in progress.
This indicates an abnormal state which is due to permissive power failure
or failure of one or more permissive circuits wired in series (wired AND)
with the permissive power source (the function of the green LED indicator
is dependent on the state of the permissive circuit and is not
programmable)).
(Normal state when batch delivery is not in progress)
4 - 4 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
LED Status Function

ALARM STATUS
(red) ON A primary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on alarm
action).
OFF All alarms are inactive (normal state).
FLASHING A secondary alarm is active (see Section 4.5 for information on

alarm action).
4.1.1.2 LCD Alpha-numeric / Graphic Data Display
The LCD data display has a back-lighting feature for ease of reading in low ambient light
conditions. The intensity of the back-lighting is controlled by the intensity level of ambient light
(PC's 355 to 360).
Data is displayed in up to three basic formats during normal batch delivery setup and delivery
operations. These three display formats are:
# Recipe Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if more than one recipe has been defined.
If only one recipe has been defined, that recipe is selected automatically and the Recipe
Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on recipe selection and an
example of this display are provided below in this section.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4-5

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# Additive Selection Display

This display is presented to the user / operator if one or more additives have been defined
and the additive prompt option, PC 136 Selection method set to Prompt. In the case
where additives have been defined and made available, PC [143, 148, 153, [158, 163,
168] Available set to Yes, injection of all additives is always turned off and each additive
must be manually enabled via operator interaction. If no additives have been defined, the
Additive Selection Display is not presented to the operator. Information on additive
injection selection and enabling and an example of this display are provided below in this
section.
# Loading Display
This display is always presented to the user / operator to provide data feedback during
definition of a batch delivery operation and during delivery of the batch or group of
batches (transaction). Information on batch loading and an example of this display are
provided below in this section.
# Dynamic Data Display

This display can be manually selected to provide the user / operator with additional system
parameters that are useful during system configuration, batch loading, and meter proving.
4 - 6 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.1.1.3 Keypad
The numeric / function keypad provides the method for the user / operator to select recipes and
additives, enter the desired preset quantity, and control batch deliveries. Some key functions are
only applicable to setup of the DanLoad 6000 while in the Program Mode. These special functions
are not used in normal batch delivery operations and therefore are not covered in this section. The
keypad layout is indicated in Figure 4 - 1.
Keypad Layout
Figure 4 - 1
Note: The Weights and Measures switch is the lockable and sealable pushbutton switch located
in the upper left corner of the keypad.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4-7

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
KEY FUNCTION
0 thru 9 numeric digits for data entry

ENTER accept the manually entered value and continue
CLEAR reject the manually entered value and continue
SELECT toggle the Off / On option for each defined
additive
9 scroll down, move the select box to the next
item in the Recipes Selection Display or the
Additive Selection Display
8 scroll up, move the select box to the previous
item in the Recipes Selection Display or the
START initiate the batch loading operation after batch
setup data has been entered
STOP/PRINT stop the batch loading operation and print batch
and / or transaction report, if enabled
PROGRAM access to the Program Mode for modification of
non-restricted program codes and system data
W&M the Weights and Measures security switch
Key Functions (Batch Delivery)
Figure 4 - 2
Key functions applicable to batch delivery operations are listed in Figure 4 - 2. The description
of the batch delivery procedure in Section 4.2 contains in-context information of the function of
the various keys. The PROGRAM key and the Weights and Measures switch are not used
during normal batch deliveries. However, the user / operator should be familiar with the
functions of the PROGRAM key and Weights and Measures switch.
4 - 8 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# PROGRAM key
The PROGRAM key is used, while operating in the Loading Mode and no batch delivery
is in progress, to access the Program Mode. This action is accomplished by pressing the
ALT key and while maintaining the ALT key depressed, simultaneously press the
ENTER / PROGRAM key. The Enter passcode _________ prompt is displayed on the
message line at this time. The response is for the user / operator to enter their predefined
passcode (one to nine digits). If a passcode is not entered within thirty seconds or if an
invalid passcode is entered, the message Invalid passcode is displayed on the message line.
Press the CLEAR key to re-display the normal loading prompt, Enter preset qty. Section
3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions contain information on operation
of the Program Mode.
# Weights and Measures security switch

Several parameters, accessible as program codes in the Program Mode, have direct effect
on the validity and accuracy of the batch quantity calculations. These parameters were
specified during the setup procedure to have Weights and Measures attributes. Parameters
with the Weights and Measures attributes set have three levels of protection to restrict
modification of their values or options settings. A valid user passcode must be entered,
the user must have supervisor privilege, and the Weights and Measures switch must be
open (in the extended position). If the drift pin through the spring loaded switch actuator
is visible, the switch is open. During normal operation, this switch should be closed and
wire sealed in the closed position.
Additional information on the Program Mode and the function of the Weights and Measures
switch is located in Section 3 - Setup and Section 6 - Program Code Definitions.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4-9

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
4.2 Batch Delivery Procedure
This sub-section contains a description of normal operation of the DanLoad 6000 during batch data
entry, batch delivery, and termination of a batch delivery. The description covers operation of
the DanLoad 6000 in either the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode. Operation in both of
these modes is identical from the user / operator viewpoint. Operation of the DanLoad 6000 as
a slave device to a terminal automation system is installation dependent and is not covered in this
manual.
It is assumed at this point that the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle state, that is no batch delivery is
in progress and no transaction is open. If two or more recipes have been setup, the Recipe
Selection Display is displayed at the start of the transaction. If only one recipe has been setup,
the single recipe is assumed to the active recipe and the Recipe Selection Display is not shown.
When a recipe is selected, the availability of each recipe component is checked. The ccc
Available parameter for all recipe components, located in the Component parameters group, PC's
065 to 077, must be set to Yes. In the case of sequential blending, the sum of the selected
component percentages specified by PC ccc Sequence to load parameter of the recipe, PC's 480
to 660, must be 100. In the case of in-line blending, the sum of the percentages of all four
components in the recipe must be 100. An example of the Recipe Selection Display is provided
below. Two lines are reserved for graphics display at the bottom.
Recipes mm/dd/yy hh:mm

Regular Gasoline Kerosene
Premium Gasoline
Diesel
Recipe Selection Display (Typical)

Figure 4 - 3
4 - 10 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
To select the product (recipe) for delivery from the Recipe Selection Display by using the 9 or
8 key to position the select box over the desired product (recipe), then press the ENTER key.
If one or more additives have been setup and PC 136 Selection method is set to Prompt, the
Additive Selection Display is presented to the user / operator. PC ccc Available (additive),
located in the Additive delivery parameters group, PC's 135 to 168, are all set to No at the start
of a transaction so that any required additive must be manually selected by the user / operator.
While operating in the Automatic Mode, additive injection is controlled by the terminal automation
system. While operating in the Stand-alone Mode or the Manual Mode, additive injection is
dependent on the option selected for PC 136 Selection method and related factors described below.
# 136 Selection method = External (default selection) All configured additives are injected
if an external enable contact closure is closed.
# 136 Selection method = Prompt The Additive Selection Display is presented to the
operator for manual selection of each additive before the start of each transaction. (Note:
In AUTO mode, at least one of the additive delivery enable PC's [143, 148, 153, 158,
163, 168] Available, must be set to yes to enable presentation of the Additive Selection
Display.)
# 136 Selection method = Inputs Any configured additive is injected if the corresponding
external enable contact closure (PC ccc Selection input) for that particular additive is
closed.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 11
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The selected recipe is indicated in the top line of the Additive Selection Display. An example of
the Additive Selection Display is illustrated below.
Premium Gasoline mm/dd/yy hh:mm

Additive #1 Off
Additive #2 Off
Additive #3 Off
Use arrow keys and SELECT

Figure 4 - 4
To select the additive from the Additive Selection Display use the 9 or 8 keys to position the select
box over the desired additive, then press the SELECT key to toggle the option from Off to On
(or from On to Off if an entry error is made). Press the ENTER key after all desired (zero to
six) additives have been enabled for injection into the delivered stream.
4 - 12 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The Loading Display is presented to the user / operator at this time. The Loading Display allows
the user / operator to enter the preset quantity to be delivered and to monitor the delivery of the
batch and transaction. An illustration of the Loading Display is provided below.
Loaded 0 Gal 0%
+))),
* *
Preset 0 Recipe * *
Remaining 0 Recipe * *
Enter preset qty .)))-
Loading Display
Figure 4 - 5
The Loading Display, Figure 4 - 5, illustrates several alpha-numeric and numeric fields related
to batch deliveries and a graphic representation of the batch delivery receiving tank. The fields
contained in the Loading Display are described below.
# Loaded field contains the batch quantity of the delivered product. The value in this field
is incremented in quantity units until either the preset quantity is reached or the delivery
is suspended or terminated.
# Preset field contains the batch quantity to deliver which is manually entered by the user /
operator in response to the Enter preset qty prompt shown on the message line of the
display panel.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 13
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# Remaining field contains the batch quantity that has not yet been delivered during a batch
delivery. (Preset quantity minus loaded quantity equals remaining quantity)
# Product units mnemonic field (PC 218) contains up to six characters used to display
alphanumeric characters, script characters, or a mixture of script and alphanumeric
characters on display columns next to the large numbers showing the “Loaded” quantity.
Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a script message prior to the
description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item #1 in Section 6 for more information concerning
language selection and use of scripts.
# Recipe name (First 6 characters of recipe name) field contains the name of the current
recipe manually selected by the operator or automatically selected if only one recipe is
defined.
# Bar graph percentage display is the rectangle displayed on the right side of the display
panel. This display is a bar graph representation of the quantity percentage loaded to the
receiving tank. As the Loaded quantity is incremented and the Remaining quantity is
decremented, the bar graph percentage is proportionately shaded in black. The black
shading represents the Loaded quantity and the unshaded portion represents the Remaining
quantity. The number located at the top of the tank indicates the percentage of the Preset
quantity that has been Loaded. The normal range of this number is 0% to 100%.
However, percentages greater than 100 percent are indicated for a delivery quantity in
excess of 100 percent of the preset quantity.
# Message line is the bottom line of the display panel and is used to display various status
messages to the user / operator. The content and meaning of the messages are explained
below in the Controlling the Batch Delivery section.
4 - 14 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.2.1 Controlling the Batch Delivery
If a data item prompt or prompts were defined during the setup procedure the prompts will be
displayed during batch delivery setup. Data item prompts accept user / operator numeric entries
of up to five 8-digit numeric values that are saved in transaction storage memory or printed in data
log in manual or stand-alone modes. In auto mode, data items are communicated to a terminal
automation system for transaction accounting purposes. Data item entries are not used internally
by the DanLoad 6000. Data item prompts are messages that are presented on the message line of
the display panel when the Loading Display is first shown. These prompt messages are defined
during setup with PC's 030 to 036.
The general format of a data prompt message is:
Enter data item #1 ________
However, note that the message shown above is a default entry which can be changed to a
meaningful prompt message during setup. Actual messages in the desired language that could be
displayed are: Enter order number:, Enter driver number:, Enter trailer number:, etc. The
response is to enter the desired number, from one to eight digits and then press the ENTER key.
If PC 036 Prompt time-out (secs) has been defined, and no entry is made within the time-out time
period, the Recipe Selection Display will be redisplayed to allow restarting the batch delivery
setup procedure. If an error is made during the numeric entry, press the CLEAR key and reenter
the number. If an invalid number is entered and accepted, press the STOP/PRINT key to
terminate and re-start the transaction. If an entry is not required, press the ENTER key to
continue. After all one to five data items have either been entered or bypassed, the Loading
Display as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset qty prompt is presented to the user /
operator.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 15
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
If data item entries have not been defined in the setup procedure, the Loading Display is presented
as shown in Figure 4 - 5, with the Enter preset qty prompt displayed.
The quantity to deliver is entered with the numeric keypad. If an entry error is made, press the
CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entry is correct, press the ENTER key to
accept the entry and continue. If the selected recipe component percentages and components
specified by PC ccc Sequence to load program code do not equal 100 percent, the message Invalid
recipe (percentages) is displayed on the message line at this time. This setup error condition can
be corrected by selecting the Program Mode > Setup Menu > Recipes program codes and
revising either the percentages of the individual components specified by the loading sequence and
/ or the loading sequence program code. If the entered value is less than the value of PC 079
Minimum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - less than minimum is displayed on the message
line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to reset the entry and start again. If the entered
value is greater that the value of PC 078 Maximum preset qty, the message Invalid entry - more
than maximum is displayed on the message line of the display panel. Press the CLEAR key to
reset the entry and start again.
If the manual entry passes the high and low preset quantity validation checks, the Preset and
Remaining field values are set to the entered value, the Delivered value is set to zero, and the
message Press START when ready or STOP to cancel is displayed on the message line of the
display panel. If the STOP/PRINT key is pressed at this time, the batch delivery that is setup
is aborted. The message Please wait is displayed on the message line of the display panel and then
the Recipe Selection Display is re-displayed to allow reentry of a new batch delivery definition.
Any open transaction is also terminated by this action.
4 - 16 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The green LED ON indicates that the environment is safe for the loading operation. If all
permissive circuits are not in the safe state, the corresponding alarm message (Connect safety
circuit, etc.) is displayed.
The following message sequence is displayed on the message line of the display panel during a
normal batch delivery operation.
# Open block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)
(manual sequential blender).
# Opening block valve

The block valve for the component is being opened.
# Line pack delay

The pump for the component is running and the loading line is being packed.
# Ramping up to high flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are opening in stages to increase the flow rate to the
maximum predefined flow rate.
# Load in progress
The batch delivery is in progress in a normal manner.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 17
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# Ramping down to low flow rate

The flow control valve or valves are closing in stages to decrease the flow rate to the
predefined low flow rate.
# Shutting valve
All open flow control valves are closed. Block valves are closed if the unit is not a manual
sequential blender.
# Close block valve - press ENTER

This message and operator entry is only required if the selected unit type is Seq.(manual)
(manual sequential blender).
The following tasks are performed during the batch delivery operation.
# The display panel shows the preset quantity, the delivered quantity (incrementing), the
transaction quantity (incrementing), and the remaining quantity (decrementing). These
accumulators indicate either gross or standard quantities dependent on the setup
parameters.
# Up to four delivery flow rates can be defined for each flow meter / flow control valve
combination. The DanLoad 6000 always attempts to deliver the product at the maximum
defined flow rate except during low flow startup and shutdown times. The rate of flow is
controlled automatically without interaction with the user / operator. If the highest defined
flow rate cannot be maintained for some reason, the DanLoad 6000 will set the flow rate
at the next highest maintainable flow rate, which is selected in the setup, and periodically
attempt to increase the flow rate to the maximum defined flow rate.
4 - 18 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Up to six additives can be injected into the delivered batch. The ratio of the quantity of
each additive to the delivered batch quantity is automatically controlled.
# All permissive inputs are monitored continuously for abnormal conditions. An open
permissive circuit will cause the green LED indicator to turn OFF, indicating no
permissive power, cause an alarm message to appear on the message line of the display
panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending on the defined control parameters.
# All process variables are monitored continuously and compared to limit setpoints.
Abnormal process conditions will cause an alarm and the corresponding message to appear
on the message line of the display panel and may suspend the batch delivery, depending
on the defined control parameters.
# Real-time process input data and calculated process data, such as real-time flow rates,
average temperatures, etc., can be monitored by the Dynamic Data Display window which
is displayed in the center area of the Loading Display. The SELECT key is pressed to
activate the Dynamic Data Display window if PC 679 Enable dynamic data display is set
to “yes”. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to change display pages (one to four display
pages, with four data items in each display page - for a total of up to sixteen different
items, can be predefined). The CLEAR key removes the Dynamic Data Display window
and re-displays the standard Loading Display.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 19
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# The batch delivery can be temporarily suspended by pressing the STOP/PRINT key. The
batch delivery can be restarted if the quantity remaining to deliver is greater than the
minimum preset quantity and all permissive circuits are closed, indicating that the system
is safe and ready for batch delivery.
# If a power failure occurs during a batch delivery operation, the DanLoad 6000 continues
to supply power to the flow meter preamplifier and accumulate pulse inputs from the flow
meter for approximately one hour after the external power input is removed. The date and
time of the power failure are saved in non-volatile memory and are indicated in a message
on the first display presented when power is restored to the instrument.
# Normal termination of a batch delivery is achieved automatically by setting the flow

control valve to the low flow value and then fully closing the flow control valve when the
preset batch quantity has been delivered. The flow control algorithm calculates the average
quantity delivered from final closure of the flow control valve to cessation of flow based
on the flow meter / flow control valve / product combination. (Note: The final shutdown
quantity is dependent on the line pressure. Therefore, when multiple loading arms share
the same pump or pumps, the final shutdown quantity can vary, dependent on the loading
configuration of the associated equipment at the time of shutdown.)
4 - 20 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# When the DanLoad 6000 is in the idle / ready state, the Loading Display is presented to
the user / operator with the prompt Enter preset qty. The previously delivered quantity is
indicated in the Loaded field and the Remaining field indicates 0. The Loading Display
remains in this state until the user / operator initiates a new batch delivery (part of the
open transaction) by entering the quantity to be delivered. Or the open transaction is
closed by pressing the STOP/PRINT key without a batch delivery in progress.
Each delivered batch quantity total will be combined in the transaction delivered total until
the STOP/PRINT key is pressed when a delivery is not in progress.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 21
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
4.3 Additive Injection
Additives can be automatically injected into the delivered product or component blend. The
additive volume in relation to the delivered product volume is usually very small, typically less
than four percent of the delivered quantity. The basic features of the additive injection operations
are listed below.
# Control the injection of one to six additives (or no additive). Additive injection is quantity
based and determined by the configured ratio, PC [140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165]
Ratio qty, of the preset batch quantity and the quantity of additive injected, which is
controlled by PC [139, 144, 149, 154, 159, 164] Additive control meters. The
quantity of additive to inject is reset at the start of each batch delivery operation.
Therefore, additive injection is based on batch quantity and not transaction quantity.
However, the same additive or additives selection applies to all batches that are part of a
transaction.
# Allow additives to be selected from the terminal automation system and / or a discrete
selection input for each additive and manual selection with the keypad while viewing the
Additive Selection Display.
# (Option) Accumulate and / or verify the quantity totals of the injected additives.
# (Option) Deliver a clean line quantity, without additive injection, at the end of each
loading operation. Additive injection ratio is maintained correctly with or without clean
line loading implemented.
# (Option) Inhibit additive injection for part of a batch load.
4 - 22 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# The DanLoad 6000 can be configured to provide either an AC or DC control output to

self-controlled or automatic additive injection systems that require a one-to-one drive
signal. In addition, either an AC or DC status input (default Safety circuit #4) can detect
an alarm condition from the additive injector.
4.3.1 Additive Injection Control
The following three groups of parameters control the method of additive injection and the
associated discrete input / output signals.
# 135 to 168 Additive delivery parameters

(methods for delivery and quantities to deliver)
# 380 to 397 Additive I/O parameters

(control outputs and selection / verification inputs)
# 800 to 831 Additive pumps/block valves

(control outputs for additive pumps and block valves)
Six independent control / status circuits can be setup. Injection of each additive is controlled by
any combination of the gross and / or standard accumulated quantities for from one to four flow
meters. If an additive is selected, the ratio output for the selected additive is switched ON and
OFF at a rate which is proportional to the batch delivered quantity through each specified flow
meter.
The quantity of each additive injected can be accumulated if desired. These quantities can be
viewed in the Dynamic Data Display and transmitted to a terminal automation system for
accounting purposes.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 23
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Additive Injection Typical Configurations
Example 1
Configuration
Program Description Value

Code
025 Unit type Sequential
139 Additive 1 control meters G
140 Additive 1 ratio qty 40.0
138 Clean line qty 0
Test Results
Preset Additive Ratio computed by Additive

Quantity DanLoad 6000 injections
400 40.00 10
4 - 24 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
E xam ple 2
Configuration

Code
Test Results

400 (400 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 38.00 10
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 25
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Example 3
Configuration
ProgramCode Description Value
Test Results

400 (400 - 10) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 39.00 10
4 - 26 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 4
Configuration

Code
Test Results

400 (400 - 10 - 20) ÷ (400 ÷ 40) = 37.00 10
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 27
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Example 5
Configuration

Code
025 Unit type In line
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00
067 Component 1 meter number 1

139 Additive 1 control meters GX
138 Clean line qty (additive) 0
714 Clean line qty (component) 0
Test Results
Preset Meter 1 Meter 2 Additive Ratio computed by Additive

Quantity Gross Gross DanLoad 6000 injections
400 240 160 40.00 6
4 - 28 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 6
Configuration

Code
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00

Test Results

400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 29
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Example 7
Configuration

Code
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00

Test Results

400 240 160 (240 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 35.00 6
4 - 30 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 8
Configuration

Code
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00

Test Results

400 240 160 (240 - 60 - 30) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 25.00 6
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 31
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Example 9
Configuration

Code
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00

Test Results

400 240 160 (240 - 60) ÷ (240 ÷ 40) = 30.00 6
4 - 32 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 10
Configuration

Code
524 Component 1 % 60.00

525 Component 2 % 40.00

139 Additive 1 control meters GG
Test Results

400 240 160 (400 - 60 - 30) ÷ (400 - 40) = 31.00 10
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 33
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
4.4 Data Logging
This sub-section contains information on the data logging and reporting capabilities of a DanLoad
6000 equipped with an optional DUART board. The data logging feature allows the DanLoad
6000 to generate an audit trail for documentation of operation of the loading system. The function
provides a cost effective manual backup documentation system for use if the terminal automation
system fails.
The program codes listed below, are used to enable or disable automatic logging of the
corresponding data.
Program Code Log Function

696 Batch summary
697 Transaction summary
698 Alarm log
699 Power fail log
700 Program mode entry/exit
701 W&M switch opened/closed
702 Program value change log
703 Meter proving run log
704 Crash memory summary
Data logging usually involves sending the enabled reports / data to a common 80-column dot
matrix printer. However, data logs can be sent to a personal computer or any other data logging
device that can handle serial input ASCII data.
4 - 34 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Data is sent from the DanLoad 6000 to the printer or logging device as each event occurs. This
method of operation is called event logging. Logs are not stored in the Danload 6000. However,
if the DanLoad 6000 detects that the printer or logging device is off-line, logs are held in memory
until either the printer / logging device becomes on-line, then the stored logs are printed or the
log memory is full. The action taken if the data logging memory becomes full is specified by PC
235 Data logging alarm action.
Several DanLoad 6000's can share one data printer or logging device. Printer sharing requires
a special device that accepts the serial data link from each DanLoad 6000 and provides one serial
data link to the printer.
The text language of the data logs is specified by PC 028 Language.
4.4.1 Example Data Logs
An example of each type of data log associated with normal batch deliveries and transactions is
provided below. The Meter proving run log is described in Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving and
the Crash memory summary log is described in Section 4.5 - Fault Analysis / Correction. A brief
description of the contents of each field follows the data log example.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 35
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Batch Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Batch Summary

Transaction nnnn Side n Recipe #1 aaaaaa
Enter data item #1 nnnnnnnn
Batch nnnn Preset nnnn Gross nnnn Std nnnn

Started mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss Stopped mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
Gross Std Temp Dens Pres
Gal Gal Deg C lb/ft3 psi
Component #1 nnnnnn nnnnnn nnn.n nnnn.n nnnn.n
A batch summary is generated automatically at the end of each batch delivery or when power is
restored after a power outage occurred during a batch delivery. The fields contained in the Batch
Summary are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings on the optional
DUART board.
# Transaction A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each
transaction.
# Side The loading island side where the delivery was made.
# Recipe ## The name of the recipe that controlled the delivery.
# <Enter data item #1>
Up the five lines of data prompts and corresponding manually entered
numeric data. The number of lines printed is dependent on the number of
data prompts defined by PC 030 Number of data item prompts. Data item
prompts are re-defined by the alpha-numeric entries for parameters 031 to
035 (03x Enter data item #x). The corresponding values, printed to the
right of the prompt messages, are the manual entries from the start of the
batch delivery.
4 - 36 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Batch A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each

batch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity
delivered and the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).
# Preset The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.
# Gross The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Std The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Started Date and time the delivery started.
# Stopped Date and time the delivery stopped.
# Component #
One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following data
indicated:
# Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units
label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.
# Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering
units label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.
# Average temperature of this component (negative values are
indicated), the engineering units label is obtained from PC 427
Temperature units.
# Average density of this component, the engineering units label is
obtained from PC 428 Density units.
# Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label is
obtained from PC 429 Pressure units.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 37
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Transaction Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Transaction Summary

Transaction nnnn Side n Recipe ## aaaaaa Gross nnnnnn Std nnnnnn
Start End Start End

gross gross std std
Meter 1 totalizer nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnn



Additional batch transaction records for this transaction, as required.
A transaction summary is generated automatically at the end of each transaction consisting one or
4 - 38 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
multiple batch deliveries or when power is restored after a power outage occurred while a
transaction is in progress. The fields contained in the Transaction Summary are described below.
# Start gross / End gross

Start std / End std
The gross and standard quantities are indicated for each active flow meter
(Meter m totalizer).
# Batch A sequential numeric value, generated internally for identification of each
batch delivery, this row (record) also contains the gross quantity
delivered and the standard quantity delivered (sum of all components).
# Preset The preset quantity obtained from the batch data entry.
# Gross The accumulated gross quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Std The accumulated standard quantity for the composite batch delivery.
# Started Date and time the delivery started.
# Stopped Date and time the delivery stopped.
# Component #
One row (record) for each delivered component, with the following data
indicated:
# Gross quantity delivered of this component, the engineering units
label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.
# Standard quantity delivered of this component, the engineering
units label is obtained from PC 029 Product units.
# Average temperature of this component (negative values are
indicated), the engineering units label is obtained from PC 427
Temperature units.
# Average density of this component, the engineering units label is
obtained from PC 428 Density units.
# Average pressure of this component, the engineering units label is
obtained from PC 429 Pressure units.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 39
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Alarm
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Alarm aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
An alarm log is generated automatically when an alarm condition is detected for alarms which
have the alarm action attribute set to Primary or Secondary. The fields contained in the Alarm
log are described below.
# Unit The unit address obtained from the DIP switch settings o the optional
DUART board.
# <time> Date and time that the alarm condition was detected.
# <message> Alarm message, messages are indicated in Section 4.5.
Power Failure Date and Time
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Power failed mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss
A power failure log is generated automatically when power is restored to the DanLoad 6000. The
fields contained in the Power failure log are described below.
DUART board.
# <time> The current date and time and the date and time that power was removed
from the DanLoad 6000.
4 - 40 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Program Mode Entry and Exit
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa entered program mode

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa exited program mode
A program mode entry/exit log is generated automatically whenever the program mode is entered
or exited. The fields contained in the Program mode entry/exit log are described below.
DUART board.
# <time> Date and time of the event.
# User The user / operator name obtained from PC ccc User ID parameter entry.
Weights and Measures Switch
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch opened

Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Weights and measures switch closed
A weights and measures switch log is generated automatically whenever the state of the weights
and measures switch, located on the operator control panel, is changed. The fields contained in
the Weights and measures switch log are described below.
DUART board.
# <message> The message Weights and measures switch opened or
Weights and measures switch closed.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 41
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Program Code Value Changed
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy hh:mm:ss -- Program Code Value Changed

User aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa Value 480 Number of recipes 5
A program code value changed log is generated automatically whenever a program code value is
changed for a program code which has the Data logging attribute set to Yes. (Note: This attribute
defaults to Yes for all program codes during initial startup (cold start). The fields contained in
the Program code value changed log are described below.
DUART board.
# User The user / operator name obtained from PC ccc User ID parameter entry.
# Value The program code number and name followed by the current program code
value.
4 - 42 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.5 Alarms / Fault Analysis / Correction / Diagnostic Tests
This sub-section contains information on the analysis and correction of common fault conditions
that can occur during batch delivery operations.
# Alarm messages and causes of the alarm messages are described in Section 4.5.1.
Additional information on alarm parameters and other parameters in located in Section 6
- Program Code Definitions.
# Diagnostic tests, available in the Program Mode, are described in Section 4.5.2.
# A Crash memory log is automatically generated, if enabled, if a processor memory error

is detected. Section 4.5.3 contains information on this error log.
Crash memory logs should be saved and the log occurrence reported to:
Daniel Industries, Inc.
Electronics Products Customer Service
Telephone: (281) 897-2900
FAX: (281) 897-2901
(Phone / FAX are answered 24-hours)
General information on all alarm conditions and messages is provided on the following pages.
Additional information on alarms is provided in the Alarms group, program codes 219 to 268,
and the I/O Parameters group, PC's 280 to 360, in Section 6.
Note that PC 219 Safety circuit message defines the default safety circuit alarm message that will
be displayed on a safety circuit fault. The cold-start program code value is Specific, displaying
a detail message for the operator, eg. “Ground detector open”. The other option is General,
which displays a more generic message, eg. “Safety circuit 1 failure”. The alarm messages for
safety circuits 1 through 8 are user configurable in the selected script “Language”.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 43
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
4.5.1 Alarm Messages
Flow rate too low meter # Default Range
221 Low flow alarm action Primary Off

Info
Primary
222 Minimum flow rate 100 0 to 99999
223 Low flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1,

2, 3, 4).
# The flow rate units for PC 222 Minimum flow rate are
determined by the corresponding PC [171, 182, 193, 204]
Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM, dLPM,
BPH, LBH, KGH).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the component

pumping circuit, flow control valve circuit, flow meter
preamplifier, or flow meter sensor.
4 - 44 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.5.1 Alarm Messages (continued)
Flow rate too high meter # Default Range
224 High flow alarm action Primary Off

Info
Primary
225 Maximum flow rate 2000 0 to 99999
226 High flow time (secs) 10 5 to 999
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual flow meter number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# The flow rate units are determined by the corresponding PC [171,

182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor for the flow meter (GPM, LPM,
dLPM, BPH).
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the component pumping

circuit, flow control valve circuit, or flow meter circuit.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 45
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Unable to close valve meter # Default Range
--- Overrun limit alarm action Primary <none>

227 Overrun limit qty 2.0 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# The alarm action is internally set to Primary.
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.

PC ccc Low flow stop qty too small, unstable flow rate during low flow
stop, K-factor to small (insufficient pulse rate input for frequency
calculation), flow control valve jammed OPEN by debris or mechanical
failure.
# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to

deliver a minimum of three batches in order to determine the valve
closure time.
Valve closed early meter # Default Range
228 Underflow alarm action Off Off

Primary
229 Underflow limit qty 5.0 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow control valve circuit.
4 - 46 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Timed-out - no flow detected meter # Default Range
230 No flow time-out alarm action Primary Off

Info
Primary
231 No flow time-out (secs) 5 1 to 99
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the flow meter circuit (bad

preamplifier or pulse input wiring), pump circuit, the component block
valve circuit, or the flow control valve circuit, failure of meter pulse
board or main processor board.
Unauthorized flow exceeds limit meter # Default Range
--- Unauthorized flow limit alarm action Primary <none>

232 Unauthorized flow limit qty 10 0.0 to 99.9
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by problems in the block valve or flow control valve circuit,
such as a mechanical failure (bad O-rings, etc.) of the valve or pulsation of the
product caused by multiple arms, valves, pumps in the same circuit in use at the
same time.
# After valve is repaired or adjusted, the DanLoad 6000 will need to deliver a minimum
of three batches in order to determine the valve closure time.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 47
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Pulse security error meter # Default Range
--- Pulse security alarm action Primary <none>

233 Error limit (pulses) 0 0 to 255
234 Reset count (pulses) 10000 0 to 65535
Notes:
# The pulse security per IP 252 level B is implemented by an electronic

module installed on the meter pulse input board. (Reference British
standard IP 252 or API standard MPMS Chapter 5, Section 5.)
# This alarm is triggered by pulse comparison errors between two pulse train
inputs from a single flow meter. Causes of errors are A / B input pulse
trains reversed, preamplifier failure, wiring failure.
# PC 233 Error limit (pulses) must be set to 0 (zero) to disable this function.
.
4 - 48 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Data logging memory full Default Range
235 Data logging alarm action Info Info

Primary
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered when the data logging memory becomes full.
This condition is usually caused by the data logging printer being off-line,
out of paper, or otherwise not available. The data logging function is
enabled or disabled by the Data logging parameters.
Comm failure channel x Default Range
236 Comm fail alarm action Primary Info

Primary
237 Comm fail time-out (secs) 10 1 to 300
Notes:
# In the alarm message, x is the RS-232 / RS-485 channel identifier (A or

B).
# This alarm is triggered if a message is not received from the terminal

automation system within the elapsed time entry in PC 237 Comm fail
time-out (secs) parameter. Errors caused by failure of terminal
automation system, error in DUART address assignment or port
protocol configuration (PC's 661 to 672).
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 49
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Temperature failure meter # Default Range
238 Temperature failure alarm action Primary Info

Primary
239 Minimum temperature -40.0 -99.9 to
999.9
240 Maximum temperature 110.0 -99.9 to
999.9
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the RTD temperature input assigned

to the indicated flow meter. Temperature inputs are assigned by PC's 318,
321, 324, 327. Some causes of this alarm are: temperature of product out-
of-range (can be caused by faulty product heater or product remaining in
heater too long a time), failure of RTD or failure of wiring to RTD/
# Fixed temperature values used in case of failure of the live temperature

inputs are set by PC's 434, 437, 440, 443. These fixed temperature
values are assigned to components, however, the DanLoad 6000 relates
the current component flow to the current flow meter. The alarm meter #
indicates a specific RTD input.
4 - 50 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Density failure component # Default Range
241 Density fail alarm action Primary Info

Primary
242 Minimum density/gravity
243 Maximum density/gravity
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual component number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the density input assigned to the

indicated component.
Pressure failure meter # Default Range
--- Pressure failure alarm action Primary <none>

244 Minimum pressure 0.0 0.0 to
9999.9
245 Maximum pressure 0.00 0.0 to
9999.9
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the pressure input assigned to the

indicated flow meter.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 51
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Additive # failure Default Range
--- Additive error alarm action Primary <none>

246 Additive error limit 3 1 to 99
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual additive number (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the additive injector mechanism.

Additive injection can be monitored by the assigning the corresponding PC
[381, 384, 387, 390, 393, 396] Feedback input to physical discrete
inputs.
Unable to maintain blend Default Range
--- Blend tolerance alarm action Primary <none>

247 Overall blend tolerance % 2 1 to 5
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered by the DanLoad 6000 sensing that the ratio of the
delivered components does not match the current active recipe. This
problem is caused by errors in the pumping circuits, flow control valve
circuits, or block valve circuits.
4 - 52 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Unable to close block valve # Default Range
--- Block valve close fail alarm action Primary <none>

248 Block valve delay (secs) 10 0 to 99
Notes:
# In the alarm message, # is the actual component block number (1, 2, 3, 4).
# This alarm is triggered by a failure in the corresponding block valve control circuit.
The position of the block valve is sensed by PC [401, 403, 405, 407] ccc Block
value input, corresponding to one of four component block valves. Component
block valves are controlled by PC's 400, 402, 404, and 406.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 53
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Ground detector open Default Range
249 Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary Secondary

Primary
250 #1 Ground detector open 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# If the language selection is changed, then changes in the “safety circuit

messages” (PC 250, 252, 254, 256, 258, 260, 262, 264) should also be
considered.
# General permissive input, message specified by PC 250 # 1 Ground

detector open can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input

assigned to PC 345 Safety circuit 1.
Overspill detector open Default Range

Primary
252 #2 Overspill detector open 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by PC 252 #2 Overspill

detector open can be modified.

4 - 54 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Permissive power failure Default Range

Primary
254 #3 Permissive power failure 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by PC 254 #3 Permissive

power failure can be modified.

Additive injection failure Default Range

Primary
256 #4 Additive injection failure 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# General permissive input, message specified by PC 256 #4 Additive injection failure

can be modified.
# This alarm is triggered by an open circuit sensed on the discrete input assigned to PC
348 Safety circuit 4.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 55
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Arm down side 1 Default Range

Primary
258 #5 Arm down side 1 7 1 to 34
message characters
265 Circuit 5 type 1 0 to 2
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 258 #5 Arm

down side 1 can be modified.

assigned to PC 349 Safety circuit 5. The side detect function is controlled
by PC 265 Circuit 5 type which senses the swing arm side based on the
option selection of PC 312 Side detect method.
# The permissive input can be set to be side independent or to be dependent

on either side.
4 - 56 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Arm down side 2 Default Range

Primary
260 #6 Arm down side 2 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 260 #6 Arm

down side 2 can be modified.


on either side.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 57
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Walkway down side 1 Default Range

Primary
262 #7 Walkway down side 1 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 262 #7

Walkway down side 1 can be modified.


on either side.
4 - 58 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Walkway down side 2 Default Range

Primary
264 #8 Walkway down side 2 7 1 to 34
message characters
Notes:
# Side assignable permissive input, message specified by PC 264 #8

Walkway down side 2 can be modified.


on either side.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 59
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Primary internal temperature out of range

Secondary internal temperature out of range Default Range
--- Internal temperature alarm action Primary <none>
Notes:
# This alarm is triggered if the internal temperature of the DanLoad 6000 is less than
or greater than the allowable limits for operation of the LCD display panel. Power
is removed from the display panel and the yellow LCD indictor flashes to alert the
operator. Operating temperature limits are 0 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees
Celsius. The DanLoad 6000 can be operated to minimum temperatures of -40
degrees Celsius if an internal heater is installed to maintain the internal temperature
at 0 degrees Celsius or greater.
# This alarm is indicated in the following manner by the yellow LED located on the
front panel.
# (two short pulses every two seconds) the internal case temperature is
currently out of range, power is removed from the keypad and the display
# (one short pulse every two seconds) the internal case temperature was out of
range but has returned within limits, the alarm has not been acknowledged
yet
# Problems caused by low ambient temperatures may be corrected with the addition
of an internal space heater. Problems caused by high ambient temperatures may be
corrected by installation of a sunshade over the DanLoad 6000. See Section 2 -
Installation for additional information.
4 - 60 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.5.2 Diagnostic Tests
RAM (random access memory) diagnostics are run continuously while power is applied to the
DanLoad 6000. The RAM diagnostic and several other diagnostics are described in this section.
Several of the diagnostic tests are designed for maintenance troubleshooting and have limited use
for operations personnel. However, the operations personnel should be aware of the reaction of
the instrument to some types of failures. These failure indications are described in this sub-
section.
A group of diagnostic tests are accessible for manual execution via the Diagnostics selection in the
Program Mode Menu. Access to the Program Mode Menu is described in Section 4.1.1.3. When
the Diagnostics selection is activated, the Diagnostics Menu shown below in displayed.
Diagnostics Menu Pg 1 of 2
Firmware Versions
RAM tests
Keypad
Display
Inputs/Outputs
DUART
More 9
Diagnostics Menu Pg 2 of 2
Crash analysis
Show memory
Show transaction memory
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
More 8
Diagnostic Menu
Figure 4 - 6
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 61
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The following selections in the Diagnostics Menu are available.
# Firmware Versions
The firmware versions of the program for the two CPU's and the message EPROM is
displayed. The power failure message indicating the date and time of the last power failure
is also displayed.
# RAM tests
The passed / failed results of the continuously running RAM tests is displayed. If a RAM
test fails at any time, all discrete outputs are OPENED, causing all flow control valves
and block valves to close and all pumps to stop running. The cause of the failure must be
corrected before the DanLoad 6000 can be used. (Note: The contents of RAM are not
modified by the diagnostic tests.)
# Keypad
A prompt message Press key to test ... is displayed. The name of any key pressed is
displayed beside the prompt message. Multiple keys can be pressed until the EXIT
(ALT+CLEAR) key is pressed to re-display the Diagnostics Menu.
# Display
The display backlighting level is stepped at one second intervals through the indicated
numeric level range of 0 to 7. The display contrast level is stepped at one second intervals
through the indicated numeric level range of 0 to 15. The local display panel and if
connected, the remote display panel are checked. Both the backlighting and the contrast
levels are restored to their current settings on exit from the display. (Note: Contrast and
backlighting can be manually adjusted via the Set contrast/backlighting selection of the
Program Mode Menu.)
4 - 62 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Inputs/Outputs
The Input/Outputs diagnostic display indicated below is shown. This display is used to
view the current live values of the selected input or output point.
Inputs/Outputs
Meter input __ #pulses = nnnnn
RTD input __ A/D value = hhhh
4-20 mA input __ A/D value = hhhh
Discrete input __ state = n
Discrete output __ state = n
Inputs / Outputs Diagnostic

Figure 4 - 7
The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used to move the flashing underline cursor to the desired line.
The 0 to 9 numeric keys are used to enter any valid input or output number up to the
maximum number for that type of input or output. Press the ENTER key to continue.
The value of the selected input is displayed. The flashing cursor remains on the same line
and other inputs of the same type may be viewed. The input value corresponds to the
selected input point. The state of a control output can be changed by entering the control
output number, pressing the ENTER key, and then when the flashing cursor is positioned
at the state field, press either the 0 key (to turn the output OFF, or the 1 key to turn the
output ON, as applicable. The output may be repeatedly toggled at this time with the 0
key and the 1 key or may be left in the desired state by pressing the ENTER key with the
desired state displayed. (Note: #pulses is an accumulated pulse count, A/D value is a 4-
digit hexadecimal number, state is 0 or 1 as described above.)
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 63
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# DUART
Serial ports COM1 and COM2 are tested under program control by running the two
channels in local loopback mode. The address (0 to 255), selected by the DIP switch on
the module is displayed. A nnn% errors result of the test for each channel is displayed.
(Note: Channel A = COM1, Channel B = COM2.)
DUART 001
Ch. A Ch. B
Local loopbback 256/256 256/256
External loopback 203/256 52/256
baud rates PPPPPPPF FFFFFFFF
data formats PFP PPF
interupts PPP P--
DUART Ports Diagnostic

Figure 4 - 8
# Crash analysis
The RAM crash analysis in the same format as the Crash memory summary log, Section
4.5.3, is displayed. See the description of the Crash memory summary log for details.
# Show memory
Data memory for either CPU is displayed in 1 kbyte blocks. The display shows the
memory address with data in both hexadecimal and ASCII formats.
# Show transaction memory

Data memory for transactions is displayed. The display shows the memory address with
data in both hexadecimal and ASCII formats.
4 - 64 ____________________________________________________ Operation
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
4.5.3 Crash Memory Log
A Crash memory summary log indicates an unrecoverable error detected by the control program.
This feature is a general purpose detector / logger for critical hardware and software error
conditions. The main processor board or the RAM integrated circuit should be replaced to correct
the problem. The Crash memory summary log should be saved for use in main processor
troubleshooting.
If PC 704 Crash memory summary is set On and the data printer is available, a Crash memory
summary log is printed by the logging printer. The example below indicates the format of the log.
Crash Memory Summary
Unit nnn mm/dd/yy

hh:mm:ss -- Crash Memory Summary
CPU #
Stk ptr/prog ctr 47n3/2085
Int mask/int mask 1 004c/0063
WSR/task 0000/0002
Error code/task adr 0000/e742
The fields contained in the Crash memory summary log are described below.
# CPU # The # is either 1 (indicating CPU 1 problem) or 2 (indicating CPU 2

problem).
# Unit The unit address obtained from PC 661 DUART address, range is 0 to
255.
# < time> Date and time of the event.
# Stk ptr/prog ctr

The hexadecimal values of the stack pointer and the program counter.
Operation ___________________________________________________ 4 - 65
DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# Int mask/int mask 1

The hexadecimal values of the interrupt mask and the interrupt mask 1.
# WSR/task The Window Select Register / multi-task task number.
# Error code/task adr

The hexadecimal identifier of the critical error code / the address of the
active task.
4 - 66 ____________________________________________________ Operation
Section 5
Flow Meter Proving
General
Tank Prover Method
Master Meter Method

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This section contains information on flow meter proving using methods specified in API standards
and English measurement units. The general information applies to other standards and
measurement units as well. Meter proving is the procedure for determining a meter factor for a
rack flow meter. Calibration is the procedure for determining a volume of the meter prover and
is not covered in this manual.
Details are provided on manual meter proving by the prover tank method and the master meter
method. The pipe prover method is usually used for proofs of large capacity flow meters in
pipeline or tanker ship loading service and is not covered in this manual. Meter proving
determines the accuracy of the flow measurement and therefore the accuracy of quantity and cash
accounting for delivered products. It is strongly recommended that you read this section, all
local, regional, and country standards, and all company standards applicable to your installation
and meter proving, before proving a rack meter or a master meter.
Typical forms used during the meter proving procedure are provided at the end of this section.
These forms can be copied or used as a guide for development of forms for your organization.
Note
The flow meter proving procedures described in this section and the typical meter proof forms
(Figure 5 -2, Figure 5 -3) are primarily provided to describe the DanLoad 6000 program codes
that affect meter proving and flow measurement accuracy. The method of meter proving and
the typical form may require changes before use in your organization. Consult the flow
measurement accounting department of your organization before conducting flow meter proofs.
Flow Meter Proving ___________________________________________ 5-1

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
A prover tank is a field standard measure which is designed and calibrated by a laboratory that
can provide calibration traceability to the Weights and Measures Office of the National Bureau of
Standards. The calibrated prover tank can be used in either or both of the following meter proof
methods.
# Used periodically to prove individual rack meters.

# Used periodically to prove a master meter. Then the master meter is used to prove the
individual rack meters.
The primary American Petroleum Institute standards applicable to meter proving are:
Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards (MPMS)

# Chapter 4 - Proving Systems
# Chapter 12 - Calculation of Petroleum Quantities
# Section 2 - Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities
Measured by Turbine or Displacement Meters
(contains Tables A-1 and A-2 - Correction Factors for Steel)
# Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors
Table 6 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Against API Gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Table 24 - Reduction of Volume to 60 degrees Fahrenheit
Against Specific Gravity 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit
These standards supersede API Standards 1101, 2531, 2533, and 2534 and are widely used in
the USA and several other countries. The volume reduction tables 6 and 24 are also designated:
ASTM D 1250, API Standard 2540, and IP 200.
5 - 2 ___________________________________________ Flow Meter Proving

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Every flow meter is a unique device. The manufacturer fabricates each flow meter so that it meets
design specifications. However, differences within normal fabrication tolerances produce
apparently identical flow meters that generate slightly different pulses per volume unit (K-factor).
The nominal K-factor [average number of pulses per each volume unit (such as a gallon) that
are generated by a flow meter] is stamped on the flow meter nameplate. For example, by design
the Daniel 4-inch LR turbine meter should produce 23.0 pulses per each gallon measured. After
manufacture, each LR turbine meter is proved with water flow at the factory. This initial meter
proof of the new flow meter may produce an actual K-factor for that flow meter of 23.403 pulses
per gallon measured. This initial meter proving is normally the only time that the flow meter K-
factor is determined by a meter proof. After a meter has been installed on-site, additional meter
proofs may be used to determine meter factors. Over the lifetime of a meter, its meter factor may
change due to variations in flow rates, viscosities, wear, and other causes. However, the K-
factor will always remain the same. The DanLoad 6000 uses a mathematical combination of the
K-factor and the meter factor to adjust the volume accumulation totalizers to match the actual
volume that has flowed through the meter.
In addition to the type of flow meter and installation design, the product being measured,
temperature of the product being measured, the flow rate, and, to a lesser extent, the pressure
of the product being measured may also affect the accuracy of the flow measurement. (Note: The
pressure effect on the volume of low vapor pressure hydrocarbon liquids, such as gasoline,
diesel, kerosine, and fuel oil is usually negligible when these liquids are handled at low pressures
(less than 100 PSIG) and is ignored in many tanker vehicle loading installations.)
Flow meters can be proved as often as desired. Many organizations have regulations governing
the frequency of meter proofs. These regulations are often based on date, volume of flow through
the meter, and / or number of loading operations use the meter. If your organization does not
have such regulations, each meter should be proved periodically and the proof results compared
with previous proof results to determine if more frequent or less frequent proofs are required.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The terminology used in this section is defined below and is based on the definitions in the API
standards.
Term Definition
Gross volume The indicated volume times the meter factor derived from a meter proving
of the flow meter at a specific flow rate. This is a volume measurement.
This volume is displayable as Dynamic Data Element - Mtr m grs load in
the DanLoad 6000 and is used to determine the volume measured by the
rack meter during meter proving.
Calculation: gross volume = indicated volume times meter factor
Gross standard volume

The gross volume corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is
a quantity measurement.
Calculation: Gross standard volume = gross volume times CTLM
(correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid
in the meter) times CPLM (correction factor for the effect of
pressure on the liquid in the meter)
Indicated volume (also called meter registration) The change in the flow meter reading that
Occurs during a product flow measurement operation. This is a volume
measurement.
Calculation: indicated volume = end reading minus start reading
K-factor The pulses per volume unit, such as gallon, generated by a pulse output
(System factor) type flow meter. The K-factor is also called the system factor. The
nominal value is determined by flow meter design and factory water flow
calibration and is indicated on the flow meter nameplate. The K-factor is
a physical characteristic of the flow meter and is a fixed number.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Term Definition
Master meter A master meter is a turbine meter or positive displacement meter that has
been proved previously with a tank prover. The master meter is
temporarily connected in series with a rack meter to be proved so that all
flow passes through both meters. A volume of liquid is passed through
both meters and the volume measured by the master meter is considered to
be 'correct'. The difference between the volume measured by each meter
determines the meter factor for the rack meter. The API standard
recommends that a minimum volume of 10,000 volume unit increments are
accumulated during a meter proof and that the minimum duration of a meter
proof run be five minutes.
The DanLoad 6000 can display delivered quantities in hundredths of

volume units, such as vvv.vv gallons. A proof run of 100.00 volume units
may be sufficient to satisfy the 10,000 volume unit requirement. Meter
proof deliveries of 1500 to 2000 whole volume units are more common.
Meter factor A number used internally by the DanLoad 6000 in flow calculations to
correct the indicated volume (final flow meter registration minus initial
flow meter registration) to the observed gross volume (actual flow meter
throughput at operating conditions). The meter factor value is near 1.0000
and rounded to four decimal places.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Term Definition
Pipe prover A pipe prover is a calibrated pipe section that contains a sphere made of an
elastomer material and a sphere detector switch located at each end of the
calibrated pipe section. The pipe prover has two basic configurations, bi-
directional or uni-directional. As the names imply, the sphere can pass in
either direction or only one direction, respectively. The sphere detector
switches are used to start and stop an external prover counter which can be
connected to a high resolution pulse output from the DanLoad 6000. A
meter proof is performed by directing all flow through a flow meter in
series with the pipe prover calibrated pipe section and accumulating the raw
pulses generated by the flow meter while the prover sphere moves from the
start pulse count gate switch and the stop pulse count gate switch. Since the
precise volume of the calibrated section of the pipe prover is known, the
flow meter pulse output corresponds to that precise volume, and each
volume unit can be calculated.
Quantity (Example: gross standard volume)

The resulting amount of product measured after compensation for
operational temperature and pressure, usually indicated in one of the
following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Term Definition
Tank prover A tank prover is a fixed or portable graduated tank that is calibrated to
contain a precise known volume of liquid. The tank bottom and sides are
reinforced so that the weight of the liquid in the tank does not distort the
tank. The graduated sight gauge(s) permit determination of the exact
volume of liquid in the tank. The minimum capacity of the tank must be
equal to the volume that passes through the flow meter in one minute. The
recommended capacity of the tank is 1-1/2 to 2 times the volume that passes
through the flow meter in one minute. For example, if the maximum
operational flow rate of a flow meter is 600 GPM, the minimum prover
tank capacity is 600 gallons, and the recommended prover tank capacity
between 900 and 1200 gallons.
Volume (Example: indicated volume; gross volume)

The actual space occupied by the product measured, usually indicated in
one of the following units: gallons, barrels, liters, cubic meters.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
5.1 General Considerations
Program codes that affect the flow measurement accuracy of the DanLoad 6000 may be restricted
from modification by the Weights & Measures attributes of those program codes. If these program
codes are set to ON, the value of the program codes can only be changed when the Weights &
Measures switch is set OPEN. Therefore, before a flow meter can be proved, the front panel
Weights & Measures switch must be set OPEN (extended position).
A DanLoad 6000 can deliver up to four components and each component can be delivered at up
to four different flow rates. The lowest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'low
flow rate'. The highest defined flow rate for a component is the component's 'high flow rate'
which is also called the 'normal flow rate'. Any other defined flow rates for a component are
called 'fall back flow rates' or 'intermediate flow rates'. Each of the component / flow rate
combinations has a unique meter factor for a total of sixteen possible meter factors. Installations
with less than four flow meters and less than four flow rates will have fewer meter factors.
The meter factors for each component must be determined and entered in the order shown below.
Component p meter factor 1 Lowest defined flow rate.

Component p meter factor 2 Next higher flow rate if more than one flow rate is defined.
Component p meter factor 3 Next higher flow rate if more than two flow rates are defined.
Component p meter factor 4 Highest flow rate if four flow rates are defined.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The component number p is 1 to 4. The reason for this order is to prevent any inaccuracies at any
lower flow rate from affecting the accuracy of the meter factor for a higher flow rate. Because
meter proving is by delivered batch, startup and shutdown quantities delivered at low flow start
rate and low flow stop rate, are included in the total proof batch. Therefore, any volume
measurement errors occurring during low flow rate times will be compensated in the total proving
batch.
In some organizations it is acceptable to use only a low flow and high flow meter factor even when
one or two fall back flow rates are defined. In these cases, the rack meter is proved at the low
and high flow rate and the meter factor for the high flow rate is also entered as the meter factor
for one or two fall back flow rates.
During meter proving, various parameter values may need to be changed. All associated
parameters are not located in the same Setup Menu sub-group. To access a parameter when the
Setup Menu is active, enter the 3-digit program code. The selected parameter is then displayed.
Verify or change the value of the parameter as desired. Then press the EXIT (ALT + CLEAR)
key to re-display the Setup Menu and select the next parameter or continue.
Each meter proving run can only determine one meter factor for one component (flow meter) /
flow rate combination. Each component defined by the DanLoad 6000 configuration is associated
with a meter number by PC's [067, 070, 073, 076] Meter. Each of these meter numbers is
associated with a physical input to the DanLoad 6000 by PC's [052, 055, 058, 061] Meter
pulse board input. For example: Component number 1 may be associated with meter number 3
and meter 3 associated with meter pulse board input number 2.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Recipes should be setup to define each single component for use in controlling the block valves
of a multi-component blending system during meter proving.
Example:
Select an undefined recipe number higher than the last defined operational recipe and set that
recipe to deliver 100 percent of component 1, set the next recipe to delivery 100 percent of
component 2. Setup from one to four recipes (one for each component) that permit selection and
proof delivery of each component without any blending. The setup could appear as follows.
Example meter proof recipes for a blender system:

Recipe 10:
535 Prove Gasoline
536 Component 1 % = 100
537 Component 2 % = 0
540 Sequence to load 1XXX
Recipe 11:
541 Prove Diesel
543 Component 2 % = 100
546 Sequence to load 2XXX
(Continue to define a third recipe for component 3 and a forth recipe for component 4 meter
proofs if required.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The gross loaded volume, with the current meter factor applied, that the DanLoad 6000
measures during the delivery operation must be displayable after a meter proof is completed. The
following data element codes are available for this purpose.
Data Code Default Program Code Description

103 Mtr 1 grs load 689 Dynamic Data Display - Element 10 (default)
104 Mtr 2 grs load ____ ______________________________
105 Mtr 3 grs load ____ ______________________________
106 Mtr 4 grs load ____ ______________________________
The table above indicates that only Mtr 1 grs load is displayable if the DanLoad 6000 is in the
default configuration. If two or more components are defined, the flow meter assignment for
each component must be determined. Once the flow meter / component relationship is
determined, the Mtr m grs load parameter must be made displayable as a Dynamic Data Display
element. This task is accomplished as follows.
Perform the following steps to activate display of the dynamic data codes required for meter proof
monitoring.
# Enter Setup Mode, select the program codes listed above for each defined component and
record the flow meter assignment.
# Decide which of the sixteen default dynamic data codes are not of interest for display at
your installation. Record the current program code assignment of these data display
locations (PC's 680 to 695).
# Select PC's from 680 to 688 or 690 to 695 (do not change PC 689 Dynamic data element
10 (Mtr 1 grs load) which is used to monitor the component delivery through flow meter
number 1).
# Enter the Dynamic Data Codes 104 Mtr 2 grs load, 105 Mtr 3 grs load, and 106 Mtr 4
grs load as required for each defined flow meter / component combination. Only program
codes for defined flow meter / component combinations are displayable.
Flow Meter Proving ___________________________________________ 5 - 11

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
# The Dynamic Data Display can now display the Mtr m grs load parameter for each defined
flow meter / component combination. The value of the active Mtr m grs load parameter
is obtained and entered in the meter proof form during a meter proof.
Note: See Section 6 for a complete list of Dynamic Data Codes and see Appendix B for the
sixteen default assignments (PC's 680 through 695).
Meter Factor Calculation
The method described below for calculating a new meter factor for a DanLoad 6000 generally
follows the published API method with the following modifications.
# The API standard uses the flow meter registration which is the indicated volume without
the current meter factor applied. The DanLoad 6000 parameter Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx
is the gross volume with the current meter factor for the active component / flow rate
combination applied. The meter proof calculations described in this section provide an
adjustment number which is multiplied by the current meter factor to determine the value
of the new meter factor. (Note: The meter factor calculation must be performed properly
or large errors in flow measurement accounting can occur.)
# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of pressure on the on the liquid (factor
CPLx) which is rarely used at a load rack installation. To ignore CPLx, enter 1.0000 in the
equation. (Note: The handling of CPLx must be determined by local regulations and the
policy of your organization and clients.)

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# The API standard uses compensation for the effect of temperature on the liquid (factor
CTLx) and compensation for the effect of pressure on the liquid (factor CPLx) for both the
master meter and the rack meter. Many organizations consider that the master meter and
the rack meter are operating at identical process conditions during meter proving batch
deliveries. Therefore, CTLx and CPLx are ignored and entered as 1.0000 in the equations
for both the master meter and the rack meter. (Note: The handling of CTLx and CPLx must
be determined by local regulations and the policy of your organization and clients.)
The relation between the API volume designations and prover tank, master meter, and rack meter
quantities are indicated in the following table.
A PI V olum e Prover Tank M aster M eter R ack M eter
indicated volum e equal to: equal to: equal to:

indicated volum e indicated volum e indicated volum e
w hich is equal to: w hich is equal to: w hich is equal to:
gross volum e registered volum e registered volum e
gross volum e equal to: indicated volum e x m eter indicated volum e x

gross volum e factor m eter factor
w hich is equal to: w hich is obtained from :
indicated volum e (M tr m grs load xxxx.xx)
gross volum e at standard gross volum e x C T S P x C T L P gross volum e x C T L P gross volum e x C T L M

tem perature
gross standard volum e gross volum e x C T S P x C T L P gross volum e at standard gross volum e at standard
temperature x C P L P tem perature x C P L M
Prover / Meter Volume Relationship

Figure 5 - 1

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The table Prover / Meter Volume Relationship, Figure 5 - 1, shows relation of meter quantities
to the prover tank for information only. Note the following points.
# The prover tank is a fixed volume tank in which the volume is measured at the nominal
atmospheric pressure. Therefore, the following factors, which do not apply to the prover
tank, are ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000.
# meter factor
# CPSP (Effect of pressure on the steel of the vessel.)
# CPLP (Effect of pressure on the volume of the liquid.)
This means that the volume delivered to the prover tank can be considered to be indicated
volume which is also equal to gross volume because a meter factor is not required to adjust
the prover tank volume. Only temperature correction factors can be applied to the liquid
volume delivered to the prover tank.
# The pressure correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow meter
(CPLx) is usually ignored and considered to be equal to 1.0000 for rack operations.
# The Dynamic Data Display element Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx in the DanLoad 6000 is an
accumulator for gross volume with a resolution of hundreds of a volume unit, such as
gallons.
The meter proof methods described using a rack meter connected to a DanLoad 6000 use values
obtained from the Mtr m grs load xxxx.xx accumulator. The basic calculation sequence, without
temperature correction factors, is described below.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Meter proving calculation 1:

Calculate the volume error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the
rack meter measured volume.
rack meter volume error = corrected delivery volume - rack meter

corrected
gross volume
where:
rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover
and the rack meter corrected gross volume.
corrected delivery volume # prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of
temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the
prover tank.
# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,
corrected by the master meter meter-factor, the effect of
temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the
effect of pressure on the liquid measured.
rack meter corrected gross volume

The volume obtained from the Dynamic Data Display element Mtr
m grs load, corrected for the effect of temperature on the liquid
measured and optionally the effect of pressure on the liquid
measured.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

Calculate the percentage error between the prover volume (prover tank or master meter) and the
rack meter measured volume.
rack meter volume error

rack meter percent error = ---------------------------------
where:
rack meter percent error The percentage of error in the corrected volume delivery.
rack meter volume error The difference in the volume delivered to or measured by the prover
and the rack meter corrected gross volume (obtained from
calculation 1).

measured.
If this calculation produces a percentage error that is within the tolerances of the regulating
organizations and your organization, the current meter factor is considered to be acceptable and
no further action is required. The exact value must be determined by the governing regulations.
Example: A typical calculation might produce a result of 0.01 which is equal to one percent
error.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Calculate the adjustment to be applied to the current meter factor, if it has been determined that
the percentage of error (calculation 2) is not acceptable.
prover corrected gross volume

adjustment = ---------------------------------
where:
adjustment A mathematical factor that is multiplied by the current rack meter
factor to obtain the new meter factor, this number represents the
error in the current meter factor (THIS NUMBER IS NOT THE
NEW METER FACTOR).
prover corrected gross volume

# prover tank: The volume, corrected for the effect of
temperature on the tank steel and the liquid, delivered to the
prover tank.
# master meter: The volume measured by the master meter,
corrected by the master meter factor, the effect of
temperature on the liquid measured, and optionally the
effect of pressure on the liquid measured.

measured. (Note: This volume is the gross volume with the current
meter factor applied. The use of the gross volume in the calculation
is the reason that the new meter factor cannot be calculated by this
step.)

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

Calculate the new meter factor which will be manually entered in PC ccc Comp p meter factor f
corresponding to the active PC ccc Comp p flow rate r.
new meter factor = adjustment x rack meter current meter-factor
where:
new meter factor The calculated meter factor that must be manually entered for PC
ccc Comp p meter factor f to correct the measurement error in
future flow measurement.
adjustment The mathematical adjustment factor obtained from calculation 3

above.
rack meter current meter-factor

The current meter factor for the rack meter, obtained from PC ccc
Comp p meter factor f before the meter proof sequence is started.
Three examples of meter factor calculations are provided below. The calculations show the
relation between the measured quantities and the meter factor adjustments required. To simplify
the examples, the temperature and pressure corrections are disregarded.
Assume that the volume accumulated Mtr m grs load is 1000.00 gallons and that the rack meter
current active meter factor is 1.0123 for the component / flow rate combination. Then the
indicated volume is equal to 987.85 gallons.
Equation:
1000.00
987.85 = -------------
1.0123

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 1: Correct delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:

Parameter Value
corrected delivery volume 1000.00 gallons
Mtr m grs load 1000.00 gallons
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 0 gallons

(1000.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0 percent

(0 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT 1
(1000.00 / 1000.00)
RACK METER CURRENT METER-FACTOR 1.0123
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0123 (no change)

(1 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter exactly equals the
volume delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered
corrected gross volume is exactly equal to the rack meter corrected gross volume, the
current_meter_factor is correct. The new_meter_factor value is exactly equal to the
current_meter_factor value. Therefore, the current meter factor, 1.0123, should not be
changed.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Example 2: One percent over delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter Value
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR 10 gallons

(1010.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR 0.01 (1 percent over delivery)

(10 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT 1.01
(1010.00 / 1000.00)
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0224

(1.01 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is less than the volume
delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered corrected
gross volume is greater than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the current_meter_factor is
less than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0224) should be manually entered
for the value of the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Example 3: One percent under delivery - assume after completion of a meter proof run:
Parameter Value
RACK METER VOLUME ERROR -10 gallons

(990.00 - 1000.00)
RACK METER PERCENT ERROR -0.01 (1 percent under delivery)

(-10 / 1000.00)
ADJUSTMENT 0.99
(990.00 / 1000.00)
NEW METER FACTOR 1.0022

(0.99 x 1.0123)
In the example above, the accumulated Mtr m grs load for the rack meter is greater than the
volume delivered to the prover tank or measured through the master meter. Since the delivered
corrected gross volume is less than the rack meter corrected gross volume, the
current_meter_factor is greater than it should be. Therefore, the new_meter_factor (1.0022)
should be manually entered for the value of the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
5.1.1 Initial Setup
The examples above do not include temperature compensation calculations. However, during
actual meter proving, these calculations must be performed. Before starting meter proving,
obtain a copy of Table A-1 - Temperature Correction Factors for Mild Steel or Table A-2 -
Temperature Correction Factors for Stainless Steel from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 -
Instructions for Calculating Liquid Petroleum Quantities Measured by Turbine or Displacement
Meters for use in calculating CTSP. And obtain a copy of Table 6A, 6B, 6C, 24A, 24B, or 24C
from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Volume Correction Factors for use in calculating CTLP and CTLM.
Perform the following preliminary steps:
# OPEN the Weights & Measures switch (release to extended position)

# Enter Program Mode (press PROGRAM (ALT + ENTER) key)
# Enter Passcode in response to prompt message
# Enter Setup Mode (with box cursor on Setup selection, press ENTER key)
# Access and change program codes as described below (refer to the tables located at the
end of this section for program code information)
# If the DanLoad 6000 is a multi-component blender, specify a meter proof recipe as
described above to select the desired component for proof. If the DanLoad 6000 delivers
only one component, recipe number 1, which specifies a one component to one flow
meter relationship, is selected automatically.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# 169 Number of factors/component

Set to 1 to force continuous low flow rate for first meter proof (see additional information
below).
# 170 Meter factor method

Set to fixed so that meter factor interpolation based on flow rate is disabled.
# [171, 182, 193, 204] Nominal K-factor

Obtain actual meter K-factor from flow meter nameplate and round to nearest tenth, enter
result (example: nameplate K-factor is 23.403, enter 23.4).
# [172, 183, 194, 205] Master meter factor

Divide PC ccc Nominal K-factor by actual K-factor from nameplate and round to four
decimal places. [Example: 23.4 divided by 23.403 = 0.9999, enter result (0.9999)].
(Note: The ccc Master meter factor is used to establish a plus / minus two percent limit
for entries in the four PC's ccc Comp p flow rate r of the related component, this
parameter is not used in volume calculations.)
# If an existing preset system that uses an effective K-factor for each flow rate is replaced by
a DanLoad 6000, the DanLoad 6000 requires a nominal K-factor and meter factor for each
flow rate. Set PC [171, 182, 193, 294] Nominal K-factor as indicated above, enter PC
ccc Comp p meter factor f as PC ccc Nominal K-factor divided by the effective K-factor for
the flow rate and rounded to four decimal places.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components:
# [174, 185, 196, 207] Comp p flow rate 1

This parameter should be set to the desired low flow start / low flow stop flow rate that
will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p. The first flow meter proof
will always be at this flow rate.
# [175, 186, 197, 208] Comp p meter factor 1

This parameter is the actual meter factor that is used to calibrate the flow meter registration
when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding PC ccc Comp p flow rate 1. This
number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the current meter
factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
The following two parameter group entries are required for all defined components in a two
stage (low flow / normal flow) loading system:
# [176, 187, 198, 209] Comp p flow rate 2

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or first fall back flow rate that
will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.

when the flow is at the flow rate set in the corresponding ccc Comp p flow rate 2
parameter. This number should have been recorded in an operational installation as the
current meter factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new
installation or the rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of
PC [172, 183, 194, 205] Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The following four parameter group entries are required for all defined components only in
loading systems that define three or four flow rates for loading:
# [178, 189, 200, 211] Comp p flow rate 3

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow or second fall back flow rate
that will be used in actual loading of the indicated component p.

factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor. If this is a new installation or the
rack meter has never been proved in this installation, enter the value of PC [172, 183,
194, 205] Master meter factor corresponding to the component number.
# [180, 191, 202, 213] Comp p flow rate 4

This parameter should be set to the desired maximum flow rate that will be used in actual
loading of the indicated component p.

factor. Do not change an existing current meter factor.
# As mentioned above, the meter factor for PC ccc Comp p factor 1 will always be
determined first. To assure continued flow at PC ccc Comp p flow rate 1 rate, set PC
169 Number of factors/component to 1.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
5.2 Tank Prover Method
Rack meters, or a master meter, are proved with a tank prover by loading a batch of one product
at one flow rate to the prover tank. The frequency of meter proofs of rack meters must be
determined by company policy or regional regulations. Rack meters should be proved on each
product and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the rack
meters provide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The
corresponding meter factor is then entered into the DanLoad 6000 and is automatically active when
the related product / flow rate combination is active.
A meter proof is performed by the tank prover method in the following manner.
# A meter proof wetting run should be performed first to wet the prover tank and help
stabilize the temperature in the rack meter / prover tank circuit. The wetting run is a proof
run without recording data.
# A liquid batch that will fill the tank prover to a liquid level visible in the graduated section
is defined and delivered to a prover tank.
# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error
between the prover tank volume (corrected for temperature) and the and the flow meter
registration (corrected for temperature).
# The volume and percentage error are calculated. If necessary, a new meter factor is
calculated.
# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the
DanLoad 6000 for the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of the
following PC's: 175, 177, 179, 181, 186, 188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203,
208, 210, 212, or 214 dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter
factor number f (1 to 4).
# The prover tank can be drained and the steps listed above are repeated and the results
averaged, if desired.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
5.2.1 Tank Prover Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each
component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal
(high) flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four
component - four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component
(flow meter) at each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving
is not important.
# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch to the
prover tank.
# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the
PC's 480 to 660).
# Set PC 169 Number of factors/component, to 1 to assure that only the flow rate is used.
# Verify or set the low flow rate with PC 174.
# Exit the Setup Menu
# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the volume of the prover tank.
# Initiate the batch delivery to the prover tank.
# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys
to display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated
volume units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a
volume unit.
# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in
a copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN
1 column.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
At this point the new meter factor, PC 175 Comp 1 meter factor 1, is within tolerance and
accepted. The next higher flow rate, PC 176 Comp 1 flow rate 2, is used to determine the meter
factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow rate that is used
as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set 176 Comp 1 flow rate
2 to 400.
During the meter proof at the low flow rate, the low flow rate was forced active by setting PC
169 Number of factors/component to 1 so that the DanLoad 6000 activates the low flow rate only.
Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next higher flow
rate.
The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for
component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down
the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined
by the value of PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop quantities are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is
approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program
codes that in any way affect the flow rates, quantities, or meter factors at lower flow rates must
be set to their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates.
After the rack meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the
program codes that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is
necessary to re-Prove a rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all
lower flow rates in flow rate ascending order.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
accepted. The next higher flow rate, PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 is used to determine the meter
factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal) loading
flow rate for component 1. Set PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3 to 600.
component 1 flow rate 2.
5.2.4 Tank Prover RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be
conducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.2.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (as
required) have been determined and entered into PC 175, PC 177, PC 179, and PC 181 (as
required). In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be
disabled and component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined
recipe for proving component 2 (recipe definitions are in the program code group 480 to 660).
The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now
be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD, Figure
5 - 2, are described below.
Field Description
Station Name of station or terminal.
Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.
Meter Tag Process tag number of flow meter.
Meter S/N Serial number of flow meter.
Meter Mfg Manufacturer of flow meter.
Meter Model Model number of flow meter.
Meter Size Diameter of flow meter.
Product Product (component) used for meter proof.
API Gravity @ 60 oF The API gravity of the product.
From Tank No. Source tank identification.
To Prover Tank No. Destination tank identification (prover tank identification).
Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
Prover Tank Volume Data

1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the PC ccc Comp p flow rate r
corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be
verified by accurately timing the period of delivery to the prover
tank then dividing the volume delivered by the time to deliver.
Example: 2010.36 gallons delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals
564.7 gallons per minute.
2 Delivery to Prover Tank The gross volume delivered to the prover tank, obtained from
prover tank data and neck sight gauge graduation reading.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Field Description
3 Tank Temp (Avg) oF The average temperature of the product in the prover tank, API
recommends average of temperature at top, middle, and bottom.
4 CTSP Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the prover tank
steel, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 12 - Section 2 - Table A-1
or Table A-2.
5 CTLP Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the
prover tank, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24.
6 CCFP Combined correction factor for the prover tank, obtained by
multiplying CTSP times CTLP.
7 Corrected Delivery Volume
The volume, corrected for temperature effects, of liquid in the
prover tank, obtained by multiplying Delivery to Tank (line 2)
times CCFP (line 6).
Load Rack Meter Data

8 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter
proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs
load, Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as
applicable. (Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with
the current active meter factor applied.)
9 Mtr m grs load (Initial) The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run
is started, equal to 0 at start of delivery.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Field Description
10 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume
The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run,
obtained by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load
(Initial).
11 Rack Meter Temperature
The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream
side of the flow meter (usually upstream).
12 CTLM Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the
flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24. (Note: CTLM is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the
flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to
the DanLoad 6000.)
13 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream
14 CPLM Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the flow
meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API
MPMS for additional information.
15 CCFM Combined correction factor for the flow meter, obtained from
multiplying CTLM times CPLM.
16 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume
The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume
accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained
by multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCFM.
17 Rack Meter Volume Error
The difference between the corrected delivery volume to the prover
tank and the rack meter corrected gross volume.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Field Description
18 Rack Meter Percent Error
The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume
19 Adjustment a calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter
factor.
20 Current Meter Factor The current active meter factor obtained from PC ccc Comp p meter
factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate combination
being proved. (Obtained from: PC 175, 177, 179, 181, 186,
188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203, 208, 210, 212, or 214.)
21 New Meter Factor The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run,
obtained by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the
meter proof runs, form should be altered as required by your
company.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
5.3 Master Meter Method
A master meter is a flow meter that is used as a reference standard for volume measurement
comparison with rack meters. The volume measured by the master meter is determined by
proving the master meter with a tank prover. The frequency of meter proofs of the master meter
must be determined by company policy or regional regulations. As a minimum, the master meter
should be proved twice a year. If the master meter is proved in mid spring and mid fall, the
measurement accuracy of the master meter will be approximately adjusted for seasonal temperature
changes that affect the temperature of the products handled. The master meter must be proved on
each product and at the normal delivery flow rate for each product. The set of proofs of the
master meter provide a list of meter factors related to each product / flow rate combination. The
corresponding meter factor is then used in the calculation when proving a rack meter with the
same product / flow rate combination.
A meter proof is performed by the master meter method in the following manner.
# Set the loading system valves to the proper positions so that all flow through the rack meter
to be proved is routed in series with the master meter. Assure that no leakage or bypass
paths are present at either flow meter or interconnecting pipe.
# Connect an electronic prover counter to the raw pulse output of the master meter.
# A meter proof stabilizing run should be performed first to help stabilize the temperature
in the proof meter / master meter circuit. The stabilizing run is a proof run without data
recorded.
# A liquid batch that satisfies the minimum proof batch requirements stated in the definition
of Master Meter Proof at the beginning of this section is defined and delivered to a tank.
# Proof data is gathered and manual calculations are performed to determine the error
between the master meter volume [corrected for temperature (and optionally pressure)]
and the and the proof flow meter registration [corrected for temperature (and optionally
pressure)].

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# A new meter factor is calculated by dividing the volume measured through the master
meter by the volume registered by the proof flow meter. The measured through the master
meter and the volume registered by the proof flow meter are compensated for the effect
of temperature on the liquid, and optionally compensated for the effect of pressure on the
liquid. If compensation calculation is performed for either the master meter or the proof
flow meter, a similar compensation calculation must be performed for the other flow
meter.
# Under delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)
during the proof run is greater than the volume measured by the master meter, the
meter factor value will be decreased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
# Over delivery: If the flow meter registered delivery volume (Mtr m grs load)
during the proof run is less than the volume measured by the master meter, the
meter factor value will be increased to correct the flow meter measurement error.
# The new meter factor, which should always be near 1.0000, is manually entered into the
DanLoad 6000 for the active PC ccc Comp p meter factor f, where ccc is one of the
following PC's: [175, 177, 179, 181, 186, 188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203,
208, 210, 212, or 214] dependent on the component number p (1 to 4) and the meter
factor number f (1 to 4).
# The prover counter is manually reset to zero and the steps listed above are repeated until
the corrected meter registration is within 0.02 percent of the corrected prover volume.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
5.3.1 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 1
For this example, assume that the loading system is a two component blender and that each
component is loaded at one of three flow rates [low flow start / stop, fall back, and normal
(high) flow]. Any other configuration, from a one component - one flow rate system to a four
component - four flow rate system is proved in a similar manner by proving each component
(flow meter) at each flow rate, in flow rate ascending order. The component order of proving
is not important.
# Make the system mechanically and electrically ready for delivery of a liquid batch through
the master meter by connecting the master meter in series with the rack meter by high
integrity block valves. All flow must pass through both the master meter and the rack
meter no bypass leakage is allowed.
# Connect the master meter to a flow totalizer capable of measuring and displaying indicated
volume units (without internal meter factor or temperature / pressure compensation) to
a resolution of one one-hundredth of a volume unit (such as gallons).
# Select the previously defined recipe for proving component 1 (recipe definitions are in the
PC 480 to 660).
# Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 1 to assure that one the low flow rate is used.
# Verify or set the low flow rate with PC 174.
# Exit the Setup Menu
# At the Loading Display, enter the preset volume as the minimum proving volume
required.
# Initiate the batch delivery.
# Monitor the volume delivered in the dynamic data display. Press SELECT - 9 - 9 keys
to display item 10 (Mtr 1 grs load n.nn). This volume is the gross uncompensated
volume units delivered, adjusted by the current active meter factor, to hundredths of a
volume unit.
# After the delivery is terminated, determine the new meter factor by entering the data in
a copy of the METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD form RUN
1 column.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 2 is 400 GPM, an fall back flow rate that is used
as a fall-back flow rate if the maximum flow rate cannot be maintained. Set PC 176 Comp 1 flow
rate 2 to 400.
Set PC 169 Number of factors/component to 2 at this time to enable flow at the next higher flow
rate. The meter proof for component 1 flow rate 2 is performed similar to the meter proof for
component 1 flow rate 1 except that the DanLoad 6000 is permitted to ramp up and ramp down
the flow rate with the flow control valve. The flow rate during start and stop times is determined
by the value of PC 174 Comp 1 flow rate 1.
Example:
If the flow rate is 200 GPM and the start / stop quantities are 50 gallons, the time at low flow is
approximately 15 seconds during startup and 15 seconds during shutdown. All of the program
codes that in any way affect the flow rates, quantities, or meter factors at lower flow rates must
be set to their normal operational values before conducting meter proofs at higher flow rates.
After the rack meter is proved at the highest flow rate for a component. The values of any of the
program codes that affect meter proofs for that component should not be changed. If it is
necessary to re-Prove a rack meter at a flow rate less than the highest flow rate, re-Prove at all
lower flow rates in flow rate ascending order.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
factor for that flow rate. Assume that flow rate 3 is 600 GPM, the maximum (normal) loading
flow rate for component 1. Set PC 178 Comp 1 flow rate 3, to 600.
component 1 flow rate 2.
5.3.4 Master Meter Meter-Proof RUN 4 (if Required)
If the fourth flow rate for component 1 were defined, the meter proof at this flow rate would be
conducted in a similar manner as described above.
5.3.5 Meter Proofs for Component 2
Assume at this point that the meter factors for component 1 at flow rates 1, 2 , 3, and 4 (as
required) have been determined and entered into PC 175, 177, 179, and 181 (as required).
In order to perform the meter proof or proofs for component 2, component 1 must be disabled
and component 2 enabled. This is accomplished by selecting the previously defined recipe for
proving component 2 (recipe definitions are in PC 480 to 660).
The set of from one to four meter proofs, corresponding to flow rates, for component 2 can now
be conducted. Follow the steps described above for meter proof sequences.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The fields contained in the METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD,
Figure 5 - 3, are described below.
Field Description
Station Name of station or terminal.
Date / Time Date and time of meter proof.
Product Product (component) used for meter proof.
API Gravity @ 60 oF The API gravity of the product.
From Tank No. Source tank identification.
To Tank No. Destination tank / vehicle identification.
Initial Totalizer Reading Non-resetable totalizer reading before meter proof.
Master Meter Volume Data

1 Flow rate The flow rate that is set in the PC ccc Comp p flow rate r
corresponding to the meter proof run. Actual flow rate can be
verified by accurately timing the period of delivery then dividing the
volume delivered by the time to deliver. Example: 2010.36 gallons
delivered in 3 minutes 56 seconds equals 564.7 gallons per minute.
2 Master Meter Final Reading
The indicated volume at the end of a rack meter proving run,
obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Field Description
3 Master Meter Initial Reading
The indicated volume at the start of a rack meter proving run,
obtained from a totalizer connected to the master meter.
4 Master Meter Indicated Volume

The indicated volume measured by the master meter during the
meter proving run. Master Meter Final Reading minus Master
Meter Initial Reading.
5 Master Meter Temperature, degrees F

The temperature of the product in the master meter during the meter
proving run, used to derive CTLP.
6 CTLP Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the
master meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24.
7 Master Meter Pressure, PSIG

The pressure of the product in the master meter during the meter
proving run, used to derive CPLP.
8 CPLP Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the
master meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.2.
9 Master Meter Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor for the master meter obtained from
a tank prover meter proving of the master meter. The current
master meter factor should for the same product and flow rate that
is used in proving the rack meter. A table is provided at the end of
this section for recording master meter factors.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Field Description
10 CCFP Combined correction factor for the master meter, obtained by
multiplying CTLP times CPLP times the master meter meter-factor.
11 Master Meter Corrected Gross Volume
The volume, corrected for temperature effect (and optionally
pressure effect), of liquid in measured by the master meter,
obtained by multiplying Master Meter Indicated Volume (line 4
times CCFP (line 10).
Rack meter Data

12 Mtr m grs load (Final) The accumulated gross volume units at the end of the rack meter
proof run, obtained from the Dynamic data display - Mtr 1 grs
load, Mtr 2 grs load, Mtr 3 grs load, or Mtr 4 grs load as
applicable. (Note: This value is uncompensated gross volume with
the current active meter factor applied.)
13 Mtr m grs load (Initial)
The meter registration for gross volume before the meter proof run
is started. Equal to 0 at start of delivery.
14 Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume

The gross volume accumulated during the meter proof run,
obtained by subtracting Mtr m grs load (Final) from Mtr m grs load
(Initial).
15 Rack Meter Temperature

The temperature of the product close to the upstream or downstream

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
Field Description
16 CTLM Correction factor for the effect of temperature on the liquid in the
flow meter, obtained from API MPMS Chapter 11.1 - Table 6 or
Table 24. (Note: CTLM is set to 1.0000 if the pulse input from the
flow meter is temperature compensated in the field, before input to
the DanLoad 6000.)
17 Rack Meter Pressure The pressure of the product close to the upstream or downstream
18 CPLM Correction factor for the effect of pressure on the liquid in the rack
meter, usually set to 1.000 and not considered, refer to the API
MPMS for additional information.
19 CCF M Combined correction factor for the rack meter, obtained from
multiplying CTLM times CPLM.
20 Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume

The temperature (and optionally, pressure) compensated volume
accumulated by the rack meter during the meter proving, obtained
by multiplying Rack Meter Measured Gross Volume times CCFM.
21 Rack Meter Volume Error
The difference between the Master Meter Corrected Volume and the
Rack Meter Corrected Gross Volume.
22 Rack Meter Percent Error

The percent of error in the rack meter accumulated volume.

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Field Description
23 Adjustment A calculated number that is used to adjust the current active meter
factor.
24 Rack Meter Current Meter-Factor

The current active meter factor obtained from PC ccc Comp p meter
factor f corresponding to the component / flow rate combination
being proved. (Obtained from: PC 175, 177, 179, 181, 186,
188, 190, 192, 197, 199, 201, 203, 208, 210, 212, or 214)
25 New Rack Meter Factor

The new_meter_factor is derived from the meter proof run,
obtained by multiplying the current meter factor by the adjustment.
Test personnel block Lines to document the personnel conducting and witnessing the
meter proof runs, form should be altered as required by your
company.

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
PC’s 169 to 214 are used to calibrate the DanLoad 6000 for each flow meter, component, flow
rate combination.
D efault O ptions / D efault V alue to U se D uring

C ode Param eter A ttribute V alues V alue M eter Proof
M ETER FA C TO R S
169 N um ber of factors/com ponent W&M 1 to 4 2 tem porarily set to 1
170 M eter factor m ethod W&M Fixed Fixed

Linear
C O M PO N EN T 1 FA C TO R S
171 N om inal K -factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 23.0 round m eter nam eplate K -
factor to nearest tenth
172 M aster m eter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 PC 171 / nam eplate K -factor
C O M PO N EN T 1 FA C TO R 1
174 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200 set to desired low flow rate
175 M eter factor 1 W&M see text
176 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600 set to desired fall back or
high flow rate
178 Flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired fall back or

high flow rate

high flow rate
182 N om inal K -factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 round m eter nam eplate K -

high flow rate

_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
C ode Param eter A ttribute O ptions D efault M eter Proof

high flow rate

high flow rate

high flow rate

high flow rate

high flow rate

high flow rate

high flow rate

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________
C ode Param eter A ttribute O ptions D efault M eter Proof
207 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 set to desired high flow rate

METER PROVING REPORT FOR TANK PROVER METHOD Report:
S T A T IO N M E T E R T AG M E T E R S /N D ATE T IM E
M ETER M FG M ETER M OD EL M E T E R S IZ E PRO DUCT A P I G R A V IT Y @ 60 F

O
FR O M TAN K NO . TO PR O VER TAN K NO . IN IT IA L T O T A L IZ E R R E AD IN G
P R O VE R TAN K VO LU M E D ATA RUN 1 RUN 2 RUN 3 RUN 4
1 FLOW RATE
2 D E L IV E R Y T O P R O V E R T A N K
3 PRO VER TANK TEMPERATURE (A V G ), DEGREES F
4 C TSP
(T A B L E A-1 / A-2)
5 C TLP
(T A B L E 6)
6 C O M B IN E D C O R R E C T IO N F A C T O R CCFP
(L IN E 4 X L IN E 5)
7 C O R R E C T E D D E L IV E R Y V O L U M E
RACK M ETE R DATA [DA N LO A D 6000] RUN 1 RUN 2 RUN 3 RUN 4
8 MT R M G R S LO AD (F IN A L )
9 MT R M G R S LO AD (IN IT IA L )
10 R AC K M ETER M EASU R ED G R O SS VO LU M E
(L IN E 8 - L IN E 9)
11 R AC K M ETE R TE M P ER ATU R E, D E G R E E S F
12 C TLM
(T A B L E 6)
13 R AC K M ETE R PR ES S U R E, PSIG
14 C PLM
(C H A P 11.2)
15 C O M B IN E D C O R R E C T IO N F A C T O R CCFM
(L IN E 12 X L IN E 14)
16 R AC K M ETER C O R R EC TED G R O SS VO LU M E
(L IN E 10 X L IN E 15)
17 R AC K M ETE R VO LU M E E R R O R (L IN E 7 - L IN E 16)
18 R AC K M ETE R PE R C EN T ER R O R (L IN E 17 / L IN E 16)
19 ADJUSTM ENT (L IN E 7 / L IN E 16)
20 R A C K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R -F A C T O R
21 N EW M E TER FAC TO R (L IN E 19 X L IN E 20)
S IG N AT U R E D ATE R E P R E S E N T IN G
E N G IN E E R
W IT N E S S
R EM AR K S
Figure 5 - 2 (Typical)
METER PROVING REPORT FOR MASTER METER METHOD Report:
S T A T IO N : FR O M TAN K NO : TO TAN K NO : DATE: T IM E :
PR O D UC T: @ 60 F: IN IT IA L T O T A L IZ E R R E A D IN G :
O
A P I G R A V IT Y
M ASTER M ETER D ATA MFG: MOD EL: S E R IA L N O : S IZ E : K-F A C T O R :
M AS TE R M E TE R VO LU M E D ATA RUN 1 RUN 2 RUN 3 RUN 4 RUN 5 AV E R AG E
1 FLOW RATE
2 M A S T E R M E T E R F IN A L R E A D IN G
3 M A S T E R M E T E R IN IT IA L R E A D IN G
4 M AS T E R M E T E R IN D IC A T E D V O L U M E
(L IN E 2 - L IN E 3)
5 M AS TE R M E TE R TE M P ER ATU R E, D E G R E E S F
6 C TLP
(T A B L E 6)
7 M ASTER M ETER PR ESSU R E, PSIG
8 C PLP
(C H A P 11.2)
9 M A S T E R M E T E R M E T E R -F A C T O R
10 C O M B IN E D C O R R E C T IO N F A C T O R CCFP
(L IN E 6 X L IN E 8X L IN E 9)
11 M AS T E R M E T E R C O R R E C T E D G R O S S V O L U M E
RACK M ETE R VO LU M E D ATA [DA N LO A D 6000] RUN 1 RUN 2 RUN 3 RUN 4 RUN 5 AV E R AG E
12 MT R M G R S LO AD (F IN A L )
13 MT R M G R S LO AD (IN IT IA L )
14 R AC K M ETER M EASU R ED G R O SS VO LU M E
(L IN E 12 - L IN E 13)
15 R AC K M ETE R TE M P ER ATU R E, D E G R E E S F
16 C TLM
(T A B L E 6)
17 R AC K M ETE R PR ES S U R E, PSIG
18 C PLM
(C H A P 11.2)
19 C O M B IN E D C O R R E C T IO N F A C T O R CCFM
(L IN E 16 X L IN E 18)
20 R AC K M ETER C O R R EC TED G R O SS VO LU M E
(L IN E 14 X L IN E 19)
21 R AC K M ETE R VO LU M E E R R O R (L IN E 11 - L IN E 20)
22 R AC K M ETE R PE R C EN T ER R O R (L IN E 21 / L IN E 20)
23 ADJUSTM ENT (L IN E 11 / L IN E 20)
24 R A C K M E T E R C U R R E N T M E T E R -F A C T O R
25 N E W R AC K M E T E R F A C T O R (L IN E 23 X L IN E 24)
S IG N AT U R E D ATE R E P R E S E N T IN G
E N G IN E E R
W IT N E S S
R EM AR K S
Figure 5 - 3 (Typical)
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This table contains meter factors for the master meter derived from tank prover proving of the
master meter on up to four different products at up to four different flow rates for each product.
The master meter meter-factors are related to component / flow rate assignments within the
DanLoad 6000 for reference during proving of rack meters.
MASTER METER:
Manufacturer / model: ___________________________________________________
Size: _________________________________________________________________
Serial number: _________________________________________________________
Nominal K-factor: ______________________________________________________
Product M eter Factor

(com ponent) D ate M aster M eter Flow R ate M aster M eter M eter-Factor
174 C om p 1 flow rate 1 175 C om p 1 m eter factor 1

DanLoad 6000______________________________________________________

Section 6
Program Codes
Program Code Attributes
Program Codes
______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This section contains information on Program Codes. Program ccc

Codes are parameters which define the operation of the
DanLoad 6000 Preset. Each Program Code is a setup / A three digit program code, this number is unique for each
configuration / database value that consists of the following four parameter. Program codes range from 001 to 831 for Version
parts: a three digit program code, program code 2.00 of the DanLoad 6000 program. (Note: Several numbers
description/name, program code value, and program code in the series are not used.)
attribute. Each program code number / name combination
identifies a unique parameter that is either a setpoint or limit aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
value or an option that defines some method or mode of
operation. Data entry in a value / option field is accomplished An alpha-numeric name of up to thirty-four characters that
by prompting the user to enter a numeric value, enter an alpha- specifies the function of the program code. Some names are
numeric string, or select an option from a short list of options used several times when the parameter type is repeated for
(pick list). similar functions, such as different meters, components, or
additives. However, the three digit program code is always
Each program code is associated with a group of five program unique.
code attributes that can be viewed and modified by the operator. vvv ...
Program code attributes can be toggled ON or OFF to provide
specific security restrictions and status information for selected A value assigned to the parameter at setup time or modified in
program codes. the field. Note that the data type displayed and acceptable entry
in this field is dependent on the program code variable type.
Program codes are displayed in the following format when the These data types are:
DanLoad 6000 is operating in the Program Mode.
# integer
ccc aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa vvv
Whole number without a fractional part or decimal
where: separator.
Program Code Definitions ________________________________________________________ Section 6 - 1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# real number
A number consisting of a whole part, decimal separator,

and fractional part.
# alpha-numeric string
A message consisting of letter and number characters.
# <selection>
A predefined option selected from a scroll able short list

of options.
Section 3 - Setup Contains information on the procedures used

to enter data in the various types of data fields mentioned above.
<attributes>
Program codes can have up to five attributes that control some

aspect of the program code or its interaction with DanLoad 6000
functions. These attributes are described in Section 6.1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.1 Program Code Attributes
Program code attributes are characteristics that are associated # Enter the three digit program code in response to the Enter
with each program code. There are a maximum of five program code prompt message. (Note: One or two
program code attributes for any program code. Some program preceding zeros must be entered if the program code is less
code attributes are not applicable for some program codes. than 100.)
# Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key to
Access to program code attributes is by selection of the select (move the box outline cursor over the item) the
Program Code Attributes option located Program Mode Menu. desired program code attribute.
It is assumed that the DanLoad 6000 is in the loading mode with # Press the SELECT key to toggle the Yes or No status of the
the Loading Display active at this time. program code.
Select different program code:

Access program code attributes:
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key.
# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key. # Perform steps listed above under Access program code
# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to attributes as desired.
Enter passcode _________ prompt.
# Press the ENTER key.
# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is
displayed.
# Press the 9 (down arrow) key repeatedly to select
(move the box cursor over the item) Program code
attributes (item five in the list).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Exit program code attribute modification mode: Enable this attribute for this program code.
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to Weights and measures

Program code attributes).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to Restrict modification, in both the Loading Mode and the
Program Code Menu). Program Mode, of the value of the parameter value, unless the
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to Weights and Measures switch located on the operator control
Loading Mode). panel is open (out position) and the user has Supervisory
privilege set to Yes in the Security Parameters group. The
The options for program code attributes are described below. message, Weights and measures, is displayed on the message
line of the display if this attribute is set to Yes for the
Read only corresponding selected program code.
Restrict modification, in Program Mode, of the value of the # No

program code variable. The message, Read only, is displayed
on the message line of the display if this attribute is set to Yes Disable this attribute for this program code.
for the corresponding selected program code. (Note: Some
program codes can only be modified by internal logic or # Yes
calculations and are always Read only.)
Enable this attribute for this program code.
# No
Disable this attribute for this program code.
# Yes

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Data logging Value changed
Automatically log new values of parameters if modified in The value of the program code variable was changed in
Program Mode. The changes are only logged if PC 702 Program Mode. This program code attribute cannot be changed
Program code value change log is set On. manually. The program code attribute is set (Yes) internally
if the value was changed and can only be reset (No) by a
# No command from a Terminal Automation System.
Disable this attribute for this program code. # No
# Yes Program code has not been changed in the Program Mode.
Enable this attribute for this program code. This is the # Yes
default value for all program codes at initial startup
time. Program code has been changed in the Program Mode.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Transaction storage
Enable storage of the value of the program code variable in the

transaction storage memory area after each batch delivery is
completed.
# No
Disable this attribute for this program code.
# Yes
Enable this attribute for this program code.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.2 Parameter Groups
Parameters are grouped according to their logical functions. # Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key to
Parameters are accessed by the Setup Menu. Figure 6 - 1 is a select (move the box cursor over the item) the desired
diagram of the complete menu tree. Figure 6 - 2 contains an parameter group from the list of twenty-one groups, divided
overview of the parameter groups. Access to the parameters is into four display pages.
allowed while in the Program Mode. Access to the Program # Press the ENTER key.
Mode from the Loading Mode is described below. It is assumed # The first display page of the selected parameters group is
at this time that the DanLoad 6000 is in the Loading Mode with displayed.
either the Recipe Selection Menu, the Additive Selection Menu, # Press the 9 (down arrow) key or the 8 (up arrow) key to
or the Loading Display active at this time. select (move the box cursor over the item) the desired
parameter in the list. (Note: Parameter lists are divided
Enter Setup Mode: into various display pages as required by the length of the
list. Parameters are not displayed for undefined meters,
# Press the PROGRAM (ALT+ENTER) key. valves, components, or additives).
# Enter 1 to 9 digit supervisor passcode in response to: # Press the SELECT key to step through pick list options or
Enter passcode _________ prompt. press the numeric keys to enter numeric data.
# The first display page of the Program Mode Menu is # Note: The displayed data for each program code is entered
displayed. for the program code value when the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR)
# The box cursor is at the first selection Setup. key is pressed to exit the program code group and the setup
# Press the ENTER key. mode. Verify that data is correct before exiting a program
# The first display page of the Setup Menu is displayed. code group.
# The box cursor is at the first selection Setup.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Exit Setup Mode:
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to

Setup Menu).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (returns to
Program Code Menu).
# Press the EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) key (resets the
DanLoad 6000 and returns to the Loading Mode).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Program Mode Menu

Alarm reset 6 Alarm Reset display
Setup 6 Setup Menu )))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))))),

*
Program code attributes 6 Program code attributes display *
*
Set date and time 6 Set date and time display *
*
Diagnostics 6 Diagnostics Menu )))))))))))))))))), *
* *
Set contrast/backlighting 6 Set contrast/backlighting display * *
9 9
EXIT (ALT+CLEAR) Diagnostics Menu Setup Menu
Firmware versions Security parameters
RAM tests Unit parameters
Keypad Valve parameters
Display Meter parameters
Inputs/Outputs Component parameters
DUART Delivery parameters
ARCNET Digital Valve parameters
Crash analysis Pulse per unit outputs
Show memory Additive delivery params
Show trans memory Factors
Exit (ALT+CLEAR) Alarms
I/O parameters
Additive I/O parameters
Component I/O parameters
Temp/press/dens
Recipes
Data communications
Dynamic data display
Data logging
Blending
Add. pumps/block valves
Exit (ALT+CLEAR)
Menu Tree - Figure 6 - 1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Parameters Program Code Used For

Security param eters 001 to 024 operation security
U nit param eters 025 to 046 global param eters
V alve param eters 048, 049 flow control valves
M eter param eters 050 to 062 flow m eters
C om ponent param eters 065 to 077 liquid com ponents
D elivery param eters 078 to 111 batch deliveries
D igital valve param eters 112 to 127 digital flow control valve
Pulse per unit outputs 128 to 134 volum e pulses to external equipm ent
A dditive delivery param eters 135 to 168 additive injection
Factors 169 to 218 flow m eter factors
A larm s 219 to 268 actions and lim its
I/O param eters 280 to 372 input / output signal assignm ents
A dditive I/O param eters 380 to 397 additive injection signal assignm ents
C om ponent I/O param eters 400 to 422 com ponent block valve signal assignm ents
Tem perature / pressure / density 426 to 479 quantity correction
Recipes 480 to 660 product / batch deliveries
D ata com m unications 661 to 672 logging / term inal autom ation system
D ynam ic data display 679 to 695 operator data view (program m able)
D ata logging 696 to 704 reports to printer
Blending 710 to 799 product blending control
A dditive pum ps/block valves 800 to 831 additive pum p and block valve control
Parameters List Overview - Figure 6 - 2

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
How to Use the Parameters List

The parameters list on the following pages is in the same order
as, and divided into, the same groups the Setup Menu. The Several parameters specify the number of active physical
tables indicate the relation of the various parameter sub-groups devices or functions. This type of parameter allows a 0 entry.
to multiple functions or devices, such as flow meters, flow In some cases, such as number of flow meters, number of flow
control valves, components, and additives. Some parameters control valves, number of components, a 0 entry is not valid,
groups are sub-divided into several tables for ease of reading. there must be a minimum of one of these items defined in the
A description of each parameter or parameter type is located system. In other cases, such as number of additives, a 0 entry
below the corresponding table. When a parameter applies to the disables that device or function. A 0 entry for an input or
group of parameters and the program code is unique, the actual output logical function disables that function.
program code number is indicated in the bold face type in the
description header. When several parameters have the same
function (name) but different program codes depending on the
actual device or function relation, the program code is indicated
by the place holder ccc in the description header. Program
codes are indicated as PC in the text. Groups of similar
program codes are enclosed in brackets with comma separators
between the program codes (Example: PC [ccc, ccc, ccc]
Name. The vertical columns in the tables indicate the different
sub-groups of parameters and the actual program code number
can be obtained from the corresponding table. Only parameters
for actual devices or functions that have been specified are
displayable. Example: If only one flow meter is specified by
PC 050 Number of meters, the parameters related to flow meter
1 (051 to 052) are displayable and parameters 054 to 062 for
flow meters 2, 3, and 4 are not displayable.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.3 Security Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7 User 8
Passcode 0 to 999999999 001 004 007 010 013 016 019 022
<6000>
User ID 1 to 16 characters 002 005 008 011 014 017 020 023
<DanLoad 6000>
Supervisor privilege Yes * 003 006 009 012 015 018 021 024
No
Program Code Definitions (001 to 024) _____________________________________________Section 6 - 14

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.3 Security Parameters (continued)
Security parameters contain data which defines access passcodes ccc User ID
and access privileges for changing parameter values or
selections. Security parameters do not affect operation in the This parameter assigns an alpha-numeric entry (one to sixteen
Loading Mode which is active during batch deliveries. Up to characters) that is used to identify the user / operator with a
eight users / operators, each with unique access privileges, meaningful name. (Example: Operator # 1, John Jones, or
can be defined. The DanLoad 6000 is shipped from the factory similar)
with the security parameters for User 1 set to the following
default values / selections.
ccc Supervisor privilege
001 Passcode 6000
This parameter enables or disables supervisor privilege for the
002 User ID DanLoad 6000 corresponding user.
003 Supervisor privilege Yes # Yes
The corresponding user has supervisor privilege enabled which

ccc Passcode allows:
This parameter assigns a numeric value (one to nine digits) that # Access to program codes via the Setup menu selection in the
is used as a unique passcode for the user. Duplicate passcodes, Program Mode.
except for zero (which is not a valid passcode), are not # Access to Program code attributes in the Program Mode.
permitted. A minimum of one passcode must be non-zero. # Changing any passcode entry.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.3 Security Parameters (continued)
# No
The corresponding user has supervisor privilege disabled

or access to the restricted functions mentioned above is
not permitted.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.4 Unit Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Program Code
O perating m ode A uto 025
M anual *
Stand-alone
U nit type Seq. (auto) 026

Seq. (m anual)
In-line
O ff-rack
V alve type Std digital * 027

Std 2-stage
Language English * 028

English 2
C hinese
Thai
U nits m nem onic O ff 029

Bbl
D ek
Lit
G al *
lbs
kgs
L
l
Note: The default option for Unit Type is dependent on options specified during initial setup.
Program Code Definitions (025 to 046) _____________________________________________ Section 6 - 18

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.4 Unit Parameters (continued)
Unit Parameters contain data which defines various general # Manual

operating characteristics of the DanLoad 6000.
A terminal automation system can maintain bi-directional
communications with the DanLoad 6000 and performs
025 Operating mode monitoring of the batch delivery operations. Control
functions issued from the terminal automation system are not
This parameter selects the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000 accepted by the DanLoad 6000. If configured, PC 343
for interaction with a terminal automation system. The data Auto/manual changeover is OPEN to select this option.
logging feature operates identically in both the Manual and
Stand-alone modes. Data logging is not available in the Auto # Stand-alone
mode. The operating modes are:
The DanLoad 6000 operates in an independent local mode.
# Auto Communications with a terminal automation system is not
implemented.
A terminal automation system maintains bi-directional
communications with the DanLoad 6000 and performs
monitoring and control of the batch delivery operations.
If configured, PC 343 Auto/manual changeover is
CLOSED to select this option.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
026 Unit type # In-line
This parameter selects the method of controlling batch In-line proportional or in-line non-proportional blending is
deliveries. The options are: performed. Two or more components are delivered
simultaneously with each component flow measured by a
# Seq. (auto) separate flow meter and controlled by a separate flow
control valve.
Sequential blending is performed. One to four
components are delivered sequentially one at a time. The # Off-rack
block valves are controlled automatically.
A skid with two to four flow meters and flow control valves
performs blending before the blend components reach to
# Seq. (manual) load spot. The blended composite liquid is then sent to the
riser or risers for vehicle loading or returned to a storage
Sequential blending is performed. One to four tank.
components are delivered sequentially one at a time.
The user / operator is prompted for block valve OPEN
/ CLOSE control commands via messages displayed on
the message line.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
027 Valve type 028 Language
This parameter selects the flow control valve type used in the This parameter selects the language used for the Loading
system. All flow control valves in the system must be the same Display and data logging.
type.
# English
# Std digital
# English 2 (English with message numbers appended to
The flow control valve is a standard digital type. Flow permit use of printed code translation card
control is automatically adjusted to match a setpoint for other languages.)
value.
# Chinese Simplified script for China
# Std 2-stage
# Thai Thai script
The flow control valve is a standard 2-stage type. The
low flow rate and high flow rate are preset by adjusting If the language selection is changed, then changes in the value
the mechanical trip point of one or two stem switches. of PC 218 Product units mnemonic and PC 250, 252, 254, 256,
260, 262, 264 Safety circuit messages should also be
considered, so that the units mnemonics desplayed next to the
large loaded quantity, and the safety circuit alarm messages,
may be consistent with the selected language.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
029 Product units # Dek
This parameter selects the label used for quantity units The quantity units label is Dek (dekaLiters).
in the batch summary data logs. Note that this
parameter does not affect the quantity unit # Lit
accumulations. The K-factor parameters in the Factors
group determine the quantity unit accumulations. The The quantity units label is Lit (liters).
mnemonics shown in the loading display are selected via
PC 218 Product Units Mnemonic.
# Gal
# Off
The quantity units label is Gal (gallons).
A quantity units label is not displayed or printed.
# lbs
# Bbl The quantity units label is lbs (pounds).
The quantity units label is Bbl (barrels).

# kgs
The quantity units label is kgs (kilograms).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# L
The quantity units label is L (liters) for ASTM,

CIPM (from 1978), IOLM compliance.
# l
The quantity units label is l (liters) for CIPM

compliance.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Number of data item prompts 0 to 5 <0> 030

#1 Enter data item #1 Up to 32 characters 031
<default messages highlighted in
Function column>
Prompt time-out (secs) 0 to 9999 <60> 036
Check display Off * 037

Start
Start/Restart

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
030 Number of data prompts PC’s 31-35 Data item prompts

PC 218 Product unit mnemonics
This parameter sets the number of data prompts in the general PC’s 250, 252, 254, 256, 258, 260, 262, 264 Safety circuit
format Enter data item #1__________, displayed in the messages
message line of the display panel. The data item prompts may
be displayed as ASCII characters (includes alphanumerical Each script language has a set of script characters that are
characters), script characters of the selected language, or as available for display on the DanLoad 6000. A script character
mixed ASCII and script characters. These prompts allow the has a character code via which it may be invoked. The
operator to enter from one to five numbers of up to eight digits character codes that invoke individual script characters are
each number, before the first preset quantity is entered in the entered via the alphanumerical string entry.
Loading Display. These variables are printed on the Batch
Summary and Transaction Summary data logs. If the DanLoad A script message is formed by a series of character codes. The
6000 is in a terminal automation system network, the variables script message is always preceded by a "SCRIPTON" character
are transmitted to the DanLoad 6000 from the terminal (FF). The preceding "SCRIPTON" characters activates the
automation system for accounting purposes. Data item entries bitmaps(script character) defined for the language. The series
do not affect the operation of the DanLoad 6000. of characters following the "SCRIPTON" character selects
individual bitmaps (script characters) corresponding to the
Configuring a script message: character code.
The following information is relevent for three groups of The bitmaps defined for the language is de-activated by a
product codes. They may be configured to display in a desired "SCRIPTOFF" character (FE). Characters that are preceded by
script language using the script characters available in the a "SCRIPTOFF" character are displayed "as is".
DanLoad 6000.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
With the use of the "SCRIPTON" and "SCRIPTOFF" escape 032 #2 Enter data item #2
sequence a message containing a mixture of script characters,
and alphanumerical characters may be displayed on the This parameter contains the message to be displayed for data
DanLoad 6000 display. item prompt # 2. The default message is Enter data item #2
which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt during
Each script messsage must be preceeded by a SCRIPTON (FF) setup. Example: Enter invoice number:
character and must end with a (FE) character. The character
codes that invoke a script character in the selected language
when preceeded by a "SCRIPTON" (FF) character are shown 033 #3 Enter data item #3
in Figure 3-10 (Section 3).
This parameter contains the message to be displayed for data
item prompt # 3. The default message is Enter data item #3
031 #1 Enter data item #1 which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt during
setup. Example: Enter driver number:
which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt during 034 #4 Enter data item #4
setup. Example: Enter order number:
which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt during
setup. Example: Enter trailer number:

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
035 #5 Enter data item #5 displayable. The appropriate “Preset”, “Loaded” and
“Remaining” quantities are automatically re-displayed after
This parameter contains the message to be displayed for data completion of the test. It is not possible to start or restart the
item prompt # 5. The default message is Enter data item #5 batch until the check is complete. This function is a diagnostic
which should be modified to a more descriptive prompt during test and should normally be set Off.
setup. Example: Enter permit number:
# Off
036 Prompt time-out (secs) Disable display panel check function.
This parameter sets the time period that a data prompt will be # Start
displayed, before re-displaying the ready display in idle mode.
The ready display can be either the Recipe Selection Display, When a batch delivery is initially started, perform the
Additive Selection Display, or Loading Display, depending on display check prior to displaying the Press START when
the configuration of the instrument. Prompt time-out is disabled ready or STOP to cancel on the message line while in the
in the Program Mode. Loading Mode.
# Start/Restart
037 Check display
This parameter selects the display check action when a batch
This parameter selects the method of verifying the operation of delivery is initially started or restarted. If enabled, the
the display panel. The fields of the display panel that contain display check is performed prior to displaying the Press
numeric digits are momentarily darkened then lightened to START when ready or STOP to cancel on the message line
verify that all pixels that form the digits are while in the Loading Mode.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Date format mm/dd/yy * 038

dd/mm/yy
yy/mm/dd
Date separator / (slash) * 039
. (dot)
- (hyphen)
Decimal separator . (dot) * 040

, (comma)
Display data rate 1200 bps 041
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
28800 bps *

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
038 Date format 040 Decimal separator
This parameter selects the format of the date for display, date This parameter selects the character used to separate the whole
entry, and logging purposes. Selections are indicated in the part and fractional part of a real number.
table. Displayed / printed ranges are: month - 01 to 12, day -
01 to 31, year - 00 to 99. # . <dot>
# mm/dd/yy # , <comma>
# dd/mm/yy
041 Display data rate
# yy/mm/dd
This parameter selects the rate that data is transferred from the
processor to the local and remote display panels. Data to / from
039 Date separator the display panel / keypad is on a dedicated RS-485 serial link,
this link is normally operated at 28800 bps. If data errors are
This parameter selects the character used to separate the month, observed, the data speed may be reduced. Operation at
day, and year components of the date. reduced data speed should only be necessary in cases where a
remote display is located a long distance from the local unit.
# / <slash>
# . <dot>
# - <hyphen>

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Transaction # 0 to 9999 042

Batch # 0 to 9999 043
Additive units cc * 044
in3
Gal
Round method Trunc 045
Up *
Up/odd
Density/gravity scale 1 to 4 <4> 046

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
042 Transaction # 044 Additive units
This parameter indicates the sequence number of the current This parameter selects the label that identifies the engineering
active transaction if one is in progress. If a transaction is not units for measuring the additive injection quantity.
currently in progress, this parameter indicates the sequence
number of the last completed transaction. # cc cubic centimeters
# in3 cubic inches

043 Batch #
This parameter indicates the sequence number of the current # Gal gallons
batch loading operation if one is in progress. If a batch loading
operation is not currently in progress, this parameter indicates
the sequence number of the last completed batch loading
operation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
045 Round method # Up/odd
This parameter selects the method for rounding the displayed IF whole units accumulation is even AND IF fractional
and printed batch quantities to whole numbers. (tenths) accumulation is GREATER THAN xxxxx.5, add
1 to the whole units accumulation. OR IF whole units
# Trunc accumulation is odd AND IF fractional (tenths)
accumulation is GREATER THAN or EQUAL TO xxxxx.5,
Discard (truncate) accumulated fractions (tenths) of a add 1 to the whole units accumulation.
quantity unit.
# Up 046 Density/gravity scale
IF fractional accumulation is GREATER THAN or This parameter defines the number of decimal places in the
EQUAL TO xxxxx.5, add 1 to the whole units density or gravity display. Selections are 1 to 4 decimal places.
accumulation and discard the fractional accumulation.
Value Format Typical Use
1 xxxx.x density
2 xxx.xx API gravity
4 x.xxxx relative density

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.5 Valve Parameters
Range / Option
Number of valves 1 to 4 <1> 048

Initial flow time (secs) 0 to 9.999 <0.200> 049
Valve Parameters select the configuration of the flow control 049 Initial flow time (secs)
valves.
This parameter selects the time delay before flow control action
based on the PC [115, 119, 123, 127] Open method for each
048 Number of valves corresponding valve. The valve control signals (Solenoid 1 and
Solenoid 2) remain in the static state as described for PC ccc
This parameter sets the number of flow control valves in the Open method for this period of time during initial flow startup.
system. A minimum of one flow control valve must be defined.
Program Code Definitions (048, 049) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 34

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE
Program Code Definitions (048, 049) _______________________________________________ Section 6 - 35

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.6 Meter Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Meter 1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4
Number of meters 1 to 4 <1> 050

Meter ID 1 to 5 characters <M1> 051 054 057 060
Meter pulse board input 1 to number of 052 055 058 061
pulse inputs
Valve to be controlled 1 to number of control 053 056 059 062
valves

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.6 Meter Parameters (continued)
Meter Parameters contain data which defines from one to four ccc Meter pulse board input
flow meters. The first parameter in the group, PC 050 Number
of meters, sets the total number of flow meters in the system. This parameter assigns the corresponding logical meter pulse
The remaining parameters are organized in groups of three input to a physical meter pulse input on either one or two meter
parameters related to each flow meter. pulse input boards, depending on the physical configuration of
the DanLoad 6000.
050 Number of meters ccc Valve to be controlled
This parameter sets the total number of flow meters used in the This parameter assigns a physical flow control valve (1 to 4)
system, a minimum of one flow meter must be defined. to be used to control the flow rate through the corresponding
flow meter, two flow meters can share one flow control valve
if the piping is designed for this operation.
ccc Meter ID
This parameter identifies the flow meter for display and logging
purposes.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.7 Component Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Component 1 Component 2 Component 3 Component 4
Number of components 1 to 4 <1> 065

Component ID 1 to 16 characters 066 069 072 075
<Component #1>
Meter 1 to number of 067 070 073 076
meters
Mass adjustment 0.000000 to 068 071 074 077
999.999999
<0.000000>

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.7 Component Parameters (continued)
Component Parameters contain data which defines from one to 067 / 070 / 073 / 076 Meter
four liquid components. The first parameter in the group,
program code PC 065 Number of components, sets the total This parameter identifies the number of the flow meter (1 to 4)
number of components for the system. The remaining used to measure this component. Zero disables the component
parameters are organized in groups of three parameters related thus making it unavailable for loading.
to each component. The # sign in the component designations
below is replaced with the actual component number, 1 to 4,
in the display line. 068 / 071 / 074 / 077 Mass adjustment
This sets the component’s “mass computation” adjustment factor

065 Number of components 1, such that:
This parameter sets the number of liquid components used in the Mass = Net volume x (Density - Buoyancy) x 1
system, a minimum of one component must be defined.
While the net volume is similar in magnitude to the gross
volume, the mass may be substantially different from either.
066 / 069 / 072 /075 Component ID Thus when preset/delivery is by mass (PC 80), it is
recommended that several small batches be loaded to ensure that
This parameter identifies the component for display and logging the DanLoad 6000's configuration is correct before attempting
purposes (up to 16 characters). to preset a full compartmnet. Zero disables mass computation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.8 Delivery Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Compnt 1 Compnt 2 Compnt 3 Compnt 4
Maximum preset qty 5 to 999999 078
Minimum preset qty 5 to 999999 079
Preset/delivery type Gross 080

Std
Delivery display type Gross 081

Std
Stop key action Low flow 082

Immediate
Fall back qty 0 to 99999 <1000> 083
Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50> 084 090 096 102
Low flow restart qty 0 to 99999 <20> 085 091 097 103
Low flow stop qty 0 to 99999 <50> 086 092 098 104
Line pack delay (secs) 0 to 999 <2> 087 093 099 105
Pump stop delay (secs) 0 to 999 088 094 100 106
Block valve delay (secs) 0 to 99 089 095 101 107

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.8 Delivery Parameters (continued)
Delivery Parameters contain data which defines the batch 079 Minimum preset qty
delivery characteristics. The first six parameters in the group,
PC 078, 079, 080, 081, 082, and 083 are global parameters This parameter sets the minimum allowable quantity units that
that are applicable to all batch deliveries. The remaining can be preset for a batch delivery (gross or standard depending
parameters are organized in groups of six parameters related to on the preset/delivery type). The value of this parameter is
each component. Delivery Parameters provide a unique profile dependent on the expected minimum delivery size and the
for fine tuning the delivery of each component. capability of the flow-meter/flow-control valve to execute a
delivery cycle with the quantity set to this value. The value of
this parameter must be equal to or greater than the value of PC
078 Maximum preset qty 078 Maximum preset qty.
This parameter sets the maximum allowable quantity units that It is possible to preset and deliver by gross quantity, but to
can be preset for a batch delivery (gross or standard depending display “Loaded” by gross or standard quantity. However, the
on the preset/delivery type). The value of this parameter is “Remaining” quantity is always the preset quantity minus the
normally set to the quantity of the largest compartment of the delivered quantity (gross or standard). This is controlled by the
authorized tanker vehicles. The value of this parameter must be following two program codes.
equal to or greater than the value of PC 079 Minimum preset
qty.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
080 Preset/delivery type 081 Delivery display type
This parameter selects the quantity calculation method used for This parameter selects the quantity calculation used for display
preset, loaded, and remaining quantities. Ramp up to high purposes.
flow rate is always based on gross flow rate. Ramp down to
low flow rate and flow control valve closure is based on the # Gross
selection specified by this parameter.
Display quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
# Gross
# Std
Delivered quantity based on gross quantity calculation.
Display quantity based on standard quantity calculation.
# Std
Delivered quantity based on standard quantity

calculation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
082 Stop key action 083 Fall back qty
This parameter selects the method used to suspend a batch This parameter sets the quantity to delivery at a fall back flow
delivery operation after the STOP key is pressed. (Note: The rate before the DanLoad 6000 attempts to ramp up flow rate to
STOP key function should not be used for an emergency the next higher flow rate.
shutdown command because the power to the permissive circuits
is not removed by this function.)
# Low flow ccc Low flow start qty
Ramp to low flow rate before closing the flow control This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver before issuing
valve to stop all flow. This method of shutdown a command to the flow control valve to increase the flow rate to
prevents hydraulic shock in the piping system. (Note: the high flow rate. The default value is 50 quantity units.
The ccc Low flow stop qty is not delivered during this
method of shutdown.)
# Immediate
Close the component flow control valve immediately.

This method of shutdown may cause hydraulic shock in
the piping system.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Low flow restart qty ccc Line pack delay (secs)
This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver before issuing This parameter sets the time between starting the pump for this
a command to the flow control valve to increase the flow rate to component and opening the flow control valve. The default
the high flow rate after restarting a suspended batch delivery value is 2 seconds.
and after the initial PC ccc Low flow start qty has been
delivered. The default value is 20 quantity units. ccc Pump stop delay (secs)
This parameter sets the time between closing the flow control
ccc Low flow stop qty valve and de-energizing the pump for this component.
This parameter sets the quantity units to deliver at the low flow ccc Block valve delay (secs)
rate before all flow is stopped. The default value is 50 quantity
units. (Note: If this quantity is set to a very low value, the This parameter sets the time between opening the component
DanLoad 6000 may not be able to stabilize the flow rate during block valve to opening the component flow control valve during
delivery of PC ccc Low flow stop qty. If this happens, the startup. The assigned control outputs for the flow control valve
control value closure quantity cannot be accurately computed and the block valve are simultaneously set to close the valves
and the preset target quantity will be missed.) (discrete outputs set OPEN) during shutdown.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Ramp clicks 0 to 999 <30> 108

Maintenance clicks 0 to 999 <30> 109
Additive pump stop (secs) 0 to 9999 <10> 110
Primary component 1 to 4 <1> 111

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
108 Ramp clicks 111 Primary component
This parameter selects the maximum number of attempts (flow This parameter selects the primary component of a blend which
control valve solenoid jogs) to increase flow rate to the next is used in determining a blend ratio error and / or for load line
higher flow rate before halting attempts and maintaining current flushing at the end of a delivery.
or fall back flow rate.
109 Maintenance clicks
This parameter selects the maximum number of attempts (flow

control valve solenoid jogs) to maintain flow rate before halting
attempts and going to the next lower fall back flow rate.
110 Additive pump stop (secs)
This parameter selects the time delay between the load stop and
deenergizing the additive pump outputs (PC [800, 802, 804,
806, 808, 810] Pump outputs).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters
Range / Option Digital Digital Digital Digital

Function <Default / *> Valve 1 Valve 2 Valve 3 Valve 4
Low flow % error 2 to 10 <5> 112 116 120 124

High flow % error 2 to 10 <3> 113 117 121 125
Valve delay (secs) 0.000 to 9.999 <0.040> 114 118 122 126
Open method Normal * 115 119 123 127
Opened
Closed

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
Digital Valve Parameters contain data which defines the method ccc High flow % error
for controlling the operation of digitally operated flow control
valves. The parameters are organized in groups of four This parameter sets the percentage of difference in the actual
parameters related to each digital flow control valve.. high flow rate and the programmed high flow rate (setpoint)
allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to the
Digital Valve Parameters are not applicable to other types of flow control valve. This parameter is the deadband or
flow control valves selected by PC 027 Valve type. hysteresis and is only in effect when the high flow rate is
established and not in effect when the flow rate is increasing to
the high flow rate setpoint during startup. The suggested value
ccc Low flow % error is 5 percent.
This parameter sets the percentage of difference in the actual ccc Valve delay (secs)
low flow rate and the programmed low flow rate (setpoint)
allowed before a flow rate adjustment command is sent to the This parameter sets the elapsed time from the calculated time to
flow control valve. This parameter is the deadband or sent an OPEN or CLOSE command to the valve until that
hysteresis and is only in effect when the low flow rate is command is actually sent to the value. The default value is
established and not in effect when the flow rate is changing to 0.040 seconds
the low flow rate during startup or shutdown. The suggested
value is 5 percent.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.9 Digital Valve Parameters (continued)
ccc Open method # Closed
This parameter sets the method for controlling the flow control Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are deenergized
valve during the time specified by PC 049 Initial flow time during PC 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The component does
(secs). (Note: This feature is intended for use in multi- not flow during initial flow time.)
component blending systems. It's purpose is to allow a
component with low pumping pressure to start flowing before
other components with higher pumping pressure.
# Normal
Flow control valve solenoid 2 is energized during PC 049 Initial

flow time (secs). (Note: The component flows during the initial
flow time.)
# Opened
Flow control valve solenoid 1 and solenoid 2 are energized

during PC 049 Initial flow time. (Note: The component flows
during the initial flow time.)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs
Range / Option Pulse Pulse

Function <Default / *> Output 1 Output 2
Number of pulse per unit outputs 0 to 2 <0> 128

Control meters X (not used) <GGGG> 129 132
G (gross)
S (std)
Factor 0.1 to 10.0 <1.0> 130 133
Pulse width (ms) 10 to 500 <20> 131 134

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
Pulse Per Unit Outputs contain data which defines the method ccc Control meters
of processing momentary pulsed outputs for each measured
quantity unit. The first parameter in the group, PC 128 This parameter selects the flow meter or combination of flow
Number of pulse per unit outputs, sets the number of pulse per meters and either the gross or standard quantity units used to
unit outputs that are assigned. The remaining parameters are drive this output. Access to internal accumulators for flow
organized in groups of three parameters related to each pulse meters is assigned by a one to four character string (one
per unit output. Each output can be setup to provide different character position for each flow meter). The selections for each
outputs derived from the flow measured through different flow position in the string are X, G, or S, the accumulators for the
meters and with different scaling. flow meters correspond to the following positions in the string
1234.
128 Number of pulse per unit outputs # X
This parameter sets the total number of pulse per unit outputs. Disregard the accumulator for the flow meter.
The default value is 0. (Note: If more than 2 pulse per unit
outputs is needed, the additive ratio outputs: PC [380, 383, # G
386, 389, 392, 395] Ratio output with the corresponding PC
[140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165] Ratio qty set to 1.0 can be Use the gross quantity unit to pulse the output.
used for this purpose.)
# S
Use the standard quantity unit to pulse this output.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.10 Pulse Per Unit Outputs (continued)
# example: SXGN ccc Pulse width (ms)
The example shows four character positions which This parameter sets the duration of output ON pulse in ten
indicates that four flow meters are defined. The number millisecond increments. Any values between 10 to 87 (10 ms
of character positions in the string is automatically set to to 87 ms) may be configured. The default pulse width is 20
the number of defined flow meters (PC 050 Number of milliseconds with a guaranteed minimum OFF time.
meters). The 'SXGN' selections specify the following
quantity unit sum (combination) is used to drive the
assigned discrete output.
meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard,
do not sum quantities from meter 2
The default value is “GGGG”.
ccc Factor
This parameter sets the scale factor for the corresponding

output. A factor of 1.0 causes the output to be pulsed for each
internal accumulated product unit. A factor of 0.1 causes the
output to pulse for each one-tenth of an internal accumulated
product unit. A factor of 10.0 causes the output to pulse one
time for each ten internal accumulated quantity units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Addtv 1 Addtv 2 Addtv 3 Addtv 4 Addtv 5 Addtv 6
Number of additives 0 to 6 < 0> 135
Selection method External * 136

Prompt
Inputs
Totalizing method Out * 137

Out/Sgl
Out/Dbl
Out/Hshk
In/Sgl
In/Dbl
In/Hshk
In
Clean line qty 0 to 9999 < 0> 138

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.11 Additive Delivery Parameters (continued)
Range / Option
Additive control meters X (not used) < XXXX> 139 144 149 154 159 164
G (gross)
S (std)
Ratio qty 1.0 to 999.9 <40.0> 140 145 150 155 160 165
Offset volume 0.0 to 999.9 141 146 151 156 161 166
Totalizing volume 0.0 to 999.99 142 147 152 157 162 167
Available No * 143 148 153 158 163 168

Yes

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Additive Delivery Parameters contain data which defines 136 Selection method
automatic control injection of up to six additives into the
delivered product stream. The first four parameters in the This parameter selects the method for selecting additives while
group, PC 135, 136, 137, and 138, define values and in the stand-alone or manual modes. (Note: Additives are
selections that are applicable to all additive deliveries. The selected by the Terminal Automation System while in the
remaining parameters are organized in groups of five automatic mode.)
parameters related to each additive.
# External
135 Number of additives The ratio outputs for all additives enabled by parameter 135
Number of additives are toggled.
This parameter sets the number of additives to be injected.
# Prompt
The local operator is prompted, via the Additive selection

display at the start of each transaction, to select the
additives to be injected.
# Inputs
The ratio outputs for each additive enabled by PC 135

Number of additives are toggled based on the state of an
external switch or relay contact per each configured
additive.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
137 Totalizing method # Out
This parameter selects the method used for volume accumulation The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch
of each additive. each additive volume is accumulated in an loading. The additive ratio counter is ignored. Add one
Add x total totalizer that is accessible in the Dynamic Data additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for
Display. The two parts of this parameter are: each of PC ccc Ratio output cycles. PC ccc Feedback input
signals are not monitored. This method of additive volume
# Out / In Increment the additive totalizer on the totalizing also applies to the Out/Sgl, Out/Dbl, and Out/Hshk
Ratio output (Out) or increment the options described below.
additive totalizer on the Feedback input
(In).
# In
# Sgl / Dbl / Hshk
Selects the method for handling Feedback The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch
inputs from the additive injector loading. The additive ratio counter is ignored. Add one
additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for
each of PC ccc Feedback input cycles. PC ccc Ratio output
signals are not monitored. This method also applies to the
In/Sgl, In/dbl, and In/Hshk options. described below.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Out/Sgl or In/Sgl
The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batch
loading. One PC ccc Feedback input is expected after the PC ccc Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x
total and Add x batch totalizers for each ccc Ratio output (Out/Sgl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Sgl).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+)), +)), +)), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback Input
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
))))))- .))))))))))))- .))))))))))))- .))))))))))Q 7 OFF
Single Pulse per Ratio Cycle

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Out/Dbl or In/Dbl
The Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. The additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batch
loading. One ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after PC ccc Ratio output is energized and one PC ccc Feedback input is expected
after the ccc Ratio output is deenergized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC ccc Ratio
output (Out/Dbl) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Dbl).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
* * * * * *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+)), +)), +)), +)), +)), +)), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback
* * * * * * * * * * * * Input
* * * * * * * * * * * *
))))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))- .))))Q 7 OFF
Double Pulse per Ratio Cycle

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Out/Hshk or In/Hshk
An Add x batch totalizer is set to zero at the start of the batch loading. An additive ratio counter set to zero at the start of the batch
loading. An additive injection timer is set when PC ccc Ratio output is energized. One ccc Feedback input pulse is expected after the
PC ccc Ratio output is energized. Add one additive volume to the Add x total and Add x batch totalizers for each PC ccc Ratio output
(Out/Hshk) or each PC ccc Feedback input (In/Hshk).
+))))))), +))))))), +))))))), 7 ON

VO* * VO* * VO* *
T0* * T0* * T0* *
* * * * * *
)))))- .)))))))- .)))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
+))))), +)))))), +)))))), 7 ON

VI* * VI* * VI* *
R-* * R-* * R-* * 7 Feedback
* * * * * * Input
* * * * * *
)))))))- .)))))))))- .))))))))- .)))))))Q 7 OFF
Handshake Ratio Output and Feedback Input

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
138 Clean line qty ccc Additive control meters
This parameter sets to quantity (gross or standard depending on This parameter selects the flow meters that are used by summing
the configured preset/delivery type PC 80) of product or blend the quantity delivered through the meters to determine the
to be loaded at the end of a batch loading, without additive quantity of additive to inject into the flow stream. Flow meters
injection. The feature eliminates the additive from the piping to are designated by relative character positions in a one to four-
prevent next batch contamination with current batch additives. character alpha string (one character position for each flow
meter).
# X
This flow meter not required.
# G
Use the gross quantity unit for additive quantity calculation.
# S
Use the standard quantity unit for additive injection

calculation.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# example: SXGN ccc Offset volume
The example shows four character positions which This parameter sets the volume units of component(s) to deliver
indicates that four flow meters are defined. The number at the start of a batch delivery before initiating additive
of character positions in the string is automatically set to injection.
the number of defined flow meters (PC 050 Number of
meters). The 'SXGN' selections specify the following
quantity unit sum (combination) is used to drive the ccc Totalizing volume
assigned additive injection output.
meter 1 standard + meter 3 gross + meter 4 standard, This parameter sets the volume unit of additive injected for each
do not sum quantity from meter 2 injection cycle.
ccc Ratio qty
This parameter sets the ratio of component(s) delivered to the

quantity of additive injected (quantity units of component
delivered for each additive ratio output cycle). The default
value is 40.0

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Available
This parameter selects the availability of the additive. The

selection can be used to temporarily disable injection of this
additive for selected batch deliveries.
# No
This additive is not available (the additive cannot be selected in

the Additive Selection Display).
# Yes
This additive is available (the additive can be selected in the

Additive Selection Display).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.12 Factors
Range / Option
Number of factors/components 1 to 4 <2> 169

Meter factor method Fixed * 170
Linear
Nominal K-factor 0.5 to 550.0 <23.0> 171 182 193 204
Master meter factor 0.5000 to 2.0000 172 183 194 205

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.12 Factors <continued)
Factors contain data which defines the flow meter calibration 170 Meter factor method
characteristics for up to four components at up to four different
flow rates for each component. The first two parameters in the This parameter selects the method used to determine the meter
group, PC 169 and PC 170, apply to the calculation of all factors used in the flow calculation.
factors, the remaining parameters are organized in groups of
three parameters related to each defined component and groups # Fixed
of two parameters related to each defined flow rate for that
component. The meter factor that was determined a flow rate that is closest
to the current flow rate is used. Fixed is normally selected for
digital flow control valves in single component or sequential
169 Number of factors/component blending loading operations.
This parameter sets the number of meter factors, determined at # Linear

different flow rates, available for one flow meter and
component combination. The lowest flow rate, for low flow The meter factor is calculated by an interpolation process that
startup and shutdown, must be entered first (Component # uses the two meter factors determined at the next highest flow
factor 1), the highest flow rate must be entered last rate and the next lowest flow rate from the current flow rate.
(Component # factor 4). Meter factors for fall back flow rates A ratio between the two flow rates and the corresponding two
can be entered for Component # factor 2 and Component # meter factors is determined. The current meter factor is
factor 3. (Note: Four factors are assumed in the example. If calculated assuming that the meter factor value increments are
only two factors are determined, the factor for the lowest flow linear between the two proved meter factors and based on the
rate is entered for Component # factor 1 and the factor for the current flow rate and the ratio. Linear is normally selected for
highest flow rate is entered for Component # factor 2.) 2-stage flow control valves or in-line blending loading
operations.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.12 Factors (continued)
ccc Nominal K-factor
This parameter sets the nominal pulses per unit of product

received from the flow meter. The K-factor is also referred to
as the system factor and is usually printed on the flow meter
nameplate. The default value is 23.0 which is the nominal
pulses per gallon for a Daniel 4-inch diameter LR turbine meter.
This entry should always be set to match the K-factor of the
actual flow meter.
ccc Master meter factor
This parameter sets the number used internally to verify the

probability of a valid meter factor entry. All meter factors for
this component must be within the ± percent (set by PC 215
Master MF %) of this value or the meter factor entry is
considered to be out of range. Example: assume PC 215 equals
2.00 (2 %) if this entry is 1.0000, acceptable meter factors for
any of the corresponding PC ccc Component # meter factor #
entries is 0.9800 to 1.0200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Flow rate 1 0 to 99999 <200> 174 185 196 207

Meter factor 1 per PC 215 / PC 216 175 186 197 208
Flow rate 2 0 to 99999 <600> 176 187 198 209
Flow rate 3 0 to 99999 178 189 200 211
Flow rate 4 0 to 99999 180 191 202 213
Master MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <2.00> 215 215 215 215
Adjustment MF % 0.00 to 99.99 <0.25> 216 216 216 216
Product units mnemonic up to six characters

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Flow rate 1 ccc Flow rate 2
This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit at This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit at
which the meter factor for the low flow rate is established. which the meter factor for the high flow rate, or an
Engineering units for flow rates are determined by the K-factor intermediate flow rate, is established. Engineering units for
scaling (PC ccc Nominal K-factor) for the component. The flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC ccc
units entered for this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH. Nominal K-factor) for the component. The units entered for
this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.
ccc Meter factor 1 ccc Meter factor 2
This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for the This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for the
corresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter. corresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Flow rate 3 ccc Flow rate 4
This parameter sets the value in quantity units per time unit at (Weights and measures attribute default) this parameter sets the
which the meter factor for the high flow rate, or an value in quantity units per time unit at which the meter factor
intermediate flow rate, is established. Engineering units for for the high flow rate is established, engineering units for flow
flow rates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC ccc rates are determined by the K-factor scaling (PC ccc Nominal
Nominal K-factor) for the component. The units entered for K-factor) for the component, the units entered for this
this parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH. parameter are GPM, dLPM, LPM, BPH.
ccc Meter factor 3 ccc Meter factor 4
This parameter sets the meter factor that is used for the (Weights and measures attribute default) this parameter sets the
corresponding flow rate indicated in the previous parameter. meter factor that is used for the corresponding flow rate
indicated in the previous parameter

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
215 Master MF % [PC ccc Meter factor 3 and

PC ccc Meter factor 2 and
This parameter sets the percentage bandwidth for limit checks PC ccc Meter factor 4]
of the individual Meter factor f referenced to the PC [172, 183,
194, 205] Master meter factor. The default value is 2.00 [PC ccc Meter factor 4 and
which limits any PC ccc Meter factor f entry to ± 2 percent of PC ccc Meter factor 3]
the corresponding PC ccc Master meter factor for the
component (meter). The default value is 0.25 percent.
216 Adjustment MF % 218 Product units mnemonic
This parameter sets the allowable percentage difference between Up to six characters used to display alphanumeric characters,
any two adjacent meter factors, adjacent meter factors are: script characters, or a mixture of script and alphanumeric
[PC ccc Meter factor 1 and characters on display columns next to the large numbers
PC ccc Meter factor 2] showing the “Loaded” quantity.
[PC ccc Meter factor 2 and Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a script
PC ccc Meter factor 1 and message prior to the description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item
PC ccc Meter factor 3] #1 for more information concerning language selection and use
of scripts.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.13 Alarms
The response to each alarm is controlled by the setting of the Alarm Action corresponding to that alarm. The four possible alarm actions
are described below. The alarm actions for several alarms are limited to less than four selections. Alarm action for several alarms
is fixed and not selectable. The allowable alarm action selections for each alarm are listed for each alarm parameter.
Alarm Action Description Reset

Primary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended. Keypad in Program Mode.
Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared.
Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are ON. Alarm reset discrete input, PC
Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output is maintained closed (if defined). 344 Primary alarm reset (if defined).
Terminal automation system.
Secondary If a delivery is in progress, the flow control valve is shut and the delivery is suspended. Correct cause of alarm
Delivery cannot resume until the alarm is cleared or the Secondary alarm reset time has
elapsed. Automatically reset after time value in
Red LED indicators on primary and secondary operator displays are flashing. PC 220 Secondary alarm reset (secs)
Alarm discrete output, PC 287 Alarm control output is pulsed (if defined). has elapsed.
Info An event message is displayed on the message line of the display panel for ten seconds. Automatically reset after ten seconds
have elapsed.
Off Disable monitoring of this alarm.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.13 Alarms (continued)
Range / Option
Safety circuit message Specific * 219

General
Secondary alarm reset (secs) 0 to 9999 <300> 220
Low flow alarm action Off 221

Info
Primary *
Minimum flow rate 0 to 99999 <100> 222
Low flow time (secs) 5 to 999 <10> 223
High flow alarm action Off 224

Info
Primary *
Maximum flow rate 0 to 99999 <660> 225
High flow time (secs) 5 to 999 <10> 226

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Alarms Parameters contain data which defines the conditions 219 Safety circuit message
that generate alarms and the method that the DanLoad 6000
responds to alarms. Multiple alarms can be processed This parameter defines the default safety circuit message that
simultaneously. Alarms are processed in the chronological will be displayed on a safety circuit fault. The alarm messages
order that they are detected. The first parameter, PC 220 for safety circuits 1 through 8 are user configurable in the script
Secondary alarm reset (secs), is applicable to all alarms that “Language” selected via PC 028 Language.
have the alarm action set to Secondary. All other alarm
parameters are related to specific alarm actions or limits. # Specific
The response to any alarm is handled by a specific alarm action. Specific default safety circuit messages that tell the operator
There are four possible alarm actions for any alarm. However, what the problem may be, i.e. “Ground detector open”.
most alarms actions are restricted to less than four selections.
In some cases, the alarm action is permanently set at one option # General
and cannot be modified. Alarm action selections are located in
relation to associated alarm parameters in the following alarm General default safety circuit messages, i.e. “Safety circuit
tables. Selectable alarm actions are indicated in the form: 1 failure”.
<alarm condition> alarm action.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The default "English" language "Specific" safety circuit The default "English 2" language "Specific" safety circuit
messages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are: messages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are:
#1 15 Ground detector open

#1 Ground detector open
#2 16 Overspill detector open
#2 Overspill detector open
#3 21 Permissive power failure
#3 Permissive power failure
#4 25 Additive injection failure
#4 Additive injection failure
#5 Arm down side 1
#5 Arm down side1
#6 Arm down side 2
#6 Arm down side 2
#7 Walkway down side 1
The default "English" language "General" safety circuit alarm The default "English 2" language "General" circuit messages
messages for safety circuits 1 through 8 are: for safety circuits 1 through 8 are:
#1 Safety circuit 1 failure #1 15 Safety circuit 1 failure

#5 Safety circuit 5 failure #5 Safety circuit 5 failure

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
The default "Thai" language "Specific" or "General" safety The default hex control key string for the "Chinese" language
circuit messages for circuits 1 through 8 are: "General" safety circuit alarm messages are:
#1 Ground detector open #1 \xFF\x82\x83\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 1 failure)

#2 Overspill detector open #2 \xFF\x82\x84\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 2 failure)
#3 Permissive power failure #3 \xFF\x82\x85\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 3 failure)
#4 Additive injection failure #4 \xFF\x82\x86\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 4 failure)
#5 Arm down side1 #5 \xFF\x82\x87\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 5 failure)
#6 Arm down side 2 #6 \xFF\x82\x88\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 6 failure)
#7 Walkway down side 1 #7 \xFF\x82\xD4\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 7 failure)
#8 Walkway down side 2 #8 \xFF\x82\xD5\x9E\x9F\xA0\xA1\x91\x92 (Safety circuit 8 failure)
The default hex control key string for the "Chinese" language
"Specific" safety circuit messages for safety circuits 1 through 220 Secondary alarm reset (secs)
8 are:
This parameter sets the elapsed time to allow a secondary alarm
#1 \xFF\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\xFE (Ground detector open) to be active before it is cleared automatically. The default value
#2 \XFF\xA6\xA7\xA8\xA9\XFE (Overspill detector open)
#3 \XFF\xA0\xAB\xAC\xAD\x91\x92\XFE (Permissive power failure) is 300 seconds.
#4 \XFF\x5D\x23\x5E\XAC\XAD\x91\x92\XFE (Additive injection failure)
#5 \XFF\x82\x83\xAE\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\XFE (Ground detector side 1)
#6 \XFF\x82\x84\xAE\xA2\xA3\x5F\xA5\XFE (Ground detector side 2)
#7 \XFF\x82\x83\XAE\xAF\xB0\x8C\xB2\xB1\XFE (Swing arm switch side 1)
#8 \XFF\x82\x83\XAE\xAF\xB0\x8C\xB2\xB1\XFE (Swing arm switch side 2)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
221 Low flow alarm action 224 High flow alarm action
This parameter selects the response to a low flow condition. The This parameter selects the response action to a high flow
default selection is Primary. condition. The default selection is Primary.
222 Minimum flow rate 225 Maximum flow rate
This parameter sets the value of the minimum flow rate This parameter sets the value of the maximum flow rate
permitted for the time period set in PC 223 Low flow time (secs) permitted for the time period set in PC 224 High flow time
before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 100 (secs) before the low flow alarm is set. The default entry is 660
quantity units per time unit (this value is dependent of K-factor quantity units per time unit (this value is dependent of K-factor
scaling for the flow meter). scaling for the flow meter). (Note: Set this value slightly
greater than the highest expected flow rate. This setting value
enables the DanLoad 6000 to detect loss of control of a flow
223 Low flow time (secs) control valve and alarm the condition.)
This parameter sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at or

less than the flow rate specified by PC 222 Minimum flow rate 226 High flow time (secs)
before the low flow alarm is set.
This parameter sets the maximum time allowed to elapse at or
greater than the flow rate specified by PC 225 Maximum flow
rate before the high flow alarm is set.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Overrun limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <2.0> 227
Underflow alarm action Off * 228

Primary
Underflow limit qty 0.0 to 99.9 <5.0> 229
No flow alarm action Off 230

Info
Primary *
No flow t-o (secs) 1 to 99 <5> 231
Unauthorized flow limit qty 0.1 to 99.9 <10> 232

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
227 Overrun limit qty 230 No flow t-o alarm action
This parameter sets the allowable quantity, in excess of the This parameter selects the response to a no flow condition. The
preset quantity, to be delivered before the Unable to close valve default selection is Primary.
meter # alarm is set.
231 No flow t-o (secs)

228 Underflow alarm action
This parameter sets the elapsed time to allow for no flow pulse
This parameter selects the response to an underflow condition. input to be detected after opening the flow control valve. The
The default selection is Off. default value is 5 seconds. (Note: This delay can be set to 1 or
2 seconds if detection of a meter pulse input failure or other
cause of the no flow condition must be detected immediately.)
229 Underflow limit qty
This parameter sets the allowable quantity, less than the preset 232 Unauthorized flow limit qty
quantity, to be delivered before the Valve closed early meter #
alarm is issued. This parameter sets the allowable quantity units to be recorded
as unauthorized flow before the Unauthorized flow exceeds limit
meter # primary alarm is issued. The default value is 10
quantity units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Error limit (pulses) 0 to 255 <0> 233

Reset count (pulses) 0 to 65535 <10000> 234
The pulse security function provides verification of meter pulse inputs per API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter
5 - Metering, Section 5 - Fidelity and Security of Flow Measurement Pulsed-Data Transmission Systems and IP 252, Part XIII - Fidelity
and Security of Measurement-Data Transmission Systems. This function can only be implemented if there are two meter pulse train
inputs from a single flow meter. The dual meter pulse inputs must be 90 degrees electrically out of phase. Turbine meters capable
of implementing this function must have two pick-up coils, 90 degrees electrically out of phase, and two preamplifiers. Positive
displacement meters must have dual pulse transmitters.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
233 Error limit (pulses) 234 Reset count (pulses)
This parameter sets the limit of pulse comparison errors that can This parameter is used for pulse security level “B” and sets the
be accumulated before a Pulse security error meter # alarm is value of raw pulses accumulated during pulse error checking
issued. This parameter is only used for meter pulse input before resetting the accumulator to zero. This value defines a
verification of dual pulse input trains from a single flow meter. window of accumulated raw pulses that is used to determine if
The default value of 0 disables the pulse security function. The PC 233 Error limit (pulses) value is exceeded. A zero entry
pulse security function is enabled by setting this parameter to a indicates to reset the error count only at the start of each batch
value other than 0. A suggested value for this parameter is 20 delivery. A value greater than zero indicates that the
errors. (Note: this parameter must be set to 0 if the pulse accumulated error count will be cleared each time the
security function is not used.) accumulated raw pulses equal the entry. This field is not used
if the value of PC 233 Error limit (pulses) is set to zero.
This is an 8-bit hardware down counter, which can be set at any
time by software and generates an interrupt when zero is
reached, i.e. the error limit has been exceeded. Pulse security
per IP 252 level “B” is implemented in hardware via “pulse
security PAL’s” on the meter pulse board.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Data logging alarm action Info * 235

Primary
Comms fail alarm action Info 236

Primary *
Comms fail t-o (secs) 1 to 300 <10> 237

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
235 Data logging alarm action 237 Comms fail t-o (secs)
This parameter selects the response to a data logging memory This parameter is set to the elapsed time allowed for not
full condition. This condition is usually caused by failure to receiving communications from a terminal automation system
print data logs due to the logging printer (device) being off- before issuing a Comms failure channel X alarm, if PC
line, out of paper, or some other disabling condition. The 236 Comms fail alarm action is set to Primary.
default selection is Info.
236 Comms fail alarm action
This parameter selects the response to a communications failure

on either serial data channel 1 or channel 2. If the selection is
set to Off, communications alarms are ignored. If the selection
is Primary, the primary alarm Comms failure channel X is
activated if there is no communications with the automation
system sensed within the time limit set by PC 237 Comms fail
t-o (secs).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Temp fail alarm action Off 238
Info
Primary *
Minimum temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <-40.0> 239
Maximum temperature -99.9 to 999.9 <110.0> 240
Density fail alarm action Info 241

Primary *
Minimum density/gravity 242
Maximum density/gravity 243
Minimum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 <0.0> 244
Maximum pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 <0.00> 245
Additive error limit 1 to 99 < 3> 246
Feedback time 0 to 9999 247
Block valve time (secs) 0 to 99 < 10> 248

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
238 Temp fail alarm action 239 Minimum temperature
This parameter sets the temperature input to use and selects the This parameter sets the minimum allowable process temperature
response to a process RTD temperature input out of range input from an RTD before the Temperature failure meter #
condition. alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by PC 427
Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees
# Off Celsius). The default value is -40.0 degrees.
Use backup temperature from PC [434, 437, 440, 443]

Backup temperature entry. 240 Maximum temperature
# Info This parameter sets the maximum allowable process temperature

input from an RTD before the Temperature failure meter #
Use live temperature if in limits of PC 239 Minimum alarm is issued. The temperature units are specified by PC 427
temperature and PC 240 Maximum temperature else use PC Temperature units (either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees
ccc Backup temperature. Celsius). The default value is +110.0 degrees.
# Primary
Use live temperature only and halt loading if live temperature

is out of limit set by PC 239 Minimum temperature and PC 240
Maximum temperature.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
241 Density fail alarm action 243 Maximum density/gravity
This parameter selects the response to a process density input This parameter sets the maximum allowable process density
out of range condition. If the selection is set to Info, the PC input from a densitometer before the Density failure component
ccc Backup density/gravity (Temperature/pressure/density # alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on the
parameters group) value for this component is used in selection in PC ccc Temperature option corresponding to the
calculations. The default selection is Primary. component. The decimal point location in this field is
dependent on the setting in PC 046 Density/gravity scale.
242 Minimum density/gravity

244 Minimum pressure
This parameter sets the minimum allowable process density
input from a densitometer before the Density failure component This parameter sets the minimum allowable process pressure
# alarm is issued. The density units are dependent on the input from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failure
selection of PC ccc Temperature option corresponding to the meter # alarm is issued.
component. The decimal point location in this field is
dependent on the setting in PC 046 Density/gravity scale.
245 Maximum pressure
This parameter sets the maximum allowable process pressure

input from a pressure transmitter before the Pressure failure
meter # alarm is issued.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
246 Additive error limit
This parameter sets the allowable error count, missing

or spurious additive feedback pulses, before the
Additive # failure alarm is issued. The default value is
3.
247 Feedback time
This parameter sets the maximum time in seconds that

an additive feedback input (handshake feedback method)
can be energized before an Additive a failure alarm is
activated.
248 Block valve delay (secs)
This parameter sets the time period allowed for any

component block valve to close. The default value is 10
seconds.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Circuit 1 alarm action Secondary * 249

Primary
#1 <message> 1 to 34 characters 250
Ground detector open
Circuit 2 alarm action Secondary 251

Primary *
Overspill detector open

Primary
Permissive power failure

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Safety Circuit Alarms 250 #1 <Ground detector open>
Alarm PC's 249 to 268 define the operation of eight This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this
configurable input safety circuits (permissive circuits). The safety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
first four safety circuits are independent from the side of the
loading island witch is active for the current delivery. The
remaining four safety circuits are configurable to be either side 251 Circuit 2 alarm action
independent or dedicated to side 1 or dedicated to side 2.
This parameter selects the response to an OPEN state for the
The eight discrete permissive inputs for the safety circuits are discrete input assigned to this function by PC 346 Safety circuit
assigned with PC's 345 to 352. 2.
Refer to PC 028 Language and notes on configuring a script

message prior to the description of PC 031 #1 Enter data item 252 #2 <Overspill detector open>
#1 for more information concerning language selection and use
of scripts. This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this
safety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
249 Circuit 1 alarm action

discrete input assigned to this function by PC 345 Safety circuit
1.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

3.
254 #3 <Permissive power failure>
This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this

safety circuit, the default message is indicated above.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option

Primary
Additive injection failure

Primary
Arm down side 1

Primary
Arm down side 2

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
255 Circuit 4 alarm action 258 #5 <Arm down side 1>
This parameter selects the response to an OPEN state for the This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this
discrete input assigned to this function by PC 348 Safety circuit safety circuit. The default message is indicated above.
4.

256 #4 <Additive injection failure>
This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this discrete input assigned to this function by PC 350 Safety circuit
safety circuit. The default message is indicated above. 6.
257 Circuit 5 alarm action 260 #6 <Arm down side 2>
5.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Primary
Walkway down side 1

Primary
Walkway down side 2

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
261 Circuit 7 alarm action 264 #8 <Walkway down side 2>
7.
262 #7 <Walkway down side 1>
This parameter contains the alarm message assigned to this

safety circuit. The default message is indicated above.

8.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Circuit 5 type 0 to 2 <1> 265

265 Circuit 5 type 266 Circuit 6 type
This parameter sets the side assignment for safety circuit This parameter sets the side assignment for safety circuit
number 5. number 6.
# 0 = side independent # 0 = side independent
# 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1 # 1 = enabled only if loading at side 1
Side enabling is controlled by the swing arm position inputs. Side enabling is controlled by the swing arm position inputs.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
267 Circuit 7 type 268 Circuit 8 type
This parameter sets the side assignment for safety circuit This parameter sets the side assignment for safety circuit
number 7. number 8.
# 0 = side independent # 0 = side independent
Side enabling is controlled by the swing arm position inputs. Side enabling is controlled by the swing arm position inputs.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.14 I / O Parameters
Function Range / Option Program Code
Slot 1 board Empty 280

DC I/O
AC I/O
2-Ch. Analog Input
8-Ch. Analog Input
2-Ch. Meter Pulse
Enhanced I/O
Slot 2 board <same as above> 281
Program Code Definitions (280 to 372) ____________________________________________ Section 6 - 102

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.14 I / O Parameters (continued)
I/O Parameters contain data which defines the type of process # 2-Ch. Analog Input / 8-Ch. Analog Input
input / output signal card that is inserted in each card cage slot.
Physical I / O points are assigned logical functions by logical I 2-channel analog input board.
/ O points.
OR
ccc Slot # board 8-channel analog input board.
This parameter selects the type of board located in slot J#. The # 2-Ch. Meter Pulse
J number for the input / output board connector is the same as
the # in the parameter name. Flow meter pulse input board.
# Empty # Enhanced I/O
No card present. Enhanced injection input / output board.
# DC I/O
DC Voltage discrete input / output board.
# AC I/O
AC Voltage discrete input / output board.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

<Default / *>
Alarm control output 0 to number of discrete outputs <1> 287
287 Alarm control output
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for the

general alarm control output logical function. This output is
pulsed ON (CLOSED) when a Secondary alarm is active and is
steady ON (CLOSED) when a Primary alarm is active. (Note:
It is recommended that if this output is required, to reassign it
to logical output 4.)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Compnt Compnt Compnt Compnt

Function Range / Option 1 2 3 4
<Default / *>
Pump control output 0 to number of discrete outputs <8> 288 289 290 291
ccc Pump control output

product pump control output logical function. This output is
normally OFF and is maintained ON to run a product pump
motor.
Recommended discrete output assignments:
Component PC Discrete Output
1 288 3
2 289 7
3 290 11
4 291 15

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Valve 1 Valve 2 Valve 3 Valve 4
Solenoid 1 (upstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <7> 292 297 302 307
Solenoid 2 (downstream) 0 to number of discrete outputs <6> 293 298 303 308
Recommended discrete output assignments:
Logical Function PC Discrete Output
Valve 1- Solenoid 1 292 1


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Solenoid 1 (upstream)

corresponding solenoid 1 logical function. This output is used
to control the digitial flow control valve. Zero indicates “not
used”.
ccc Solenoid 2 (downstream)

corresponding solenoid 2 logical function. This output is used
to control the digital flow control valve. Zero indicates “not
used”.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Side detect method Sgl w/o sw. 312

Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)
Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)
Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)
Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)
Dbl 2 sw.
Pulse per unit output 1 0 to number of discrete outputs <9> 313
Pulse per unit output 2 0 to number of discrete outputs <10> 314
Trip 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs 315

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
312 Side detect method # Sgl 1 sw. (SW2)
This parameter selects the method of detecting one of three Single side with one swing arm switch.
possible positions of the product loading swing arm, based on SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = parked).
inputs from one or two swing arm position switches. Swing
arm switch input is dedicated to two physical discrete contact # Sgl 1 sw. (SW1)
closure inputs, accessible at the three connector terminal board
on the main processor board [SWING1 is swing arm input 1 Single side with one swing arm switch.
which is the rightward terminal on the main processor board] SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = parked.
[SWING2 is swing arm input 2 which is the leftward terminal
on the main processor board] [COMMON is the common # Dbl 1 sw. (SW2)
connection for both inputs and in the center terminal on the
main processor board]. (Note: The connections are labeled on Double side with one swing arm switch.
the aluminum board retainer plate.) SW2 CLOSED = side 1, SW2 OPEN = side 2;
(SW1 must be OPEN).
# Sgl w/o sw. # Dbl 1 sw. (SW1)
Single side without swing arm switch. Side 1 forced Double side with one swing arm switch.
active at all times. SW1 CLOSED = side 1, SW1 OPEN = side 2;
(SW2 must be OPEN).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.14 I/O Parameters (continued)
# Dbl 2 sw.
Double side with two swing arm switches,

SW2 CLOSED and SW1 OPEN = side 1;
SW2 OPEN and SW1 CLOSED = side 2;
SW2 OPEN and SW1 OPEN = parked.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

316 Trip 2 output
313 Pulse per unit output 1 This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for the
trip 2 output logical function. Output is ON during low flow
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for the startup and high flow (indicates low flow startup and high flow
pulse per unit output 1 logical function. The drive logic for this phases to external device).
output is setup by PC 128 Number of pulse per unit outputs,
129 Control meters, 130 Factor, 131 Pulse width (ms).
317 Trip 3 output
314 Pulse per unit output 2 This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for the
trip 2 output logical function. Output is ON from start of
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output for the delivery to final trip (OFF at same time as Solenoid 1 in
pulse per unit output 2 logical function. The drive logic for this standard digital valve application) (indicates delivery phase to
output is setup by PC 128 Number of pulse per unit outputs, external device).
132 Control meters, 133 Factor, 134 Pulse width (ms).
315 Trip 1 output

trip 1 output logical function. Output is ON during low flow
startup (indicates low flow startup phase to external device).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Meter1 Meter 2 Meter 3 Meter 4
Meter m temp input 0 to number of 318 324 330 336

RTD inputs
Meter m offset (Ohms) -20.00 to +20.00 319 325 331 337
Meter m pres input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc 320 326 332 338
inputs
Meter m dens input 0 to number of 4 to 20 mAdc 321 327 333 339
inputs
ccc Meter m temp input ccc Meter m offset (Ohms)
This parameter assigns a physical RTD process temperature

input, corresponding to a flow meter, to the RTD input logical This parameter sets the resistance compensation for wiring
function. between the RTD and the DanLoad 6000 RTD input terminals.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Meter m pres input
This parameter assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,

corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter pressure logical
function.
ccc Meter m dens input
This parameter assigns the physical 4 to 20 mAdc input,

corresponding to a flow meter, to the meter density logical
function.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Off-rack start/end 0 to number of discrete inputs 342

Auto/manual change-over 0 to number of discrete inputs 343
Primary alarm reset 0 to number of discrete inputs <3> 344
342 Off-rack start/end 343 Auto/manual change-over
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input which is This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the
used to signal the DanLoad 6000 to start and stop an off-rack auto/manual mode change-over logical function. This input
blending (or single product batch, dependent on recipe) selects the Auto Mode or Manual Mode of operation (input
loading operation. CLOSED = Auto Mode, input OPEN = Manual Mode). The
function is used to enable manual operation of the DanLoad
6000 in case of a failure of the terminal automation system.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
344 Primary alarm reset
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the

primary alarm reset logical function. Normal state = OPEN,
a momentary CLOSE of the input circuit resets oldest active
primary alarm. Another momentary CLOSE of the input circuit
resets the next oldest active primary alarm. all primary alarms
can be reset in this manner.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Safety circuit 1 0 to number of discrete inputs 345
Safety circuit 3 0 to number of discrete inputs < 2> 347
Safety circuit 4 0 to number of discrete inputs < 1> 348
RTD inputs Std 3850 * 353

Hi 3850
Low 3850
Std 3902
Hi 3902
Low 3902

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
345 Safety circuit 1 348 Safety circuit 4
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the
safety circuit 1 logical function. Logical control of this safety safety circuit 4 logical function. Logical control of this safety
circuit is performed by PC's 249 and 250. circuit is performed by PC's 255 and 256. An additional
function of this parameter is to enable the six recipe selection
inputs PC [361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366] Recipe x input.
346 Safety circuit 2 To enable this feature, set PC 348 Safety circuit 4 to 0 and
assign PC [361, 362, 363, 364, 365, 366] Recipe x input to
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the discrete inputs as required by the installation configuration.
safety circuit 2 logical function. Logical control of this safety
circuit is performed by PC's 251 and 252.
349 Safety circuit 5
347 Safety circuit 3 This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the circuit is performed by PC's 257, 258, and 265.
circuit is performed by PC's 253 and 254.

circuit is performed by PC's 259, 260, and 266.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
351 Safety circuit 7 353 RTD inputs
This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the This parameter defines the range of the RTD temperature inputs
safety circuit 7 logical function. Logical control of this safety located on the 2-channel and 8-channel analog input boards.
circuit is performed by PC's 261, 262, and 267. Selections are:
# Std 3850
RTD inputs are -40oC to 110oC, " = 0.003850
safety circuit 8 logical function. Logical control of this safety # Hi 3850
circuit is performed by PC's 263, 264, and 268.
RTD inputs are 50oC to 200oC, " = 0.003850
# Low 3850
RTD inputs are -200oC to -50oC, " = 0.003850

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Std 3902
RTD inputs are -40oC to 110oC, " = 0.003902
# Hi 3902
RTD inputs are 50oC to 200oC, " = 0.003902
# Low 3902
RTD inputs are -200oC to -50oC, " = 0.003902

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Primary LCD type Unknown 355

Standish
Optrex *
Old Optrex
Primary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 <455> 356
Primary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 <405> 357
Secondary LCD type Unknown 358
Standish
Optrex *
Old Optrex
Secondary LCD minimum light 0 to 1023 <455> 359
Secondary LCD maximum light 0 to 1023 <405> 360

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD type # Standish
This parameter selects the type of LCD (Liquid Crystal Standish LCD (maximum internal temperature = 70oC) with
Display), based on manufacturer, used in the local DanLoad the temperature sensor located just below the top edge of the
6000. When the LCD type is known, this information is used display.
to “auto-adjust” the LCD’s contrast for internal temperature
variations and also enables the display alarm feature, i.e. # Optrex
keypad/display disconnected or internal temperature too high.
There is no need to detect an internal temperature too-low Optrex “extended range” LCD (maximum internal
condition. The default value is “Optrex”. A few early temperature = 70oC) with the temperature sensor located
DanLoad 6000's had “Old Optrex” LCD’s marked “Y-LY” on just below the top edge of the display.
the back of Optrex’s LCD board (not on Daniel’s display board
to which Optrex’s display board is attached). Most DanLoad # Old Optrex
6000's shipped between 1993 and April 1996 have “Optrex”
LCD’s, usually marked “YJ-LY” on the back of Optrex’s LCD Optrex “standard range” LCD (maximum internal
board, though a few of the earlier “Optrex” LCD’s had the temperature = 60oC).
same mark as the “Old Optrex” LCD’s. Newer DanLoad
6000's have “Standish” LCD’s. Select one fo the following:
# Unknown
Automatic contrast adjustment, automatic backlighting

adjustment and display failure alarm are disabled.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD minimum light
This parameter sets the relative level of ambient light used to set
the backlighting of the display to maximum brightness.
# 0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default

is 455).
ccc <Primary | Secondary> LCD maximum light
This parameter sets the relative level of ambient light used to set
the backlighting of the display to minimum brightness
(backlighting off).
# 0 to 1023
A relative number related to the level of ambient light (default

is 405).

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Recipe 1 input 0 to number of discrete inputs 361

Recipe 1 output 0 to number of discrete outputs 367


______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Recipe r input ccc Recipe r output
This parameter selects the physical discrete input that is used to This parameter selects a physical discrete output that is
activate the corresponding recipe. This feature permits manual energized during an active batch load. The corresponding
switch or relay selection of one of six recipes from a remote output is energized at batch start or restart (before the pump
source (input CLOSE = recipe selected; input OPEN = recipe delay) and deenergized at batch end.
not selected).
The six recipe selection inputs are internally multiplexed into

PC 348 Safety circuit 4 input. Therefore, PC 348 Safety circuit
4 must be set to 0 to enable the 1 to 6 recipe selection inputs.
(Note: If PC 348 Safety circuit 4 is assigned to any input, the
recipe selection feature is disabled.)

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.15 Additive I / O Parameters
Range / Option
Ratio output 0 to number 380 383 386 389 392 395

discrete outputs
Feedback input 0 to number 381 384 387 390 393 396
discrete inputs
Selection input 0 to number 382 385 388 391 394 397
discrete inputs

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.15 Additive I / O Parameters (continued)
Additive I/O Parameters contain data which defines control of ccc Selection input
automatic injection of one to six additives.
This parameter assigns a discrete status input for the additive
selection logical function. The input is used to enable an
ccc Ratio output additive for injection from a remote device.
This parameter assigns a discrete control output for the additive

injector drive logical function. The output is used to actuate an
additive injector. Zero indicates “not used”.
ccc Feedback input
This parameter assigns a discrete status input for the injection

feedback (validation) logical function. The input is used to
verify that the additive injection mechanism was actuated by the
PC ccc Ratio output.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.16 Component I / O Parameters
Range / Option
Block valve output 0 to number 400 402 404 406

discrete outputs
Block valve input 0 to number 401 403 405 407
discrete inputs
Component I/O Parameters contain data which defines ccc Block valve input
automatic control of component block valves. Block valve
control discrete outputs can be assigned for single components This parameter assigns a physical discrete status input for the
or combinations of two, three, or four components. corresponding block valve input logical function.
ccc Block valve output

corresponding component block valve output logical function.
Program Code Definitions (400 through 422) _______________________________________ Section 6 - 128

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.16 Component I / O Parameters (continued)
Range / Option
Combination 1 1XXX 0 to number discrete outputs 408
Combination 2 X2XX 0 to number discrete outputs 409
Combination 3 12XX 0 to number discrete outputs 410
Combination 4 XX3X 0 to number discrete outputs 411
Combination 5 1X3X 0 to number discrete outputs 412
Combination 6 X23X 0 to number discrete outputs 413
Combination 7 123X 0 to number discrete outputs 414
Combination 8 XXX4 0 to number discrete outputs 415
Combination 9 1XX4 0 to number discrete outputs 416

Combination 10 X2X4 0 to number discrete outputs 417
Combination 11 12X4 0 to number discrete outputs 418
Combination 12 XX34 0 to number discrete outputs 419
Combination 13 1X34 0 to number discrete outputs 420
Combination 14 X234 0 to number discrete outputs 421
Combination 15 1234 0 to number discrete outputs 422

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

411 Combination 4 XX3X
408 Combination 1 1XXX
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to a
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to a block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is
block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended
CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended (selected by the active recipe).
(selected by the active recipe). [component 3 only]
[component 1 only]
409 Combination 2 X2XX 412 Combination 5 1X3X
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to a This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to a
block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is
CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended
(selected by the active recipe). (selected by the active recipe)
[component 2 only] [components 1 and 3]
410 Combination 3 12XX 413 Combination 6 X23X
(selected by the active recipe). (selected by the active recipe).
[components 1 and 2] [components 2 and 3]

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
414 Combination 7 123X 416 Combination 9 1XX4
[components 1, 2, and 3] [components 1 and 4]
415 Combination 8 XXX4 417 Combination 10 X2X4
[component 4 only] [components 2 and 4]

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
418 Combination 11 12X4 421 Combination 14 X234
[components 1, 2, and 4] [components 2, 3, and 4]
419 Combination 12 XX34 422 Combination 15 1234
[components 3 and 4] [components 1, 2, 3, and 4]
420 Combination 13 1X34
This parameter assigns a physical discrete control output to a

block valve, block valves, or other device. This output is
CLOSED when the indicated components are being blended
(selected by the active recipe).
[components 1, 3, and 4]

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters

Range / Option
Buoyancy 0.0000 to 9.9999 < 0> 426
Tem perature units C (Celsius) 427

F (Fahrenheit)
D ensity units lb/ft3 428

kg/m 3
g/cm 3
Pressure units psi 429

Pa
in. H 2O
in. H g
bar
m bar
Reference tem perature -99.9 to 999.9 < 15.0> 430
Sam ple qty 0 to 9999 < 100> 431
Tem perature option O ff 432 435 438 441

Linear
A PI 6A
A PI 6B
A PI 6C
A PI 24A
A PI 24B
A PI 54A
A PI 54B
A PI 54C
N /A 1-5
C hina
A lpha 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 433 436 439 442

< 0.0005100>
Backup tem perature -99.9 to 999.9 < 15.0> 434 437 440 443

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.17 Temperature / Pressure / Density

(continued)
Temperature / Pressure / Density Parameters contain data that # C Celsius

defines the calculation methods used to compute the values of
Ctl (correction for the effect of temperature of the liquid) and # F Fahrenheit
Cpl (correction for the effect of pressure of the liquid).
428 Density units

426 Buoyancy
This parameter selects the density units to be used in
This program code sets the density adjustment for buoyancy in calculations, displays, and logs.
air. The position of the “floating decimal point” depends on the
density/gravity scale (PC 046). # lb/ft3 pounds per cubic foot
# kg/m3 kilograms per cubic meter

427 Temperature units
# g/cm3 grams per cubic centimeter
(Note: Applicable only if the ccc Temperature option is set to
Off or Linear. Selection of an API table automatically selects
the temperature units.) This parameter selects the temperature
units to be used in calculations, displays, and logs.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
429 Pressure units 430 Reference temperature
This parameter selects the pressure unit to be used in This is the reference temperature (T) for the “linear equation”,
calculations, displays, and logs. “6C” and “54C” Ctl options (PC 432, etc.). This program code
also controls temperature correction to a non-standard reference
# psi pounds per square inch temperature. When a Ctl option (PC 432, etc. per component)
with a standard reference temperature, e.g. 60.0oF for API
# Pa Pascals Table 6A, is selected, the reference temperature (PC 430) is
automatically modified to the standard reference temperature.
# in. H2O inches water column Entering a reference temperature other than the standard
reference temperature causes temperature correction to the non-
# in. Hg inches mercury standard reference temperature to be performed.
# bar bar
431 Sample qty
# mbar millibar
This parameter sets the quantity based temperature sampling
frequency used during a batch delivery. The process
temperature is sampled at the start of a batch delivery and
thereafter each time the number of quantity units indicated by
this parameter have been accumulated.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
ccc Temperature option # Linear
This parameter selects the method of temperature compensation The following linear equation is used to calculate
of the process liquid. temperature compensation.
CTL = 1 - ((t - T) * "T)

# Off
where:
Disable temperature compensation. If the meter pulse
input is not temperature compensated at the flow meter, CTL = Correction for the effect of temperature on a
the DanLoad 6000 calculations produce API gross liquid.
quantity which is the indicated quantity (meter t = Observed temperature from an RTD input or
registration) times the meter factor. Note that the the fixed entry in PC ccc Backup
temperature correction option (Ctl) is 1.0, i.e. standard temperature.
quantity = gross quantity. T = Reference temperature from PC
ccc Reference temperature.
"T = Coefficient of thermal expansion for the
liquid at base temperature, from PC
ccc Alpha.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API Temperature Compensation Tables:
# API 6A # API 6B
Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to Generalized products, correction of quantity to 60

60 degrees Fahrenheit against API gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit against API gravity at 60 degrees
degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs are API Fahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60
gravity at 60 degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc
from PC ccc Backup density/gravity and the Backup density/gravity and the operating temperature
operating temperature obtained from the RTD obtained from the RTD input or from PC ccc Backup
input or from PC ccc Backup temperature, temperature, ranges for the table are:
ranges for the table are: API Gravity Temp. deg. F.
API Gravity Temp. deg. F. 0 to 40 0 to 300

40 to 50 0 to 250
0 to 40 0 to 300 50 to 85 0 to 200
40 to 50 0 to 250
50 to 100 0 to 200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API 6C The equation used to calculate API table 6C indicated below.

It is independent of a group or substance and can be used with
Individual and special applications, correction of any valid thermal expansion factor.
quantity to 60 degrees Fahrenheit against a thermal
expansion coefficient at 60 degrees Fahrenheit. The CTL= EXP[-"T * )t (1 + 0.8"T * )t)]
table inputs are thermal expansion coefficient at 60
degrees Fahrenheit obtained from PC ccc Alpha and the where:
operating temperature obtained from the RTD input or
from PC ccc Backup temperature, ranges for the table CTL= Correction for the effect of temperature on a liquid.
are: "T = Coefficient of thermal expansion for the liquid at
base temperature, from PC ccc Alpha.
Alpha * 106 Temp. deg. F. )t = t-T
t = Observed temperature from an RTD input or the
270 to 510 0 to 300 fixed entry in PC ccc Backup temperature.
510 to 530 0 to 250 T = Reference temperature from the PC
530 to 930 0 to 200 ccc Reference temperature.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API 24A # API 24B
Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to 60 Generalized products, correction of quantity to 60 degrees
degrees Fahrenheit against relative density 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit against relative density 60/60 degrees
Fahrenheit. The table inputs are relative density 60/60 Fahrenheit. The table inputs are relative density 60/60
degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc Backup degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc Backup
density/gravity and the operating temperature obtained density/gravity and the operating temperature obtained from
from the RTD input or from PC ccc Backup the RTD input or from PC ccc Backup temperature, ranges
temperature, ranges for the table are: for the table are:
Relative Density Temp.(deg. F) Relative Density Temp.(deg. F)
0.8250 to 1.0760 0 to 300 0.8250 to 1.0760 0 to 300

0.7795 to 0.8250 0 to 250 0.7795 to 0.8250 0 to 250
0.6110 to 0.7795 0 to 200 0.6535 to 0.7795 0 to 200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API 54A # API 54B
Generalized crude oils, correction of quantity to 15 Generalized products, correction of quantity to 15 degrees
degrees Celsius against density at 15 degrees Celsius. Celsius against density at 15 degrees Celsius. The table
The table inputs are density at 15 degrees Celsius inputs are density at 15 degrees Celsius obtained live or
obtained live or from PC ccc Backup density/gravity and from PC ccc Backup density/gravity and the operating
the operating temperature obtained from the RTD input temperature obtained from the RTD input or from PC ccc
or from PC ccc Backup temperature, ranges for the Backup temperature, ranges for the table are:
table are:
Density (kg/m3) Temp. deg. C.
Density (kg/m3) Temp. deg. C.
653 to 778 -18 to +95
610 to 778 -18 to +95 778 to 824 -18 to +125
778 to 824 -18 to +125 824 to 1075 -18 to +150
824 to 1075 -18 to +150

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API 54C The equation used to calculate API table 54C is indicated below.
It is independent of a group or substance and can be used with
Individual and special applications, correction of any valid thermal expansion factor.
quantity to 15 degrees Celsius against a thermal
expansion coefficient at 15 degrees Celsius. The table CTL = EXP[-"T * )t (1 + 0.8"T * )t)]
inputs are thermal expansion coefficient at 15 degrees
Celsius obtained from PC ccc Alpha and the operating where:
temperature obtained from the RTD input or from PC
ccc Backup temperature, ranges for the table are: CTL= Correction for the effect of temperature on a liquid.
"T = Coefficient of thermal expansion for the liquid at
Alpha * 106 Temp. deg. C. base temperature, from PC ccc Alpha.
)t = t-T
486 to 918 -18 to +150 t = Observed temperature from an RTD input or the
918 to 954 -18 to +125 fixed entry in PC ccc Backup temperature.
954 to 1674 -18 to +95 T = Reference temperature from PC
ccc Reference.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# N/A 1 to N/A 5 cc Alpha
Temperature correction is not applicable. These options This parameter sets the coefficient of thermal expansion (("T)
have the same effect as setting to “OFF”. used by the linear equation or the API tables 6C or 54C. The
default value is 0.0005100
# China
ccc Backup temperature
This setting is similar to “Linear” Ctl method, but using
a look-up table for the coefficient of the thermal This parameter sets the fixed temperature value to use for the
expansion ("20) based on component density at 20oC per corresponding component in case of a failure of the live
China Xinxing project. temperature input from the RTD. The default value is 15.0.
The temperature units for this parameter are determined by the
selection of PC 427 Temperature units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
Range / Option
Pressure option Off 444 447 450 453
Const
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
F-factor 0 to 999999999 445 448 451 454
Vapor pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 446 449 452 455
Density/gravity option Off * 456 458 460 462

On
Backup density/gravity 0.00 to 100.00 457 459 461 463

for API 6A, 6B, 6C
0.6110 to 1.0760
for API 24A, 24B
610.5 to 1075.0
for API 54A, 54B, 54C
610.5 to 1075.0
for IP 60A, IP 60B

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
ccc Pressure option CPL = Correction for the effect of pressure

on a liquid.
PC ccc Pressure option selects the method of pressure operating
compensation. The following selections are available. pressure = The pressure obtained from a
pressure transmitter.
# Off equilibrium
pressure = The equilibrium vapor pressure
Disable pressure compensation. obtained from PC
ccc Vapor pressure.
# Const F-factor = The compressibility factor for the
liquid obtained from PC
The following linear equation is used to calculate ccc F-factor.
pressure compensation.
1
C PL = ---------------------------------
[1 - (operating pressure -
equilibrium pressure) F-factor]
where:

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# API Pressure Compensation Tables: # 11.2.2
# 11.2.1 Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to

Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to 0 pounds 0 pounds per square inch against relative density
per square inch against API gravity at 60 degrees 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit. The table inputs are
Fahrenheit. The table inputs are API gravity at 60 relative density at 60/60 degrees Fahrenheit obtained
degrees Fahrenheit obtained live or from PC ccc live or from PC ccc Backup density/gravity and the
Backup density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from F-factor obtained from PC ccc F-factor and the
PC ccc F-factor and the operating pressure obtained operating pressure obtained from a pressure
from a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are: transmitter, ranges for the table are:
API Gravity Temp.(deg.F) Pressure (PSI) Rel.Density Temp.(dg.F) Press(PSI)
0 to 90 -20 to +200 0 to 1500 0.350 to 0.637 -50 to +140 0 to 2200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
# 11.2.1M # 11.2.2M
Hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to 0 Light hydrocarbon liquids, correction of quantity to

kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degrees 0 kiloPascals against absolute density at 15 degrees
Celsius. The table inputs are absolute density at 15 Celsius. The table inputs are absolute density at 15
degrees Celsius obtained live or from PC ccc Backup degrees Celsius obtained live or from PC ccc Backup
density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from PC ccc density/gravity and the F-factor obtained from PC
F-factor and the operating pressure obtained from a ccc F-factor and the operating pressure obtained
pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are: from a pressure transmitter, ranges for the table are:
Abs.Dns.(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
Abs.Dns(kg/m3) Temp.(deg.C) Press(kPa)
638 to 1074 -30 to +90 0 to 10300
350 to 637 -46 to +60 0 to 15200

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
ccc F-factor ccc Backup density/gravity
This parameter sets the constant F-factor used in pressure This parameter sets the value of the density (or gravity) to used
compensation calculations (CPL). in calculations when a live analog input is not available. Entries
in this field are validated in the following manner:
ccc Vapor pressure Temperature Option Valid Entry
This parameter sets the equilibrium vapor pressure (pressure at 6A, 6B, 6C 0.00 to 100.00 API gravity
which the liquid changes to a gas at operating temperature) for
the corresponding component. 24A, 24B 0.6110 to 1.0760 relative
density
ccc Density/gravity option Off, Linear, 610.5 to 1075.0 kg/m3

54A, 54B, 54C
This parameter selects the status of using density inputs in the
flow calculations.
# Off
# On

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
Range / Option
Pressure @4 mA 0 to 9999.9 464 468 472 476

<0.0>
Pressure @20 mA 0 to 9999.9 465 469 473 477
<0.0>
Density @4 mA 466 470 474 478
Density @20 mA 467 471 475 479

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
ccc Pressure @4 mA
Zero scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering unit

specified by PC 429 Pressure units.
ccc Pressure @20 mA
Full scale for pressure input from transmitter. Engineering

units specified by PC 429 Pressure units.
ccc Density @4 mA
Zero scale for density input from transmitter. Engineering units

specified by PC 428 Density units.
ccc Density @20 mA
Full scale for density input from transmitter. Engineering units

specified by PC 428 Density units.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.18 Recipes
Range / Option Recipe Number

Function <Default / *> 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of recipes 0 to 30 <1> 480

Name 1 to 16 chars 481 487 493 499 505 511 517 523 529 535
<Recipe #1>
Component 1 % 0 to 100 <100> 482 488 494 500 506 512 518 524 530 536
Component 2 % 0 to 100 483 489 495 501 507 513 519 525 531 537
Component 3 % 0 to 100 484 490 496 502 508 514 520 526 532 538
Component 4 % 0 to 100 485 491 497 503 509 515 521 527 533 539
Sequence to load nnnn 486 492 498 504 510 516 522 528 534 540

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.18 Recipes (continued)

Name 1 to 16 chars 541 547 553 559 565 571 577 583 589 595
Component 1 % 0 to 100 542 548 554 560 566 572 578 584 590 596
Component 2 % 0 to 100 543 549 555 561 567 573 579 585 591 597
Component 3 % 0 to 100 544 550 556 562 568 574 580 586 592 598
Component 4 % 0 to 100 545 551 557 563 569 575 581 587 593 599

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Name 1 to 16 chars 601 607 613 619 625 631 637 643 649 655
Component 1 % 0 to 100 602 608 614 620 626 632 638 644 650 656
Component 2 % 0 to 100 603 609 615 621 627 633 639 645 651 657
Component 3 % 0 to 100 604 610 616 622 628 634 640 646 652 658
Component 4 % 0 to 100 605 611 617 623 629 635 641 647 653 659

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Recipe Parameters contain data which defines the percentage of ccc Component 1 %
each of one to four components that can be blended into a
composite liquid for deliveries. Single components are assigned This parameter sets the percentage of this component used in the
recipe names so that the component can be referred to by a delivered blend.
common name (example: gasoline in place of component 2).
In the case of a single component delivery, PC ccc Component
# % value for that component is 100 percent. ccc Component 2 %
This parameter sets the percentage of this component used in the

480 Number of recipes delivered blend.
This parameter sets the total number of recipes. At least one

recipe must be defined. ccc Component 3 %

ccc Name delivered blend.
This parameter contains the name used in displays and logs to

identify the recipe. ccc Component 4 %

delivered blend.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Sequence to load
(Note: Applicable to sequential blending only.) This parameter

selects the sequence to deliver the components. The sum of the
recipe selected component percentages must equal 100 percent.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.19 Data Communications
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Ch. A Ch. B Multi-drop Network
DUART address 0 to 255 <0> 661
Network address 0 to 255 <0> 662
COM# Mode Not used * 663 668

Modbus RTU
ASCII
Data logging
COM# Data Rate 300 bps 664 669

600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
38400 bps
COM# Word Size 5 bits 665 670

6 bits
7 bits
8 bits
COM# Stop Bits 1 bit 666 671

1-1/2 bits
2 bits

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
COM# Parity None 667 672

Odd
Even
6.19 Data Communications (continued)
Data Communications Parameters contain data which defines 662 Network address
operating parameters for the one or two serial ports and the
network port. Serial ports can be used for communications with This parameter sets the address used by a network master for bi-
a Terminal Automation System, host computer, and data directional data communications with the DanLoad 6000. The
logging printer or device. The network port can be used for parameter is set by a DIP switch located on the network
communications with a Terminal Automation System or other module.
host computer.
Each DanLoad 6000 in a network communications link must
have a unique address.
661 DUART address
This parameter sets the address used by a terminal automation

system or other host computer for bi-directional data
communications with the DanLoad 6000. This parameter is set
by a DIP switch located on the DUART module.
Each DanLoad 6000 on an RS-485 multi-drop data

communications link must have a unique address.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.19 Data Communications (continued) alpha-numeric data printer or other data logging device.
663 Mode
This parameter selects the protocol used for data ccc Data rate
communications with an external device, such as a data printer,
a terminal automation system, or other host computer. This parameter selects the bits per second data rate used by this
port.
# Not used
This port is not assigned. ccc Word size
This parameter selects the data word length in bits.

# Modbus RTU
Modicon Modbus RTU (binary) protocol. ccc Stop bits
# ASCII This parameter selects of the number of stop bits used in serial
data transmission.
DanLoad 6000 ASCII protocol.
# Data logging
Send data logs to this port, can be connected to an

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.19 Data Communications (continued)
ccc Parity
This parameter selects the parity checking method.
# None
Parity checking in not performed.
# Odd
Odd parity checking is performed.
# Even
Even parity checking is performed.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.20 Dynamic Data Display

Enabled No 679
Y es *
Elem ent 1 data code 3 digit data display code 680

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.20 Dynamic Data Display (continued)
Dynamic Data Display Parameters contain data which defines 680 Element 1 data code
from one to sixteen operating parameters that can be viewed at
any time while the DanLoad 6000 is operating in the loading This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the
mode. The viewable data elements are displayed in four groups page 1, line 1 position in the Dynamic Data Display.
with four elements in each group. The dynamic data variables
that can be assigned to each element (viewable record) are
selected by entry of a one to three digit identifying number 681 Element 2 data code
(Dynamic Data Display Data Code). These Data Codes are
listed in Section 6.20.1. This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the
page 1, line 2 position in the Dynamic Data Display.
680 Element 1 data code

682 Element 3 data code
This parameter enables or disables the dynamic data display.
This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the
# No The dynamic data display is disabled. page 1, line 3 position in the Dynamic Data Display.
# Yes The dynamic data display can be invoked by

pressing the “SELECT” key in the loading 683 Element 4 data code
screen.
This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the
page 1, line 4 position in the Dynamic Data Display.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
684 Element 5 data code 688 Element 9 data code
This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the This parameter selects display of a specified data variable at the
page 2, line 1 position in the Dynamic Data Display. page 3, line 1 position in the Dynamic Data Display.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.20.1 Dynamic Data Display Data Codes
Up to sixteen of the Dynamic Data Display Data Codes listed Code Display Data Function
below can be selected for inclusion in the Dynamic Data 013 Mtr 1 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate
014 Mtr 1 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2
Display. The label and the current value of these variables can 015 Mtr 1 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3
be displayed in a window, superimposed in the center area of 016 Mtr 1 pls flrt4 pulse count at flow rate 4
017 Mtr 1 grs nauth unauthorized gross quantity
the Loading Display. Up to four windows, each window 018 Mtr 1 std nauth unauthorized standard quantity
019 Mtr 1 grs start start gross quantity
containing four dynamic data elements can be defined. The 020 Mtr 1 std start start standard quantity
dynamic data is displayable while in the Loading Mode by
Flow Meter 2 Data
pressing the SELECT key. The 9 and 8 arrow keys are used
to change the display pages. The CLEAR key removes the 021 Mtr 2 grs total gross transaction quantity
022 Mtr 2 std total standard transaction quantity
Dynamic Data Display window from the Loading Display. 023 Mtr 2 grs batch gross batch quantity
024 Mtr 2 std batch standard batch quantity
025 Mtr 2 flw rate instantaneous flow rate
Code Display Data Function 026 Mtr 2 ave flw rate average flow rate
027 Mtr 2 max flw rate maximum flow rate this batch
Batch Data 028 Mtr 2 factor meter factor
029 Mtr 2 pls cnt pulse count total
001 Arm position swing arm position indicator 030 Mtr 2 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate
002 Grs batch qty gross batch quantity 031 Mtr 2 pls flrt2 pulse count at flow rate 2
003 Std batch qty standard batch quantity 032 Mtr 2 pls flrt3 pulse count at flow rate 3
Flow Meter 1 Data 034 Mtr 2 grs nauth unauthorized gross quantity
035 Mtr 2 std nauth unauthorized standard quantity
004 Mtr 1 grs total gross transaction quantity 036 Mtr 2 grs start start gross quantity
005 Mtr 1 std total standard transaction quantity 037 Mtr 2 std start start standard quantity
006 Mtr 1 grs batch gross batch quantity
009 Mtr 1 ave flw rate average flow rate
011 Mtr 1 factor meter factor

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)
Code Display Data Function

Flow Meter 4 Data
Flow Meter 3 Data
055 Mtr 4 grs total gross transaction quantity
038 Mtr 3 grs total gross transaction quantity
064 Mtr 4 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate
047 Mtr 3 pls flrt1 pulse count at low flow rate
071 Mtr 4 std start start standard quantity
054 Mtr 3 std start start standard quantity
Component 1 Data
072 Cmp 1 grs batch component gross quantity, batch

073 Cmp 1 std batch component standard quantity, batch
074 Cmp 1 curr temp component current temperature
075 Cmp 1 ave temp component batch average temp
076 Cmp 1 ave vlv cls comp. average FCV closure time
077 Cmp 1 batch % component # % from recipe

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)

Additive Injection Data (Batch)
Component 2 Data
096 Add 1 total accumulated additive volume
Delivery Quantity Data
Component 3 Data
102 Preset qty Preset entry in Loading Display
103 Mtr 1 grs load accumulated total (n.nn)
Pressure and Density Data
Component 4 Data
107 Cmp 1 ave dens average density, component 1
108 Cmp 1 ave pres average pressure, component 1

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

(continued)

Component Blend Ratio
Additive Data for Batch
122 Cmp 1 % comp 1 % for blend ratio adj
115 Add 1 batch additive 1 volume this/last batch
Quantity Correction Factor for Load
126 Mtr 1 Ctl meter 1
Total Flow Rate
121 Flow rate load flow rate

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.21 Data Logging
Range / Option
Batch summary Off * 696
On
Transaction summary Off * 697

On
Alarm log Off * 698

On
Power fail log Off * 699

On
Program mode entry/exit Off * 700

On
W&M switch opened/closed Off * 701

On
Program value change log Off * 702

On
Meter proving run log Off * 703

On
Crash memory summary Off * 704

On

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.21 Data Logging (continued)
Data Logging Parameters are used to enable or disable the data 697 Transaction summary
logging function for nine groups of related data (reports) and
individual events. This parameter enables or disables logging of transaction
summary data.
696 Batch summary # Off
This parameter enables or disables logging of batch summary Disable logging of transaction summary data.
data.
# On
# Off
Enable logging of transaction summary data.
Disable logging of batch summary data.
# On
Enable logging of batch summary data.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
698 Alarm log 700 Program mode entry/exit
This parameter enables or disables logging of alarms. This parameter enables or disables logging of program mode
entry / exit events data.
# Off
# Off
Disable logging of alarms.
Disable logging of program mode entry / exit events.
# On
# On
Enable logging of alarms.
Enable logging of program mode entry / exit events.
699 Power fail log
This parameter enables or disables logging of power fail.
# Off
Disable logging of power fail.
# On
Enable logging of power fail data.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
701 W&M switch opened/closed 702 Program value change log
This parameter enables or disables logging of Weights and This parameter is enables or disables logging of program code
Measures switch open / close events. value change event.
# Off # Off
Disable logging of Weights and Measures switch open / Disable logging of Program Code value change event.
close events.
# On
# On
Enable logging of Program Code value change event.
Enable logging of Weights and Measures switch open /
close events.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
703 Master proving run log 704 Crash memory summary
This parameter is enables or disables logging of master This parameter is enables or disables logging of Crash memory
proving run log. summary data.
# Off # Off
Disable logging of master proving run log. Disable logging of Crash memory summary data.
# On # On
Enable logging of master proving run log. Enable logging of Crash memory summary data.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.22 Blending
Range / Option
Rate reduction 0 to 9999 <100> 712
Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 <50> 713
Clean line qty 0 to 9999 <0> 714
Low prop fac 1 to 4 <1> 715
Correct after qty 0 to 9999 <100> 716
Alarm after qty 0 to 9999 <200> 717
Adjustment qty 0 to 9999 <50> 718
Comp % display Gross * 719
Std
Program Code Definitions (710 to 799) ___________________________________________ Section 6 - 176

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.22 Blending (continued)
Blending Parameters, PC's 710 to 770 are used to define the 714 Clean line qty
method of handling a product blending process. Various
parameters in this group interact with other parameters, This parameter defines the quantity of the primary component
dependent on the type of blending process defined by PC 026 to load at the end of the batch delivery to purge the blend from
Unit type. Details on configuration of each type of blending the loading lines.
operation are contained in Section 3 - Setup.
715 Low prop fac

712 Rate reduction
This parameter defines the flow rate at which to deliver
This parameter defines the flow rate reduction [high (normal) components that are low percentage quantities in comparison to
flow rate minus PC 712 Rate reduction] that is used if the high the primary component of the blend.
flow rate cannot be maintained.
716 Correct after qty

713 Low flow start qty
This parameter defines the quantity of the blend to deliver
This parameter defines the quantity to load at the low flow rate before blend adjustment begins.
before increasing the flow rate to high (normal) flow rate.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
717 Alarm after qty
This parameter defines the quantity of the blend to deliver

before enabling the checking and action of the blend ratio alarm
function that generates the message: Unable to maintain blend.
718 Adjustment qty
This parameter defines the blend quantity to consider when

adjusting the flow, via flow control valves, to maintain the
blend ratio.
719 Comp % display
This parameter defines the quantity basis (gross or standard) on

which the batch component percentages are computed for
display.
# Gross
# Std

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Blend error method Grspctbatch * 722

Stdpctbatch
Grsqtydiff
Stdqtydiff
Grspctsmpl
Stdpctsmpl
Flrtsmpl
Max dev % 0 to 999 <2> 723
Blend tol % 0 to 999 <5> 724
Max dev qty 0 to 9999 <20> 725
Blend tol qty 0 to 9999 <40> 726
Blend sample qty 0 to 9999 <10> 727

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.22 Blending (continued) used in the batch delivery calculations.
722 Blend error method
This parameter defines the method for computing blend ratio # Grspctsmpl
adjustments and sensing blend ratio error conditions.
Samples of the gross quantity percentages of each blend
# Grspctbatch component are used in the batch delivery calculations.
Gross quantity percentages of each blend component are used in # Stdpctsmpl

batch delivery calculations.
Samples of the standard quantity percentages of each blend
# Stdpctbatch component are used in the batch delivery calculations.
Standard quantity percentages of each blend component are used # Flrtsmpl

in the batch delivery calculations.
The sampled flow rates of each blend component are used in the
# Grsqtydiff batch delivery calculations.
Gross quantity difference between each blend component are

used in the batch delivery calculations.
# Stdqtydiff
Standard quantity difference between each blend component are

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
723 Max dev % 726 Blend tol qty
This parameter defines the maximum percentage deviation for This parameter defines the maximum quantity tolerance allowed
the blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component for the blend before generating an Unable to maintain blend
of the blend. alarm.
724 Blend tol % 727 Blend sample qty
This parameter defines the maximum percentage tolerance This parameter defines the blend quantity to deliver between
allowed for the blend before generating an Unable to maintain calculations of blend ratio by percentage and quantity methods.
blend alarm. If the blend error method is selected as “Grspctsmpl”,
“stdpctsmpl” or “Flrtsmpl”, the recommended value for blend
sample qty is 30 or higher.
725 Max dev qty
This parameter defines the maximum quantity deviation for the

blend and is used in adjusting the ratio of each component of the
blend.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Flow adj fac 0.00 to 9.99 728 734 740 746

<1.00>
Ratio adj fac 0.00 to 9.99 729 735 741 747
<1.00>
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Compt 1 Compt 2 Compt 3 Compt 4
Stop rate 0 to 99999 752 758 764 770

<120>

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
ccc Flow adj fac
This parameter defines a factor for each flow meter used in the
blend. The factor provides fine tuning of individual flow rates
for blend ratio adjustment.
ccc Ratio adj fac
This parameter defines a factor for each component of the

blend. The factor provides fine tuning for individual
components for blend ratio adjustment.
ccc Stop rate
This parameter defines the low flow rate for each component of
the blend to use during delivery of the stop quantity at the end
of the delivery. The total blend flow rate is the sum of the ccc
Stop rate for each component of the blend.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11-20 R21-30
Low flow 0 to 99999 776 778 780 782 784 786 788 790 792 794 796 798
rate <200>
High flow 0 to 99999 777 779 781 783 785 787 789 791 793 795 797 799
rate <600>
ccc Low flow rate ccc High flow rate
This parameter defines the low flow rate setpoint for the batch This parameter defines the high flow rate setpoint for the batch
recipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each have recipe loading profile. Recipes 1 through 10 each have
independent low flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20 independent high flow rate setpoints. Recipes 11 through 20
share one low flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through 30 share share one common high flow rate setpoint. Recipes 21 through
one low flow rate setpoint. 30 share one common high flow rate setpoint.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
CONTINUE

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves
Range / Option
Function <Default / *> Add 1 Add 2 Add 3 Add 4 Add 5 Add 6
Pump output 0 to number of 800 806 812 818 824 830

discrete outputs
Block valve output 0 to number of 801 807 813 819 825 831
discrete outputs
Program Code Definitions (800 to 831) _____________________________________________________ 6 - 188

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
6.23 Additive Pumps / Block Valves (continued)
This group of parameters is used to assign the discrete control

outputs which control additive injector pumps and additive line
block valves. Assigned and active additive pumps and control
valves are opened when the batch load is started. Additives are
then injected under control of PC ccc Ratio output for each
additive. An additive block valve is closed after the last PC ccc
Ratio output for the batch delivery is completed. An additive
pump is stopped at the time the batch delivery is stopped.
ccc Pump output
This parameter assigns a physical discrete output for controlling

RUN / STOP of an additive injector pump.
ccc Block valve output
This parameter assigns a physical discrete output for controlling

OPEN / CLOSE of an additive line block valve.

______________________________________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000

Appendix A
Installation Worksheets
Input / Output Signal
Configuration
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This appendix contains worksheets to be used for documenting input / output signal assignments.
These worksheets can be used to define the relation between the physical input / output signal
channels and the logical channels (functions) of the DanLoad 6000. The worksheets also contain
information that can be used in generating wire lists and / or wiring diagrams for the installation.
An overview of the contents of the worksheets is provided below.
# Worksheet 1
General overview of the system and guide to other worksheets.
# Worksheet 2
Overview of the input / output signal capability of several standard input / output board
configurations. This worksheet aids in determining the required input / output signal
board complement after completing the other worksheets.
# Worksheets 3 through 7b
Contain terminal wiring information for all process signal boards that can be installed in
slots J1 through J7. The Board Channel is determined by the electrical design of the
board. The Assigned Channel is determined automatically by the DanLoad 6000 and is
solely dependent on the board complement of the instrument and the location of each
board. These physical channels are assigned to logical channels and documented using
worksheets 12 through 16.
# Worksheets 8 through 11
Contain terminal wiring information for the DC power supply, swing arm and DUART.
These worksheets are provided for system wiring documentation only, the terminal /
channel assignments cannot be changed.
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 1
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
# Worksheets 12 through 16
Contain information on the assignable logical channels (functions), the physical input /
output channels indicated in Worksheets 3 through 7 are assigned to logical channels
(functions) which are identified by program codes. The numbers indicated in the columns
indicate the identifying number of the corresponding flow meter, component, flow control
valve, or additive (these numbers are not signal count numbers as is the case in the
physical signal termination worksheets, 3 through 7).
# Physical input channels are assignable to the following logical input channels
# Four flow meter pulse
# Four RTD process temperature
# Four 4 to 20 mAdc process pressure or density
# Forty-three assignable status functions
# Two non-assignable swing arm status (on main processor board)
# Physical output channels are assignable to the following logical output

channels
# Forty-three assignable control functions
# Two non-assignable optically isolated raw pulse outputs (two for each
meter pulse board)
Note: The number of logical channels (functions) that can be assigned to physical
discrete input and output channels is greater than the number of available physical discrete
channels. Some logical discrete input and output functions are mutually exclusive and
cannot be configured simultaneously.
2 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A set of worksheets for each DanLoad 6000 (unit) should be photocopied. Multiple copies of
Worksheets 3 through 7b, one copy for each installed board, should be made. The unit number
assigned to each DanLoad 6000 is derived as described below. If the DanLoad 6000 will
communicate with a data logging device or terminal automation system, each instrument must
be assigned a unit number. This assignment is accomplished by DIP switches located on both the
DUART and local area network modules. The range of the unit number is 1 to 255. A multi-
drop network implemented with the RS-485 port (DUART) has an electrical limit of 32 units to
one RS-485 master port. However, the unit numbers of these 32 units can be any unique number
within the range of 1 to 255. If both the DUART and local area network modules are installed,
it is advisable to use the same unit number for both modules to simplify delivery accounting data.
If neither communications module is installed, it is advisable to use the same number range, 1
to 255, to a assign unit number for each DanLoad 6000. This will avoid the need to renumber
the units if data logging and / or terminal automation system communications are added in the
future.
The worksheets should be used to document the configuration of each DanLoad 6000 during the
initial setup procedure. Channel number series within the DanLoad 6000 are identified by header
messages that indicate the series type or application. An example is the header message: Discrete
outputs. When entering channel data into the worksheets, add the following tag identifications
to the channel numbers to clearly identify each channel.
Tag-Channel Number Channel Type

FT-# Meter pulse input (# range is 1 to 4)
TE-# RTD input (# range is 1 to 4)
XT-# 4 to 20 mAdc analog input (# range is 1 to 4)
ACI-# Discrete Vac input (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete
AC inputs located on all AC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)
ACO-# Discrete Vac output (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete
AC outputs located on all AC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 3
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Tag-Channel Number Channel Type

DCI-# Discrete Vdc input (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete
DC inputs located on all DC I/O and Enhanced AC I/O boards)
DCO-# Discrete Vdc output (# range is 1 to maximum number of discrete
DC outputs located on all DC I/O and Meter pulse boards)
Data should be entered in the worksheets in the following manner.
# The number of physical devices present and the number of components and additives
should be entered into Worksheet 1. This worksheet provides an overview of the system
configuration.
# Enter the primary information such as number of flow meter pulse inputs, number of
swing arm inputs, and serial communications into Worksheet 2. This worksheet indicates
common and recommended input / output signal board configurations. The current board
complement and board location in the DanLoad 6000 can be entered at this time.
# The initial setup procedure should be performed at this time. Section 3 provides
information on the initial setup procedure. After the initial setup procedure has been
performed, the assigned physical hardware channel for each input / output channel can
be determined in the following manner. While operating in the Program Mode, press the
ALT+ 0 key to display the physical hardware configuration of the instrument. The first
display page shows the type of boards installed in slots J1 through J7. This board
complement should be entered in Worksheet 2. Scroll through the I/O assignment display
pages using the 9 and 8 arrow keys. Manually enter the assigned hardware channels
indicated in the leftward column of the display pages into the Assigned Channel column
of the corresponding Worksheets 3 through 7b. Also enter the DanLoad 6000 Unit number
and the physical slot, Jn number where the board is located. The number and type of
these assigned hardware channels determine the fixed input / output signal capability of
the individual DanLoad 6000.
4 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# Enter the power supply wiring information into Worksheet 8.
# Enter the swing arm wiring information into Worksheet 9. Enter a descriptive
identification of the loading side, such as north, west, etc.
# Enter the wiring information for the DUART, Worksheet 10, and the local area network,
Worksheet 11, if available at this time.
# The final step is to record or re-assign the physical hardware channels which are assigned
to the logical channels (functions) indicated in Worksheets 12 through 16. These
worksheets contain lists of all logical channels (functions) that can be assigned to
physical input or output channels. The two limitations for physical channel to logical
channel assignment are that the physical hardware to handle the channel must be present
and the physical input or output channel cannot have been previously assigned to some
other logical channel (function). Physical input / output channel assignments are made,
while in Program Mode, by using the 9 or 8 arrow key to place the box cursor over a
physical channel number (rightward column) corresponding to a logical channel
(function) displayed to the left of the physical channel number. The currently assigned
physical channel identification number, obtained from Worksheets 3 through 7b, is then
verified or changed. Press the ENTER key to accept the assignment or the CLEAR key
to reject the assignment and re-enter a number. If the entry is a valid assignment, the box
cursor automatically steps to the next parameter in the group. If the hardware is not
installed to support this physical channel or the number of supported physical channels is
exceeded, the message Point does not exist is displayed on the message line. If the
physical channel has previously been assigned to another logical channel (function), the
message Point already used is displayed on the message line. A previously assigned
physical channel can be re-assigned as follows. Locate the parameter where the physical
channel is assigned. Set the physical channel selection for that parameter to 0 (zero) to
cancel the assignment. Re-select the logical channel (function) that previously would not
accept the assignment and enter the physical channel number to make the assignment. If
necessary, re-select the logical channel (function) that was set to 0 (zero) in the step
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 5
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
above and make a new assignment to a desired unused physical channel.
The logical channels listed in Worksheets 12 through 16 are identified by program codes and
names. The functions of these logical channels are described below.
6 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A.1 Flow Meter Logical Input Signals (Worksheet 12)
# ccc Meter pulse board input

Assigns a physical meter pulse input to this logical channel. A minimum of one
flow meter input must be assigned. Worksheet 3 indicates the available flow meter
input physical channels.
# ccc Meter # temp input

Assigns a physical RTD input to this logical channel. Worksheet 7a / 7b indicates
the available RTD input physical channels.
# ccc Meter # pres input

Assigns a physical 4 to 20 mAdc input to this logical channel. Worksheets 7a / 7b
indicate the available analog input physical channels.
# ccc Meter # dens input

Assigns a physical 4 to 20 mAdc input to this logical channel. Worksheets 7a / 7b
indicate the available analog input physical channels.
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 7
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
A.2 Component Logical Input / Output Signals (Worksheet 13)

# ccc Pump control output
Assigns a physical discrete control output for a component pump control logical
function. The output is normally OPEN (pump off) and CLOSED to run the
pump motor. In many cases, one output can be used to energize two, three, or
four component pump contactors. This configuration conserves discrete outputs
when the pump logic is such that multiple component pumps are always energized
simultaneously.
# ccc Block valve output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for component block valve control
logical function. The output is normally OPEN (block valve closed) and
CLOSED to open the block valve.
# ccc Block valve input

Assigns a physical discrete status input for component block valve logical function.
Input is CLOSED when block valve is closed and OPEN when block valve is open.
This input explicitly informs the DanLoad 6000 that the component block valve is
open at the start of a batch delivery and closed at the end of a batch delivery. If
the input is not used, a failure to open block valve is indicated by a no flow alarm.
A failure to close block valve may be indicated by unauthorized flow alarm.
However, if the flow control valve is tight sealing, a failure to close block valve
is not detectable without status to this input.
# ccc Combination # nnnn

Assigns a physical discrete control output that is CLOSED when a combination of
components is selected for delivery. All fifteen possible combinations of four
components enabled and disabled are defined. These outputs conserve multiple
discrete outputs by performing internal logic of logical ANDing the four ccc Block
valve outputs, program codes 400, 402, 404, and 406.
8 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A.3 Flow Control Valve Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 14)

(Flow control valve circuit logic is described in Section 3. A minimum of one flow
control valve must be defined.)
# ccc Solenoid 1 (upstream)

Assigns a physical discrete control output for the upstream (normally open) pilot
on a digital flow control valve
# ccc Solenoid 2 (downstream)

Assigns a physical discrete control output for the upstream (normally closed) pilot
on a digital flow control valve)
# ccc Stem switch 1 (N.O.)

Assigns a physical discrete status input for the low flow shutdown (normally open)
microswitch on a two stage flow control valve
# ccc Stem switch 2 (N.C.)

Assigns a physical discrete status input for the low flow startup (normally closed)
microswitch on a two stage flow control valve
# ccc Close input

Assigns a physical discrete status input for closing the flow control valve during
a delivery. If assigned, the input circuit must remain CLOSED during a delivery.
If the input is OPENED, the flow control valve will be set fully closed. One
common application in delivery of LPG is from a normally closed low pressure
switch. An OPEN switch indicates that the downstream pressure is insufficient to
prevent product flashing at the flow meter. The delivery is suspended, to protect
the flow meter, when the switch OPENS.
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 9
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
A.4 Additive Injection Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 15)
# ccc Ratio output

Assigns a physical discrete control output to drive an additive injection device.
# ccc Feedback input

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an injection sensing device, such as
a flow switch, located on an additive injection system.
# ccc Selection input

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay for
enabling injection of an additive.
# ccc Pump output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for RUN / STOP control of an additive
pump.
# ccc Block valve output

Assigns a physical discrete control output for OPEN / CLOSE control of an
additive block valve.
10 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16)
# 342 Off-rack start/end

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay that
signals the DanLoad 6000 to start or end an off-rack blending operation. A
CLOSED input circuit indicates to start a batch / blend operation. An OPEN input
circuit indicates to end the active batch / blend operation.
# 343 Auto/manual change-over

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay that
controls the operating mode of the DanLoad 6000. This input is designed to be
driven by a watchdog timer or similar type of circuit in a terminal automation
system. A CLOSED input circuit indicates that the terminal automation system is
functioning properly and places the DanLoad 6000 in the Auto mode. An OPEN
input circuit indicates that the terminal automation system is off-line and places the
DanLoad 6000 in the Manual mode. The Manual mode enables local control of
the batch delivery operation from the DanLoad 6000 operator control panel.
# 344 Primary alarm reset

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch or relay contact
that resets an active primary alarm. This input permits resetting primary alarms
so that a batch delivery can be resumed after the alarm conditions have been
cleared. A momentary contact CLOSURE of this input resets the oldest active
alarm in a similar manner as a primary alarm is manually reset while in Manual
mode or Stand-alone mode. Each momentary contact CLOSURE of this input
circuit resets the next oldest primary alarm.
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 11
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16) (continued)
# ccc Safety circuit #

Assigns a physical discrete status input from an external switch contact or relay
contact that activates the corresponding alarm according to the configuration of the
corresponding alarm definition parameters, program codes 249 through 268. A
CLOSED input circuit indicates that the external device is in the normal or safe
state. An OPEN input circuit indicates that the external device is in an abnormal
or unsafe state.
# Swing arm side #

The swing arm status inputs, either one or two dry contact closures are not
assignable. These inputs are always wired to the 3-terminal board located on the
main processor board. Processing of the one or two swing arm status inputs is
determined by the selection of PC 312 Side detect method. a CLOSED input
circuit indicates that the swing arm is positioned at the corresponding side. An
OPEN input circuit indicates that the swing arm is in the parked position.
# 287 Alarm control output

Assigns a physical discrete control output that indicates the alarm status of the
DanLoad 6000. The output circuit is normally OPEN and is pulsed CLOSED
when a Secondary Alarm is active and is steady CLOSED when a Primary Alarm
is active.
12 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
# 31n Pulse per unit output #

Assigns a physical discrete control output that provides a pulse per quantity unit
output according the control PC' s ccc Pulse per unit output, program codes 128
to 134. These output circuits are designed to drive an external quantity
accumulating device, such as a totalizer, certain types of ticket printers, data
acquisition system, etc. The output circuit is normally OPEN and is pulsed
CLOSED for each programmed quantity unit measured by one to four flow meters.
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 13
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
A.5 Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals (Worksheet 16) (continued)
# 315 Trip 1 output

Assigns a physical discrete control output that provides an indication of the
delivery phase to external equipment. The output circuit is normally OPEN and
is CLOSED during low flow startup time.
# 316 Trip 2 output

is CLOSED during low flow startup time and high flow time.
# 317 Trip 3 output

is CLOSED from start of batch delivery to end of batch delivery.
14 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Number
Device / Function Required Worksheet
Components (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13
Blending (Yes / No) 13
Flow meters (1 to 4) 3, 12
Flow control valves (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 14
(digital / 2-stage)
Block valves (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13
Swing arm switches (1 or 2) 9, 16
Pump (1 to 4) 4, 5, 6, 13
Quantity compensation 7, 12
temperature
pressure
density
Meter proving 4, 5, 6, 12
tank prover
master meter
Additive injection (1 to 6) 4, 5, 6, 15
Safety circuits (permissives) 4, 5, 6, 16
Miscellaneous inputs 4, 5, 6, 16
Miscellaneous outputs 4, 5, 6, 16
Data communications 2 RS-485 or:
logging 1 RS-485/1 RS-232
terminal automation system and / or: 1 LAN
System Configuration
Unit:________
Worksheet 1
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 15
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Capacity Required
I/O Board Input Output Input Output
main processor 2 DC N/A N/A

2 RS-485 or: (swing arm)
1 RS-485/1 RS-232
and / or: 1 LAN
one meter pulse 2 pulse 2 pulse
(slot J5) 2 DC
two meter pulse 4 pulse 4 pulse
(slots J5 and J6) 4 DC
one analog (2-channel) 1 RTD N/A N/A
(slot J7) 1 4-20mAdc
one analog (8-channel) 4 RTD N/A N/A
(slot J7) 4 4-20mAdc
one AC I/O 2 DC/AC 8 AC
(slot J1)
two AC I/O 4 DC/AC 16 AC
(slots J1 and J2)
one enhanced AC I/O 6 DC/AC 6 AC
(slot J1)
two enhanced I/O 12 DC/AC 12 AC
(slot J1 and J2)
one AC I/O / 8 DC/AC 14 AC
one additive I/O
(slots J1 and J2)
one DC I/O 6 DC/AC 4 DC
(slot J3)
two DC I/O 12 DC/AC 8 DC
(slots J3 and J4)
Physical I/O Signal

Unit:_______
Worksheet 2
16 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Board Assigned
Function TB Channel Channel
Meter 1 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 1
Meter 1 pulse input 2 1 or 3
Meter 1 preamp common 3
Meter 2 preamp power (8 - 24 Vdc) 4
Meter 2 pulse input 5 2 or 4
Meter 2 preamp common 6
Meter 1 pulse output + 7 1 or 3
Meter 1 pulse output - 8 1 or 3
Meter 2 pulse output + 9 2 or 4
Meter 2 pulse output - 10 2 or 4
Control 1 switched + Vdc 11 1
Control 1 return - Vdc 12
P / S common
P / S common
Meter Pulse Board Wiring

Unit:_________ / Slot: J5 / J6
Worksheet 3
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 17
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Board Assigned
Status 2 switched Vdc/Vac 1 2
Status 2 common 2
Status 1 common 4
Control 8 supply Vac 5

Control 8 switched Vac 6 8
AC I/O Board Wiring

Unit:_______ / Slot: J1 / J2
Worksheet 4
18 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Board Assigned
Status 5/6 common 2
Status 3/4 common 5
Status 1/2 common 8

Control 5/6 supply Vac 11
Enhanced AC I/O Board Wiring

Unit:________ / Slot: J1 / J2
Worksheet 5
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 19
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Board Assigned
Status 6 supply Vdc 1
Status 6 switched Vdc 2 6

DC I/O Board Wiring

Unit:_______ / Slot: J3 / J4
Worksheet 6
20 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Board Assigned
Transmitter 1 power (24 Vdc) 1
Transmitter 1 input 2 1
Transmitter power common 3
+ Vsource 4
RTD 1 + 5 2
RTD 1 - 6 2
RTD current source 7
2-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring

Unit:__________ / Slot: J7
Worksheet 7a
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 21
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Board Assigned
Transmitter 1/2 power (24 Vdc) 1
Transmitter 3/4 power (24 Vdc) 4
Transmitter power common 7
+ Vsource 8
RTD 1 + 9 5
RTD 1 - 10 5
RTD loop tie point 11
RTD 2 + 12 6
RTD 2 - 13 6
RTD 3 + 15 7
RTD 3 - 16 7
RTD 4 + 18 8
RTD 4 - 19 8
RTD current source 20
8-Channel Analog Input Board Wiring

Unit:__________ / Slot: J7
Worksheet 7b
22 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Function TB Source /
Destination
Vac power hot TB1-1
Vac safety ground TB1-2
Vac neutral (230 Vac hot) TB1-3
Space heater Vac hot (supply) TB1-4
Space heater Vac neutral TB1-5
Vac permissive power input TB2-1

Vac permissive power neutral TB2-2
Vac permissive power output (fused) TB2-3
Power Supply Wiring

Unit:_______
Worksheet 8
Physical Actual
Function TB Channel Side
Swing arm side 1 1 1 (SW1)
(right)
Swing arm common 2 (center)
Swing arm side 2 3 2 (SW2)
(left)
Swing Arm Input Wiring

Main Processor Board
Unit:_________
Worksheet 9
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 23
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Function TB Destination
Channel 1, RS-485 Rx+ 1
Channel 1, RS-485 Rx- 2
Channel 1, RS-485 Tx+ 3
Channel 1, RS-485 Tx- 4
Channel 2, RS-485 Rx+ 5
or
Channel 2, RS-232 RxD
Channel 2, RS-485 Rx- 6
or
Channel 2, RS-232 CTS (clear to send)
Channel 2, RS-485 Tx+ 7
or
Channel 2, RS-232 TxD
Channel 2, RS-485 Tx- 8
Channel 2, RS-232 RTS (request to send) 9
Channel 2, RS-232 common 10
DUART Module Wiring

Unit:_______
Worksheet 10
24 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Function TB Destination
RS-485 Rx+ / Tx+ 1
common 2
RS-485 Rx- / Tx- 3
or:
Coax
LAN Module Wiring (Typical)

Unit:_______
Worksheet 11 (discontinued for v 1.20)
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 25
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Input Type
Logical Input Function RTD / Assigned

Pulse 4-20 mAdc Discrete Channel
FLOW INPUTS
TEMPERATURE INPUTS
318 Meter 1 temp input 1
PRESSURE INPUTS
320 Meter 1 pres input 1
DENSITY INPUTS
321 Meter 1 dens input 1
Flow Meter Logical Input Signals

Unit:________
Worksheet 12
26 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
Discrete Type
Component
Assigned
Logical I/O Function Input Output Channel
288 Pum p control output 1
400 Block valve output 1
401 Block valve input 1
408 C om bination 1 1X X X 1
409 C om bination 2 X 2X X 2
410 C om bination 3 12X X 1,2
411 C om bination 4 XX 3X 3
412 C om bination 5 1X 3X 1,3
413 C om bination 6 X23X 2,3
414 C om bination 7 123X 1,2,3
415 C om bination 8 X X X4 4
416 C om bination 9 1X X 4 1,4
417 C om bination 10 X 2X 4 2,4
418 C om bination 11 12X4 1,2,4
419 C om bination 12 X X 34 3,4
420 C om bination 13 1X 34 1,3,4
421 C om bination 14 X 234 2,3,4
422 C om bination 15 1234 1,2,3,4
Component Logical I/O Signals

Unit:_______
Worksheet 13
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 27
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Discrete Type
Valve Assigned
Logical I/O Function
Channel
Input Output
292 Solenoid 1 (upstream) 1

293 Solenoid 2 (downstream) 1



Flow Control Valve Logical I/O Signals

Unit:_______
Worksheet 14
28 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
Discrete Type
Injector
Assigned
Logical I/O Function Input Output Channel
380 Ratio output 1
800 Pum p output 1
381 Feedback input 1
382 Selection input 1
383 Ratio output 2
806 Pum p output 2
386 Ratio output 3
812 Pum p output 3
389 Ratio output 4
818 Pum p output 4
392 Ratio output 5
824 Pum p output 5
395 Ratio output 6
830 Pum p output 6
Additive Injection Logical I/O Signals

Unit:_______
Worksheet 15
Appendix A _____________________________________________________ 29
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
Discrete Type
Logical I/O Function Assigned

Input Output Channel
ALARM / STATUS INPUTS

342 Off-rack start/end /
343 Auto/manual change-over /

344 Primary alarm reset /
345 Safety circuit 1 /




--- Swing arm side 1 /

--- Swing arm side 2 /
ALARM / EVENT OUTPUTS

287 Alarm control output /
313 Pulse per unit output 1 /

314 Pulse per unit output 2 /
315 Trip 1 output /

316 Trip 2 output /
317 Trip 3 output /
Miscellaneous Logical I/O Signals

Unit:_______
Worksheet 16
30 _____________________________________________________ Appendix A
Appendix B
Program Code Defaults
Program Code List
Software Versions
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
This appendix contains a reference list of all program codes and the default state of the program
codes. Program codes for meters, valves, components, and additives are not displayed for
undefined devices or items. (Example: If only one flow meter is defined, the program codes for
flow meters 2, 3, and 4 are not displayed.) The Current column in the table is provided for
manual entry of the current setup status for each program code. The message < version #> in
this column indicates that the respective program code is not fully implemented in some versions
of the DanLoad 6000. Refer to Section B.2 of this appendix for additional information. It is
recommended to make copies of the table and to enter current setup data each DanLoad 6000 or
group of similar DanLoad 6000' s. This data can be used as an aid in re-configuration after loss
of setup data due to replacement of the main processor board or other system failure.
Some abbreviations used in the table are listed blow.

Abbreviation Description
nn a-n chars A user definable alpha-numeric string of up to nn characters can be entered

for this parameter.
DI Discrete status input (switch contact input).
DO Discrete control output (relay driver output).
AI 4 to 20 mAdc analog input for pressure or density
RTD resistive temperature device input.
See Section 6 for complete descriptions of all parameters.
Sub-section B.2 contains a list of program codes that are not fully implemented in all versions
of the DanLoad 6000. Please review this list before performing the setup procedure or changing
any program code value or option.
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 1
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
B.1 Program Code Default Value Assignments
The Setup Menu groups are indicated on separate rows in the Parameter column. Display pages
of each group are also indicated in the Parameter column. Display pages are indicated as <Page
n> when a group is divided into several pages with the same header name. The number <n>
is the sequential page number.
Several program codes have either the Weights and Measures or the Read-only attribute set TRUE
in the default state. These program codes / attributes are indicated in the Attributes column of the
table.
Attribute Description
W&M Weights and Measures The value of this program code can affect the flow
measurement accuracy or security of the DanLoad 6000. The value or
option of this program code can only be changed if the Weights and
Measures switch OFF (in the extended position) before the Setup Mode
is entered.
R Read-only The value of this program code can only be read. The value or
option cannot be manually changed from the front panel.
All program codes are listed in the following table. However, only those program codes that
have been enabled for the application will be displayed. (Example: Assume only one flow meter
is enabled by PC 050 Number of meters equal to 1. Then PC's 051, 052, and 053 for flow meter
one are displayed and PC's 054 through 062 for flow meters two, three, and four are not
displayed.)
2 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
C ode Param eter A ttribute O ptions D efault C urrent
U SER 1
001 Passcode 0 to 999999999 6000
002 U ser ID up to 16 a-n chars D anLoad 6000
003 Supervisor privilege No Y es

Y es
U SER 2
004 Passcode 0 to 999999999
005 U ser ID up to 16 a-n chars
006 Supervisor privilege No

Y es
U SER 3
007 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
U SER 4
010 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
U SER 5
013 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
U SER 6
016 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 3
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
U SER 7
0019 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
U SER 8
022 Passcode 0 to 999999999

Y es
4 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
U N IT PA R A M ETER S < PA G E 1>
025 O perating m ode A uto

M anual
Stand-alone
026 U nit type W&M Seq.(auto) Seq.(auto)

Seq.(m anual)
In-line
O ff-rack
027 V alve type W&M Std digital Std digital

Std 2-stage
028 Language English English

English 2
C hinese
Thai
029 Products units O ff G al

Bbl
D ek
Lit
G al
lbs
kgs
L
l
030 N um ber of data item prom pts 0 to 5 0
031 #1 Enter data item #1 up to 32 chars
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 5
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
036 Prom pt tim e-out (secs) 0 to 9999 60
037 C heck display W&M O ff O ff

Start
Start/restart
038 D ate form at m m /dd/yy m m /dd/yy

dd/m m /yy
yy/m m /dd
039 D ate separator / (slash) / (slash)

. (dot)
040 D ecim al separator . (dot) . (dot)

, (com m a)
041 D isplay data rate 1200 28800

2400
4800
9600
19200
28800
042 Transaction # R eadO nly 0 to 9999 9999
043 Batch # R eadO nly 0 to 9999 9999
044 A dditive units cc cc

in3
G al
045 R ound m ethod Trunc Up

Up
U p/odd
046 D ensity/gravity scale 1 to 4 4
6 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
V A LV E PA R A M E TER S
048 N um ber of valves 1 to 4 1
049 Initial flow tim e (secs) 0 to 9.999 0.200
M ETER PA R A M E TER S
050 N um ber of m eters 1 to 4 1
M ETER 1 PA R A M E TER S
051 M eter ID up to 5 a-n chars M1
052 M eter pulse board input 0 to # of m trs 1
053 V alve to be controlled 1 to # of vlvs 1
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 7
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
C O M PO N EN T PA R A M E TER S
065 N um ber of com ponents 1 to 4 1
CO M PO NEN T 1
066 C om ponent ID up to 16 a-n chars C om p 1
067 M eter 1 to # m trs 1
068 M ass adjustm ent 0.000000 to 0.000000

999.999999
CO M PO NEN T 2

999.999999
CO M PO NEN T 3

999.999999
CO M PO NEN T 4

999.999999
8 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
D ELIV ER Y PA R A M E TER S
078 M axim um preset qty 5 to 999999 3000
079 M inim um preset qty 5 to 999999 50
080 Preset/delivery type W&M G ross G ross

Std
081 D elivery display type W&M G ross G ross

Std
082 Stop key action Low flow Low flow

Im m ediate
083 Fall back qty 0 to 99999 1000
C O M P 1 D ELIV ER Y PA R A M E TER S
084 Low flow start qty 0 to 99999 50
085 Low flow restart qty 0 to 99999 20
086 Low flow stop qty 0 to 99999 50
087 Line pack delay (secs) 0 to 999 2
088 Pum p stop delay (secs) 0 to 999 30
089 Block valve delay (secs) 0 to 99 0
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 9
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
D EL IV ER Y PA R A M ET ER S (continued)
108 R am p clicks 0 to 999 30
109 M aintenance clicks 0 to 999 30
110 A dditive pum p stop (secs) 0 to 9999 10
111 Prim ary com ponent 1 to 4 1
10 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
D IG ITA L V A LV E 1 PA R A M E TER S
112 Low flow % error W&M 2 to 10 5
113 H igh flow % error W&M 2 to 10 2
114 V alve delay (secs) 0.000 to 9.999 0.040
115 O pen m ethod N orm al N orm al

O pened
C losed

O pened
C losed

O pened
C losed

O pened
C losed
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 11
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
PULSE PER U NIT O UTPU TS
128 N um ber of pulse per unit outputs W&M 0 to 2 2
PULSE PER U NIT O UTPU T 1
129 C ontrol m eters W&M X , G , or S for GGGG

each m eter
130 Factor W&M 0.1 to 10.0 1.0
131 Pulse width (m s) W&M 10 to 87 m s 20
PULSE PER U NIT O UTPU T 2
132 C ontrol m eters W&M X , G , or S for GGGG

each m eter
133 Factor W&M 0.1 to 10.0 1.0
134 Pulse width (m s) W&M 10 to 87 m s 20
12 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A D D ITIV E PA R A M E TER S
135 N um ber of additives 0 to 6 0
136 Selection m ethod External External

Prom pt
Inputs
137 Totalizing m ethod O ut O ut

O ut/Sgl
O ut/D bl
O ut/H shk
In/Sgl
In/D bl
In/H shk
In
138 C lean line qty 0 to 9999 0
A D D ITIV E 1 PA R A M E TER S
139 A dditive control m eters X , G , or S XXXX

for each m tr
140 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
141 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
142 Totalizing volum e 0.00 to 999.99 0.00
143 A vailable No No
Y es

for each m tr
145 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
146 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
Y es

for each m tr
150 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
151 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
Y es
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 13
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

for each m tr
155 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
156 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
Y es

for each m tr
160 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
161 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
Y es

for each m tr
165 R atio qty 1.0 to 999.9 40.0
166 O ffset volum e 0.0 to 999.9 0.0
Y es
14 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
M ETER FA C TO R S
169 N um ber of factors/com ponent W&M 1 to 4 2
170 M eter factor m ethod W&M Fixed Fixed

Linear
171 N om inal K-factor W&M 0.5 to 200.0 23.0
172 M aster m eter factor W&M 0.5000 to 2.0000 1.0000
174 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200
175 M eter factor 1 W&M 1.0000
176 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600
178 Flow rate 3 W&M 0 to 99999
185 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 15
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
187 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600
196 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200
198 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600
16 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
207 Flow rate 1 W&M 0 to 99999 200
209 Flow rate 2 W&M 0 to 99999 600
M F V ALID ATIO N
215 M aster M F % W&M 0.00 to 99.99 2.00
216 A djacent M F % W&M 0.00 to 99.99 0.25
218 Product units m nem onic up to 6 a-n chars
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 17
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
A LA R M PA R A M ETER S < PA G E 1>
219 Safety circuit m essage Specific Specific

G eneral
220 Secondary alarm reset (secs) 0 to 9999 300
221 Low flow alarm action O ff Prim ary

Info
Prim ary
222 M inim um flow rate 0 to 99999 100
223 Low flow tim e (secs) 5 to 999 10
224 H igh flow alarm action O ff Prim ary

Info
Prim ary
225 M axim um flow rate 0 to 99999 660
226 H igh flow tim e (secs) 5 to 999 10
227 O verrun lim it qty 0.0 to 99.9 2.0
228 U nderflow alarm action O ff O ff

Prim ary
229 U nderflow lim it qty 0.0 to 99.9 5.0
230 N o flow t-o alarm action O ff Prim ary

Info
Prim ary
231 N o flow t-o tim e (secs) 1 to 99 5
232 U nauthorized flow lim it qty 0.1 to 99.9 10
233 Error lim it (pulses) W&M 0 to 255 0
234 R eset count (pulses) W&M 0 to 65535 10000
235 D ata logging alarm action Info Info

Prim ary
236 C om m s fail alarm action Info Prim ary

Prim ary
237 C om m s fail t-o (secs) 1 to 300 10
18 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
238 Tem p fail alarm action Info Prim ary

Prim ary
239 M inim um tem perature -99.9 to + 999.9 -40.0
240 M axim um tem perature -99.9 to + 999.9 + 110.0
241 D ensity fail alarm action Info Prim ary

Prim ary
242 M inim um density/gravity 0.0000
243 M axim um density/gravity 0.0000
244 M inim um pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 0.0
245 M axim um pressure 0.0 to 9999.9 0.00
246 A dditive error lim it 1 to 99 3
247 Feedback tim e 0 to 9999 10
248 Block valve tim e (secs) 0 to 99 10
249 C ircuit 1 alarm action Secondary Secondary

Prim ary
250 #1 G round detector open 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
252 #2 O verspill detector open 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
254 #3 Perm issive pow er failure 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
256 #4 A dditive injection failure 34 a-n char < m essage
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 19
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

Prim ary
258 #5 A rm dow n side 1 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
260 #6 A rm dow n side 2 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
262 #7 W alkw ay dow n side 1 34 a-n char < m essage

Prim ary
264 #8 W alkw ay dow n side 2 34 a-n char < m essage
265 C ircuit 5 type 0 to 2 1
20 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
I/O PA R A M ETER S < PA G E 1>
280 Slot 1 board Em pty can be:

D C I/O A C I/O
A C I/O or
Enhanced I/O A dd I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog

D C I/O A C I/O
A C I/O or
Enhanced I/O A dd I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 21
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

D C I/O D C I/O
A C I/O
Enhanced I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog

D C I/O D C I/O
A C I/O
Enhanced I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog

D C I/O 2-C h. M eter
A C I/O Pulse
Enhanced I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog

D C I/O 2-C h. M eter
A C I/O Pulse
Enhanced I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog

D C I/O x-C h A nalog
A C I/O
Enhanced I/O
2-C h. M eter Pulse
2-C h. A nalog
8-C h. A nalog
287 A larm control output 0 to m ax D O 's 1
C O M PO N EN T 1 I/O
288 Pum p control output 0 to m ax D O 's 8
22 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
V A LV E 1 I/O
292 Solenoid 1 (upstream ) 0 to m ax D O 's 7
293 Solenoid 2 (dow nstream ) 0 to m ax D O 's 6
V A LV E 2 I/O
V A LV E 3 I/O
V A LV E 4 I/O
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 23
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
312 Side detect m ethod Sgl w /o sw . Sgl w /o sw .

Sgl 1 sw . (SW 2)
Sgl 1 sw . (SW 1)
D bl 1 sw . (SW 2)
D bl 1 sw . (SW 1)
D bl 2 sw .
313 Pulse per unit output 1 W&M 0 to m ax D O 's 9
314 Pulse per unit output 2 W&M 0 to m ax D O 's 10
315 Trip 1 output 0 to m ax D O 's 0
318 M eter 1 tem p input W&M 0 to m ax RTD 1

input
319 M eter 1 offset (O hm s) W&M -20.00 to + 20.00 0.00
320 M eter 1 pres input 0 to m ax A I's 0
321 M eter 1 dens input 0 to m ax A I's 0

input

input

input
24 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
342 O ff-rack start/end 0 to m ax D I's 0
343 A uto/m anual change-over 0 to m ax D I's 0
344 Prim ary alarm reset 0 to m ax D I's 3
345 Safety circuit 1 0 to m ax D I's 0
353 R TD inputs Std 3850 Std 3850

H i 3850
Low 3850
Std 3902
H i 3902
Low 3902
355 Prim ary LC D type U nknow n O ptrex

Standish
O ptrex
O ld O ptrex
356 Prim ary LC D m inim um light 0 to 1023 455
357 Prim ary LC D m axim um light 0 to 1023 405
358 Secondary LC D type U nknow n U nknow n

Std 1
Ext 1
Std 2
Ext 2
359 Secondary LC D m inim um light 0 to 1023 455
360 Secondary LC D m axim um light 0 to 1023 405
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 25
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
361 R ecipe 1 input 0 to m ax D I's 0
367 R ecipe 1 output 0 to m ax D O 's 0
26 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
A D D ITIV E 1 I/O PA R A M E TER S
380 R atio output 0 to m ax D O 's 0
381 Feedback input 0 to m ax D I's 0
382 Selection input 0 to m ax D I's 0
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 27
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
C O M PO N EN T 1 BLO C K V A LV E
400 Block valve output 0 to m ax D O 's 0
401 Block valve input 0 to m ax D I's 0
C O M PO N EN T C O M BIN A TIO N S < PA G E 5>
408 C om bination 1 (1X X X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
409 C om bination 2 (X 2X X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
410 C om bination 3 (12X X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
411 C om bination 4 (X X 3X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
412 C om bination 5 (1X 3X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
413 C om bination 6 (X 23X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
414 C om bination 7 (123X ) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
415 C om bination 8 (X X X4) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
416 C om bination 9 (1X X 4) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
417 C om bination 10 (X 2X 4) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
418 C om bination 11 (12X 4) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
419 C om bination 12 (X X 34) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
420 C om bination 13 (1X 34) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
421 C om bination 14 (X 234) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
422 C om bination 15 (1234) 0 to m ax D O 's 0
426 Buoyancy 0.0000 to 0.0000

9.9999
28 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
TEM PER A TU R E PA R A M E TER S
427 Tem perature units W&M C C

F
428 D ensity units W&M lb/ft3 lb/ft3

kg/m 3
g/cm 3
429 Pressure units W&M psi psi

Pa
in. H 2O
in. H g
bar
m bar
430 R eference tem perature W&M -99.9 to + 999.9 15.0
431 Sam ple qty W&M 0 to 9999 100
C O M P 1 TEM PER A TU R E PA R M S
432 Tem perature option W&M O ff O ff

Linear
A PI 6A
A PI 6B
A PI 6C
A PI 24A
A PI 24B
A PI 54A
A PI 54B
A PI 54C
N /A 1-5
C hina
433 A lpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100
434 Backup tem perature W&M -99.9 to + 999.9 15.0

Linear
A PI 6A
A PI 6B
A PI 6C
A PI 24A
A PI 24B
A PI 54A
A PI 54B
A PI 54C
N /A 1-5
C hina
436 A lpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 29
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________

Linear
A PI 6A
A PI 6B
A PI 6C
A PI 24A
A PI 24B
A PI 54A
A PI 54B
A PI 54C
N /A 1-5
C hina
439 A lpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100

Linear
A PI 6A
A PI 6B
A PI 6C
A PI 24A
A PI 24B
A PI 54A
A PI 54B
A PI 54C
N /A 1-5
C hina
442 A lpha W&M 0.0002700 to 0.0016740 0.0005100
30 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
C O M P 1 PR ESSU R E PA R A M E TER S
444 Pressure option W&M O ff O ff

C onst
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
445 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0
446 V apor pressure W&M 0.0 to 9999.9 0.0

C onst
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
448 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0

C onst
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
451 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0

C onst
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.1M
11.2.2M
454 F-factor W&M 0 to 999999999 0
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 31
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
CO M P 1 DEN SITY/G RA VITY
456 D ensity/gravity option W&M O ff O ff

On
457 Backup density/gravity W&M 0.00 to 100.00 0.0000

(for A PI 6A , 6B, 6C )
0.6110 to 1.0760
(for API 24A, 24B)
610.5 to 1075.0
(for O ff, Linear, 54A , 54B, 54C )

On

(for A PI 6A , 6B, 6C )
0.6110 to 1.0760
(for API 24A, 24B)
610.5 to 1075.0

On

(for A PI 6A , 6B, 6C )
0.6110 to 1.0760
(for API 24A, 24B)
610.5 to 1075.0

On

(for A PI 6A , 6B, 6C )
0.6110 to 1.0760
(for API 24A, 24B)
610.5 to 1075.0
32 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
M ETER 1
464 Pressure @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
465 Pressure @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
466 D ensity @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
467 D ensity @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
M ETER 2
468 Pressure @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
469 Pressure @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
470 D ensity @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
471 D ensity @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
M ETER 3
472 Pressure @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
473 Pressure @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
474 D ensity @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
475 D ensity @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
M ETER 4
476 Pressure @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
477 Pressure @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0
478 D ensity @ 4 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
479 D ensity @ 20 m A 0 to 9999.9 0.0000
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 33
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
REC IPES
480 N um ber of recipes 1 to 30 1
REC IPE 1
481 N am e up to 16 a-n chars R ecipe #1
482 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100 100.00
483 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100 0.00
484 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100 0.00
485 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100 0.00
486 Sequence to load 4-digits, 1

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 2
487 N am e up to 16 a-n chars
488 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
489 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
490 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
491 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100
492 Sequence to load 4-digits,

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 3
494 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
495 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
496 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
497 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
34 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
REC IPE 4
500 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
501 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
502 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
503 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 5
506 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
507 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
508 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
509 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 6
513 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
513 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
514 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
515 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 7
518 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
519 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
520 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
521 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 35
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
REC IPE 8
524 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
525 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
526 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
527 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
REC IPE 9
530 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
531 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
532 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
533 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 10
536 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
537 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
538 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
539 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 11
542 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
543 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
544 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
545 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
36 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
R EC IPE 12
548 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
549 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
550 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
551 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 13
554 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
555 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
556 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
557 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 14
560 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
561 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
562 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
563 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 15
566 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
567 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
568 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
569 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 37
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
R EC IPE 16
572 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
573 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
574 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
575 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 17
578 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
579 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
580 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
581 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 18
584 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
585 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
586 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
587 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 19
590 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
591 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
592 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
593 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
38 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
R EC IPE 20
596 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
597 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
598 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
599 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 21
602 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
603 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
604 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
605 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 22
608 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
609 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
610 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
611 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 23
614 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
615 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
616 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
617 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 39
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
R EC IPE 24
620 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
621 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
622 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
623 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 25
626 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
627 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
628 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
629 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 26
632 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
633 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
634 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
635 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 27
638 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
639 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
640 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
641 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
40 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
R EC IPE 28
644 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
645 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
646 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
647 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 29
650 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
651 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
652 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
653 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
R EC IPE 30
656 C om ponent 1 % 0 to 100
657 C om ponent 2 % 0 to 100
658 C om ponent 3 % 0 to 100
659 C om ponent 4 % 0 to 100

lim it 1 to 4 each
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 41
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
C h. A
663 M ode N ot U sed N ot U sed

M odbus RTU
A SC II
D ata Logging
664 D ata rate 300 9600

600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
665 W ord size 5 8

6
7
8
666 Stop bits 1 1

1 1/2
2
667 Parity N one Even

O dd
Even
42 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
C h. B
668 M ode N ot U sed N ot U sed

M odbus RTU
A SC II
D ata Logging
669 D ata rate 300 9600

600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
670 W ord size 5 8

6
7
8
671 Stop bits 1 1

1 1/2
2
672 Parity N one Even

O dd
Even
679 Enabled (Enable the dynam ic data display) No Y es

Y es
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 43
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
D Y N A M IC D A TA D ISPLA Y < PA G E 1>
680 Elem ent 1 data code < see table in G rs batch qty
Section
6.20.1> (002)
681 Elem ent 2 data code < see table in Std batch qty
Section
6.20.1> (003)
682 Elem ent 3 data code < see table in M tr 1 grs total
Section
6.20.1> (004)
683 Elem ent 4 data code < see table in M tr 1 std total
Section
6.20.1> (005)
684 Elem ent 5 data code < see table in M tr 1 grs batch
Section
6.20.1> (006)
685 Elem ent 6 data code < see table in M tr 1 std batch
Section
6.20.1> (007)
686 Elem ent 7 data code < see table in M tr 1 grs unauth
Section
6.20.1> (017)
687 Elem ent 8 data code < see table in M tr 1 flw rate
Section
6.20.1> (008)
688 Elem ent 9 data code < see table in M tr 1 factor

Section
6.20.1> (011)
689 Elem ent 10 data code < see table in M tr 1 grs load
Section
6.20.1> (103)
690 Elem ent 11 data code < see table in M tr 1 pls cnt
Section
6.20.1> (012)
691 Elem ent 12 data code < see table in M tr 1 m ax flw rate
Section
6.20.1> (010)
44 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
692 Elem ent 13 data code < see table in M tr 1 curr tem p
Section
6.20.1> (074)
693 Elem ent 14 data code < see table in C m p 1 ave tem p
Section
6.20.1> (080)
694 Elem ent 15 data code < see table in C m p 1 ave vlv cls
Section
6.20.1> (075)
695 Elem ent 16 data code < see table in A rm position

Section
6.20.1> (081)
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 45
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
D A TA LO G G IN G < PA G E 1>
696 Batch sum m ary O ff O ff

On
697 Transaction sum m ary O ff O ff

On
698 A larm log O ff O ff

On
699 Pow er fail log O ff O ff

On
700 Program m ode entry/exit O ff O ff

On
701 W & M switch opened/closed O ff O ff

On
D A TA LO G G IN G < PA G E 2>
702 Program value change log O ff O ff

On
703 M eter proving run log O ff O ff

On
704 C rash m em ory sum m ary O ff O ff

On
46 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
BLEN D IN G < PA G E 1>
712 R ate reduction 0 to 9999 100
714 C lean line qty 0 to 9999 0
715 Low prop fac 1 to 4 1
716 C orrect after qty 0 to 9999 100
717 A larm after qty 0 to 9999 200
718 A djustm ent qty 0 to 9999 50
719 C om p % display G ross G ross

Std
722 Blend error m ethod G rspctbatch G rspctbatch

Stdpctbatch
G rsqtydiff
Stdqtydiff
G rspctsm pl
Stdpctsm pl
Flrtsm pl
723 M ax dev % 0 to 999 2
724 Blend tol % 0 to 999 5
725 M ax dev qty 0 to 9999 20
726 Blend tol qty 0 to 9999 40
727 Blend sam ple qty 0 to 9999 10

On
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 47
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
M ETER 1
728 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
729 R atio adj fac 0.00 to 9.99 1.00
M ETER 2
734 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
735 R atio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
M ETER 3
740 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
741 R atio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
M ETER 4
746 Flow adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
747 R atio adj fac 0.0 to 9.99 1.00
CO M P 1
752 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120
CO M P 2
758 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120
CO M P 3
764 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120
CO M P 4
770 Stop rate 0 to 99999 120
48 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
REC IPE 1
776 Low flow rate 0 to 99999 300
777 H igh flow rate 0 to 99999 600
REC IPE 2
REC IPE 3
REC IPE 4
REC IPE 5
REC IPE 6
REC IPE 7
REC IPE 8
REC IPE 9
R EC IPE 10
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 49
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
R ECIPE 11-20
R ECIPE 21-30
AD DITIVE 1
800 Pum p output 0 to m ax D O 's 0
AD DITIVE 2
AD DITIVE 3
AD DITIVE 4
AD DITIVE 5
AD DITIVE 6
50 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
_____________________________________________________ DanLoad 6000
B.2 Version Dependent Program Codes
This section will be used to tabulate program codes that are not fully implemented in some of the
firmware releases of the Script DanLoad 6000. For future releases of the firmware beyond 1.2
check the version of the Script DanLoad 6000 firmware and the program codes to be listed here
before setup or re-configuration of a Script DanLoad 6000.
Firmware release identification:

Firmware Version Number Release Date
1.2 March 1997
The n/a in the version column of the table indicates that the program code function is not
applicable in that version of the firmware. The options for program codes that are not applicable
should remain in the default state as shipped from the factory. Contact the Daniel Electronics
Division Field Service Department for additional information on these program codes.
Appendix B _____________________________________________________ 51
DanLoad 6000 ____________________________________________________
52 _____________________________________________________ Appendix B
Appendix C
Spare Parts
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS PROPOSAL
ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DATE
P.O.
S.O.
9720 Katy Road P.O. Box 19097 Houston, Texas 77024
ITEM QUAN MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

PRICE NET
6000-(--------) Select Spare Parts per unit 1
dash number (found on
Model # tag)
Spare PCB Assemblies 2
1 1 (---1----) 3-6000-002 Meter Pulse BD. CE-12604 3
(---2----) 4
2 1 (----1---) 3-6000-005 AC I/O BD. CE-12613 5
(----3---) 6
(----5---) 7
3 1 (-----1--) 3-6000-006 DC I/O BD CE-12616 8
(-----2--) 9
4 1 (-------2) 3-6000-020 Duart (2) RS-485 output 10
CE-12625-2
5 1 (-------1) 3-6000-009 Duart BD (1) RS-232 (1) RS-485 11
CE-12625-1
6 1 (----2---) 3-6000-010 Additive injection BD CE-12628 12
(----4---) 13
(----5---) 14
7 1 (------2-) 3-6000-007 A/D 8-channel BD CE-12619-2 15
TITLE MODEL NO. TOTAL
Vonnie
DRN.DATE
Recommended Spare Parts List 6000
7-7-93
CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.
Model 6000 Preset
APPVD DATE NEXT ASSY.
A 9312 7-93 DLT
REV ECO NO DATE BY PART NO.
SP-12533 SH 1 OF 3
P.O.
S.O.
ITEM QUAN. MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

PRICE NET
8 1 (------1-) 3-6000-026 A/D 2-Channel BD CE-12725 1
9 1 (--1-----) 3-6000-027 115 Vac P/S CE-12575-1 2
(--3-----) 3
10 1 (--2-----) 3-6000-031 230 Vac P/S CE-12575-2 4
(--4-----) 5
11 1 (-1------) 3-6000-052 Keypad Assy English CE-12680 6
12 1 (-3------) 3-6000-054 Keypad Assy French CE-12680 7
13 1 (-2------) 3-6000-055 Keypad Assy Spanish CE-12680 8
14 1 ALL 3-6000-028 Display CE-12578 9
15 1 ALL 3-6000-029 CPU BD CE-12581 10
16 1 ALL 3-6000-030 Keyboard CE-12584 11
17 1 ALL 3-6000-032 Motherboard CE-12590 12
OPTIONAL ASSEMBLIES 13
18 1 3-6000-017 I/O Card Extender BE-12647-1 14
19 1 3-6000-047 P/S Card Extender BE-12647-2 15
20 1 3-6000-050 Battery (CPU) module 3.OV BE-11887 16
21 1 3-6000-070 Rib/Cable Key-Display BE-12685 17
TITLE DRN. DATE MODEL NO. TOTAL
CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.
REV ECO NO DATE BY PART NO. SH 2 OF 3

SP-12533
P.O.
S.O.
ITEM QUAN. MODEL NO. PART NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT TOTAL

PRICE NET
22 1 3-6000-071 Rib/Cable Display-CPU BE-12683 1
23 1 3-6000-073 Rib/Cable P/S-Display BE-12689 2
24 3-6000-013 P/S BD Meter Pulse BD AE-12637 3
(Note this board is included on 4
3-6000-002 above) 5
6
OPTIONAL MECHANICAL PARTS 7
8
25 5 4-9213-510 Enclosure Lid mounting bolts 9
socket head M10-1.5 X 50MM 10
26 4 4-9213-511 Enclosure mounting bolts 11
socket head M10-1.5 X 15MM 12
27 2 4-9213-512 Enclosure Lid security mounting bolts 13
socket head M10-1.5 X 60MM W/hole 14
28 1 4-9200-013 Keypad wire seal screw 15
16
17
TITLE DRN. DATE MODEL NO. TOTAL
CHD. DATE TOP ASSY.
REV ECO NO DATE BY PART NO. SH 3 OF 3

SP-12533
Appendix D
Drawings
Device Linkages BE-18204

Program Code to Device Assignments DE-18201
Overview and Board Layout CE-12691
Field Wiring, Power Supply CE-12692
Field Wiring, CPU & DUART Board CE-12693
Surge Protect, V.1 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19391
Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, (2) RS-485 CE-19392
Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, RS-485 Multipt CE-19393
Surge Protect, V.2 DUART, RS-485 & RS-232 CE-19394
Field Wiring, Meter Pulse Bd (2-Ch) CE-12694
Field Wiring, AC I/O Board CE-12695
Field Wiring, DC I/O Board CE-12696
Field Wiring, Enhance I/O Bd CE-19027
Field Wiring, Additive Injector Board CE-12697
Field Wiring, 2-Chan. ADC Board BE-12707
Field Wiring, 8-Chan. ADC Board CE-12698
Field Wiring, Remote Display BE-12711
Outline and Dimension XP enclosure DE-12535
Suggested Permissive Wiring BE-12722
Swing Arm Applications BE-12789
Print Sharer Wiring (Dresselhaus) BE-12462
Wiring for Model 1815 Valve AE-12496
Control Valve Seal Placement AK-31030
Turbine Meter Seal Placement AK-31031
DanLoad 6000 Preset Seal Placement AK-31032
Typical Swing Arm / Ground Wiring AK-31033
WARRANTY CLAIM REQUIREMENTS
To make a warranty claim, you, the Purchaser, must:
1. Provide Daniel with proof of the Date of Purchase and proof of the Date of Shipment of
the product in question.
2. Return the product to Daniel within twelve (12) months of the date of original shipment
of the product, or within eighteen (18) months of the date of original shipment of the
product to destinations outside of the United States. The Purchaser must prepay any
shipping charges. In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any product shipped
for return, and assumes the risk of loss of the product during shipment.
3. To obtain Warranty service or to locate the nearest Daniel office, sales, or service center
call (281) 897-2900, Fax (281) 897-2901, or contact:
Daniel Measurement Services

19203 Hempstead Highway
Houston, Texas 77065
When contacting Daniel for product service, the purchaser is asked to provide information
as indicated on the following "Customer Problem Report".
Daniel Measurement Services offers both on call and contract maintenance service
designed to afford single source responsibility for all its products.
Daniel Industries, Inc. reserves the right to make changes at any time to any product to
improve its design and to insure the best available product.
DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC.
CUSTOMER PROBLEM REPORT
FOR FASTEST SERVICE, COM PLETE THIS FORM , AND RETURN IT ALONG WITH THE AFFECTED
EQUIPM ENT TO CUSTOM ER SERVICE AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW .
COMPANY NAME:____________________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL CONTACT:_________________________________ PHONE:______________________________
REPAIR P. O. #:_____________________________ IF W ARRANTY, UNIT S/N: _________________________
INVOICE ADDRESS:____________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
SHIPPING ADDRESS: ___________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
RETURN SHIPPING METHOD: __________________________________________________________________
EQUIPMENT M ODEL #:____________________ S/N:__________________FAILURE DATE: _____________
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM : __________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WHAT W AS HAPPENING AT TIME OF FAILURE? ________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS: ____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REPORT PREPARED BY:________________________________ TITLE:________________________________
IF YOU REQUIRE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, PLEASE FAX OR WRITE THE MAIN CUSTOMER SERVICE
DEPARTMENT AT:
DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES PHONE: (281) 897-2900

ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE FAX: (281) 897-2901
19203 HEMPSTEAD HIGHWAY
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77065
The sales and service offices of Daniel Industries, Inc. are located
throughout the United States and in major countries overseas.
Please contact Daniel Measurement Services at
19203 Hempstead Highway, Houston, Texas 77065, or phone (281) 897-2900
for the location of the sales or service office nearest you.
Daniel Measurement Services offers both on-call and contract
maintenance service designed to provide single-source
responsibility for all Daniel Measurement and Control products.
D aniel M easurem ent and C ontrol reserves the right to m ake changes to any of its products or services
at any tim e without prior notification in order to im prove that product or service and to supply
the best product or service possible.

Danload 6000 Script Language Reference Manual: Daniel Measurement and Control Houston, Texas

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Danload 6000 Script Language Reference Manual: Daniel Measurement and Control Houston, Texas

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DanLoad 6000

DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL

Part Number: 3-9000-678

i) recognize and accept dates falling on or after 1 January 2000;

DANIEL INDUSTRIES, INC. AND DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL ("DANIEL")

PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER

All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or

5.0 FLOW METER PROVING

6.0 PROGRAM CODE DESCRIPTIONS

B.1 Program Code Default Value Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

C Recommended Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

D Drawings ..................................... D-1

2-1 Standard Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

3-1 Menu Tree ..................................... 3-6

4-1 Keypad Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

5-1 Prover / Meter Volume Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

6-1 Menu Tree .................................... 6-10

APN A Worksheets 1 to 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15 to A-30

APN B Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3 to B-50

How to use the Manual

Information applicable to new installations is located in the following sections.

Information applicable to system operation is located in the following sections.

The individual sections contain the following information.

# Section 5 - Flow Meter Proving

# Section 6 - Program Code Definitions

# Appendix A - Installation Worksheets

# Appendix B - Program Code Configuration

1.1 Functional Characteristics

1.2 Hardware Configuration

1.3 General Terminology

batch A preset quantity-based product delivery or blended component delivery of

gross standard quantity

the gross quantity corrected to standard temperature and pressure. This is a

K-factor (system factor)

Meter prover volume corrected to standard conditions

quantity (example: gross standard quantity)

recipe A pre-entered delivery / blending / control description that allows the

transaction Grouping of one or more consecutive batch deliveries for accounting

volume (example: indicated volume; gross volume)

This page intentionally left blank.

Installation __________________________________________________ 2-1

2.1 DanLoad 6000 Specifications

Item Standard Remote / Secondary

# Cable entry (USA version):

# Cable entry (metric version):

Installation __________________________________________________ 2-3

Standard Enclosure Dimensions

Installation __________________________________________________ 2-5

Standard Enclosure Field Mounting

Shallow Enclosure Dimensions

Installation __________________________________________________ 2-7

Shallow Enclosure Field Mounting

2.2 Installation Planning

2.2.1 Card Cage Description

Installation __________________________________________________ 2-9

Card cage Layout

NOTE: Placement of I/O boards in card cage determines I/O assignments

2.2.2 Input/Output Board Description and Jumper Settings

# Power Supply (DC Voltage)

DC Power Supply Voltage Use

Jumper Settings (Field Wiring Diagram CE-12692)

AC Power Input Jumpers

Installed horizontally on top of card cage with component side up.